Home

MES Interface Module User`s Manual

Contents

1. 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action The SQL text transmission function allows automatic creation of SQL texts enabling it S communications with the database i The following commands can be selected for the SQL text e Select MultiSelect Update e Insert z e Delete z For the SQL text transmission setting refer to the following o Le K7 Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action 2S 1 Select MultiSelect Select MultiSelect is used to write a database value to a tag component value area or no to store it in the temporary variable area by sending a SQL text to the database 5 When a value is stored in the temporary variable area it can be used as a variable for 3 other actions g 5 2 Update and Insert Update and Insert are used to embed a tag component value or a temporary variable in an SQL text and write the value to the database a Zz B22 3 Delete AF Ow Delete is used to eliminate a record from the database ooo Database server computer a Select MultiSelect z Select 25 Tag Component Sz Temporary variable K Data ac 25 Update Tag Component 3 Temporary variable Constant Insert Database Tag Component z Temporary variable fa Constant S P Delete x1 E ___ BR 8 1 There is no data communication TEE Figure 6 8 SQL text transmission Communication action g z lt Bes Point o On
2. d Manually resending data m W Execute manual resend of the DB buffer data After line recovery retry the manual resend of DB Resend request from MES interface function buffer data configuration tool Remote operation x Resend request from the specified tag component in Resend DB buffer request 2 fe LF Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting z Section 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering sa be cas Were SQL texts sent to Not sent the database 2 Factors for starting DB buffering z Sent 3 In the order of storing the jobs data in the DB buffer the G accumulated data of the jobs with Auto resend setting m are sent again 1 If a job with manual resend setting is started during 2 manual resending its SQL texts are stored in the DB buffer and then sent to the database 1 ae Zi 2 nDo 285 Not completed EFO p Has all the manual resend E Th processing been completed Bins Completed If a job with manual resend setting is started after completion of manual resend processing its SQL texts are sent to the database if it is accessible 1 3 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Yes Is there any job for which Auto resend is selected Data of the job with Auto Resend setting are sent again after recovery ez lt gt 5 c Automatically resending data after recovery 1 Perform manual resend processing Th
3. MELSEC IA series 9 2 2 Sample program This section shows a sample program written in Java import java io import java net class JobStart public static void main String args try II Storage of request message String requestMessage lt xml version 1 0 gt requestMessage lt REQUEST type oneshot jobname Pro01 gt System err printIn requestMessage Send contents display I Conversion with URL encording requestMessage URLEncoder encode requestMessage UTF 8 II POST URL url new URL http 192 168 3 3 MESXML cgi URLConnection conn url openConnection conn setDoOutput true conn setUseCaches false conn setRequestProperty Content type text xml conn setRequestProperty Content length String valueOf requestMessage length BASIC authentication String account QJ71MES96 MITSUBISHI String enc_account new String encodeBase64 account conn setRequepstProperty Authorization Basic enc_account OutputStream outStream conn getOutputStream PrintStream printStream new PrintStream outStream printStream print requestMessage printStream close InputStream inputStream conn getInputStream BufferedReader reader new BufferedReader new InputStreamReader inputStream String STr while str reader readLine null System out printin str Receive contents display reader close catch Exception e System err printIn Err
4. ceeeeeteeeee App 50 Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier 0 ceeee App 53 Appendix 5 External Dimensions 2 ccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeceeeeeeeeeeececaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeecinaeeeeeeseeeeees App 55 Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly ccceceetee App 56 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R ccecsccceeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenateeeeeeaaes App 58 Appendix 7 1 Overview of warning M SSQGES ccccceceeeeeeeeeceneaaececeeeeeeeeeeeceeenaeaeeeeeeeeeeeenenenaees App 58 Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeteeentnaees App 59 Appendix 8 Transportation Precautions cccccccceceeeeeeceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeececcaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeesesenssicaeeeeeeteeenes App 65 Appendix 8 1 Controlled model c cccccceceeeeeececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeseceaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecnaeaeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeas App 65 Appendix 8 2 Handling for SWIpping eee eeeeee ee eeceee etre eine eee ateei e ia a a App 65 Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States App 66 Appendix 9 1 Disposal precautions Semen eoa cee eeee e e aa aa aaa a e a e aaa aA App 66 Appendix 9 2 Exportation precautions ccccececeeeececceceeee eect eeeeeeeaaeeceeeeeeeeescecn
5. Figure 8 3 User Account Control DB Connection Service Setting Tool starts Only one DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be activated 8 3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 12 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe z O O Mn Z Z Q i a a 38 ae lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC series 8 4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool This section explains the screen structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 4 1 Screen structure E DB connection service setting tool Menu e 7 Eile Help lt gt Section 8 4 2 Menu configuration Service port 5112 DB access timeout 30 seconds Limit IP addresses permit to connect IP Address Mask bit length Optional e eee Permitted IP addresses list Figure 8 4 Screen structure 8 13 8 4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 4 1 Screen structure V Output access log Output destination dbConnector log c Access log capacity 1 MBx 10 Files V Output SQL Failed log Output destination sq Failed log S SQL failed log capacity 1 MBx 10 Files az 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC LE series 8 4
6. Upon completion of reading the confirmation MX MESinterface X dialog box appears Click the _ OK_ button J Loading completed of zn Figure 7 93 Reading the MES interface function settings E 3 wi nao 7 12 4 Verifying the MES interface function settings The MES interface function settings in the MES interface module are compared with those in the currently editing project Point Data of Project name and Comment in Project setting are not verified INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS Selecting Online Verify from the menu starts verification Upon completion of verification the confirmation dialog box appears Click the OK button MX MESInterface er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U Figure 7 94 Verifying the MES interface function settings DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 12 Online T 115 7 12 3 Reading the MES interface function settings MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 116 MELSEC A series 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module The working log of the MES interface module can be checked In Working log error log data of the MES interface module and job event log data can be checked Select Online View working log from the menu The Working log dialog box is displayed Operate it
7. 4 Sampling 1 to 64 error codes Buffer memory address 1012 to 1075 The error code that indicates the error contents is stored in the corresponding tag setting number area for which the Sampling error occurred For error codes refer to the following Section 10 2 Error Code List INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 29 3 6 7 Tag status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 30 3 6 8 Current tag data value area SLSEC KEY series The specified current tag data is stored This section explains how to display the specified tag data in the Current tag data value area Q Set the tag number displayed in the No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 1 2 Check that the tag number is stored in the No of stored tag Buffer memory address 1291 and that the Update count Buffer memory address 1292 is incremented by 1 2 Check that the tag component values for the No of components Buffer memory address 1293 are stored in the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 The tag numbers are the numbers beginning at 1 to 64 in the order set with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 2 Ifa value outside the range is set the Current tag data value area is not updated 3 The Current tag data value area is updated each time the sa
8. A 22 Memo 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC IA series CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW This manual explains the specifications preparatory procedures functions and troubleshooting for the MELSEC Q series QJ71MES96 MES interface module hereafter abbreviated as MES interface module When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems The MES interface module links the programmable controller Production equipment device data with information system Manufacturing Execution System database without communication gateways Information linkage using the MES interface module Conventional information linkage without the MES interface module lt Manufacturing Execution System gt lt Manufacturing Execution System gt Information system Information system E Database L Database J lt Communication gateway gt Host information system communication processing Computerization via ati SQL Data processing communication gateways J is unnecessary XML e Controller communication lt Production equipment gt lt Production equipment gt MES interface module Communication module Programmable controller CPU Programmable controller CPU Device data D
9. DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 4 Wiring 4 8 4 4 1 Wiring 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings The intelligent function module switches are used to make the mode setting default operation setting battery error detection setting and response monitoring time setting 1 Select Project window Parameter gt PLC parameter I O assignment tab of GX Developer The I O assignment tab is displayed Set the following items for the slot to which the MES interface module is mounted then click the Switch setting button Qn H Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC file PLCRAS Device Program Bootfile SFC 1 0 assignment 1 0 Assignment Model name PLC Switch setting Intell QU7IMESSE Detailed setting Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base settina Base mode C Auto Detail Base model name Power model name Extension cable Ext Basel Ext Base2 EntBased 8 Slot Defaut Ext Based Ext Base5 12 Slot Default Seen ecru ame when Import Multiple CPU Parameter ReadPLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple CPU settings Defaut Check End Cancel g Figure 4 7 I
10. 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response messages Error code Table 10 9 Error codes returned in XML response messages Error name Description Action e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x41170101 System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem XML message length The length of the received XML 0x41170103 fad 2 error message is invalid The received XML request message is XML request message invalid 0x41171101 gt interpretation error Data are not properly formatted as an XML message The XML request message route is Duplicated XML request 0x41171111 duplicated message route i Multiple Request tags exist There is an invalid route for XML XML request message oie 0x41171201 t o request message transmission route error Any tag other than Request exists e Check the content of the sent XML The attribute in the received XML message request message is invalid Failed to identify the message type is XML request message oneshot validate or invalidate 0x41171205 i attribute error Attribute type does not exist Attribute type value is invalid Attribute jobname does not exist The XML declaration is incorrect The jobname in the received XML XML request message request message is invalid 0x41171301 P jobname error The job of the specified jobname does not exist Check if the job is already in execution e Check if the M
11. ection 11501 to 11507 3640 2CEDs to SNTP time query result 0 R 2CF3x 11508 2CF4n System area 11509 2CF5n 11510 re Monitoring interval timeout count 0 R 2CF6x Information 11511 i i Secti linkage function No of trigger buffer data 0 R ae 2CF7x area 3 6 10 11512 Trigger buffer overflow count 0 R 2CF8n 11513 to 11519 2CF9u to System area 2CFFh 11520 A Trigger buffer overflow count for Job 1 0 R 2D001 Sodi 11521 to 11583 Trigger buffer The composition of each area is the same as that of the Trigger buffer ma 2D01H to overflow counts Overflow count for Job 1 2D3Fh for Jobs 2 to 64 Refer to 4 for the assignment of each area Shows whether or not reading writing is possible R Only reading is possible W Only writing is possible R W Both reading and writing are possible 2 The following table shows the error code area assignment for Sampling 1 to 64 Buffer memory address 1012 to 1075 Table 3 16 Sampling 1 to 64 error code areas Sampling 1 to 64 error code areas NET EHEN Sampling 1 to 10 error codes 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 13 15 17 19 Sampling 11 to 20 error codes 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 23 27 Sampling 21 to 30 error codes 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Sampling 31 to 40 error codes 1042 1043
12. 2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed setting edit screen area Make the setting referring to the following descriptions New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit Yiew Online Help Dah BGR t NewProject System setting CPU name NewCPU 4S Access target CPU settings f controiceu fi a CPL Q Mod F Device tag settings PLC series QCPL Q Mode G Server service settings Job settings Multiple CPU specification No specification z Other station specification No specification C Other Station Single network C Other Station Co existence network Network communication route e Co existence network communication route Figure 7 27 Access target CPU settings Point 1 How to add delete or copy an item For addition deletion or copying of items refer to the following K7 Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 2 When an item is added or copied a New CPU item is added 7 32 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting Up to 64 items can be set in Access target CPU settings within one project fi 5 S r P gt By default a control CPU is set as the first item with ControlCPU displayed for CPU i name 2 Deletion or setting modification of the first ite
13. 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 3 6 6 Sampling monitoring cycle area Figure 3 9 Sampling information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 3 Sampling error information Buffer memory address 1008 to 1011 a The tag sampling error information is stored OVERVIEW b The bit corresponding to the tag setting No to which the Sampling error occurred is turned ON 0 No sampling error 1 Sampling error detected CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 1008 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4j 3 42 1 1009 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1010 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 1011 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 10 Sampling error information area oO c The following results when a Sampling error occurs Example When an error occurred in the tag sampling of the tag setting number 16 e The Sampling error X11 is turned ON e Sampling error information area Buffer memory address 1008 bit 15 is turned ON e The error code is stored in the Sampling 16 error code area Buffer memory address 1027 7 Z Q lt Q u O Mn a Oo SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION
14. Files of type Select CSV file SYSTEM CSV DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 4 Project File Handling T 13 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 14 MELSEC IA series 4 When the CSV file to be imported is selected the Import from CSV files dialog box is displayed Make the setting referring to the following descriptions After completing the setting clicking the Import from CSV files Import Daas lt Project root oO Y System setting Selection tree Access target CPU settings q Setting DE controicPu Item type OG Device tag settings Existing registration information button starts the import Existing registration information No of access target CPUs 1 No of device tags No of server services No of jobs import information Import information No of access target CPUs No of device tags No of server services No of jobs Import Cancel Figure 7 16 Import from CSV files dialog box Table 7 15 Setting items in Import from CSV files dialog box Item Description Selection tree In the tree select the item to be imported Existing registration information Import information 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file Displays the number of settings for each setting type in the project into which data are imported Displays
15. Product information Connection to MELFANSweb Figure 7 9 Help menu Table 7 5 Help menu items Description Displays the product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Displays the Connection to MELFANSweb screen 7 3 3 Toolbar configuration Reference section Section 7 14 This section shows each command provided on the toolbar O H GR amp e BEE Figure 7 10 Toolbar Table 7 6 Toolbar items T Reference Item Description i section E New Creates a new project Section 7 4 1 Open Retrieves an existing project Section 7 4 2 i Save Overwrites and saves the current project Section 7 4 3 Add item Adds the item selected in the Edit items tree Section 7 3 4 E Delete item Deletes the item selected in the Edit items tree Section 7 3 4 Tr Reads the MES interface function settings project from the MES interface E3 Read Section 7 12 3 module Ea Write Writes the MES interface function settings project to the MES interface module Section 7 12 2 Restart Makes the stopped MES interface function operation restart Section 7 13 2 m Stop Stops the MES interface function operation Section 7 13 2 mp One shot execution Executes a job as a one shot task Section 7 12 6 ci Product information Displays the product information of the MES Interface Function Conf
16. Select Update Delete conditions 5 E a a A a eae Condon Te Caper __ 2 Rejected 7 7 lt lt Processi Rejected a Work No Processi Work No 3 Date lt lt Date Server time 4 lt lt Figure 7 3 Table column width adjustment ae m Lu e Place your mouse cursor on it F Ae The setting can be viewed by placing your mouse cursor on the table or an ES wW A input box e Communication action Action type MAES Database De x Table name CompletionReport DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions Tag Type INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION a Ua Component i Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component 1 ae e lt lt Process Completed E 1 Work_No Process Work_No __ 2 Rejected Proce Rejected a 3 Date INumber_of_Completed_01 Server time 4 lt lt Figure 7 4 Checking with the mouse cursor eeaeeeoeeseeeeeoeeeovneeseeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeee ee se FUNCTIONS a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 7 3 1 Screen structure MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series 7 3 2 Menu configuration This section shows each command provided on the menu bar 1 Project New Ctrl N Cctrl 0 Ctrl S Open Save Save As Import gt Export gt Recent files
17. 10 2 Error Code List 10 30 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service se XML MESSAGE on FORMAT 0 zZ E ie O wo W j a O E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series 3 SQL failure log of DB Connection Service Table 10 8 SQL failure log output error list of DB Connection Service Error code Error description and cause Corrective action 0x20600001 Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory ee e Terminate any unnecessary applications Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient 0x20600002 1 Add more memory to the personal computer resources 0x20600020 DB Connection Service does not support the SQL Check if the source IP address belongs to the instruction to be executed MES interface module 0x20600021 Failed in preparation before SQL execution Set a correct database type in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Select Job settings Communication action in Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and ee that is to be obtained by the SQL execution set a correct table name Set a correct database type in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Select Job settings Communication action in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and vanme Failed in SQL execution set a correct t
18. Access target CPU settings Device tag name ews Sampling settings 1 seconds T Prohibit data writing I Enhance sampling efficiency Devices must be connected in series Normal sampling c High speed sampling up to 96 points Do not sample service settings Job settings Array setting I Use array Component setting input e Component name CPU name ControlcPu Head device JT Perform statistical processing Component List Datatype Singeword l e Clear X bytes Add De MEE Component name CPU name No of tag components in project Oo No of statistical processings ing project cone Data type r Figure 7 29 Device tag settings Statistical type Ci No of device points intag 0 Es Point 1 How to add delete or copy an item For addition deletion or copying of items refer to the following Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 2 When an item is added or copied a New Tag item is added 7 8 Device Tag Setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting Up to 64 items can be set in Device tag settings within one project Device tag name NewTag Sampling settings Normal sampling ge High speed sampling up to 96 points C Do not sample Array setting F Use array Component set
19. Action e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 4000h to 4FFFh Errors detected by the access target CPU lt 3 User s Manual for the access target programmable controller CPU 9000h 9006h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 9008h Send buffer full There is no available space in the send buffer e Check the CPU s on the access route 9202h 9204h 920Ah 9920h 9922h 9923h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 9E20h Processing code error The issued processing code cannot be processed on the other end Check the CPU s on the access route 9E81h Device type error The device type specified for the access target station is invalid e Correct the device type entered in Device tag settings 9E82h Device No error The device number specified for the access target station is out of range Correct the device number entered in Device tag settings 9E83h Number of device points error The device points specified for the access target station is out of range Correct the device points entered in Device tag settings Boooh to BFFFh Errors detected in the CC Link system CC Link System Master Local
20. An account that has not been used before cannot be used Was the password of the Windows account specified in Server service settings set empty Set a password of the account or use another account that does not have an empty password An account that has an empty password cannot be used Does the program need to be run with administrator privileges by a user in Administrators group Programs that need to be run with administrator privileges by a user in Administrators group cannot be executed Specify a program that does not need to be run with administrator privileges Was execution of a program including displays attempted with the application server computer logged off Was execution of the program including displays attempted while muliple users have logged on to the application server computer To execute a program including displays set the application server computer into the logon status When a program including displays is executed the program screen is dispolayed for only one user who has logged on to the application server Make all of the users log off the application server computer once and execute the program with a single user logged on Job startup is delayed Were the trigger conditions for multiple jobs met concurrently If the trigger conditions for multiple jobs are met concurrently startup of some job may be delayed L gt Section 6 1 10 1 Opera
21. COMPNUM No of components 0 to 256 Use ENABLE ARRAY Use array Not use DISABLE When ENABLE is selected for ARRAY 2 to 40000 EJ arraysize Length of array When DISABLE is selected for ARRAY Blank Series CONT Array EJ aRRAyYTYPE Block BLOCK arrangement When DISABLE is selected for ARRAY Blank When enabled ENABLE Block size BLOCKSPECIFY ane When disabled DISABLE specification When DISABLE is selected for ARRAY Blank When ENABLE is selected for BLOCK 0 to 9999999 Decimal integer SPECIFY BLOCKSIZE Array block size When DISABLE is selected for BLOCK SPECIFY Blank When DISABLE is selected for ARRAY For characters can be used in device tag names refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc 2 A name same as a server service name cannot be set Make the setting causes an error 3 Ifthe same device tag name already exists the setting of the label with the higher number is overwritten 4 Registration of High speed sampling is limited to one tag only Setting multiple tags for high speed sampling causes an error App 23 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 9 COMPONENT CSV Lu Z 1 File format Be am Table App 26 File format Ze Item Description File name COMPONENT CSV File contents Device tag settings Componen
22. Item Description Date 2 Displays the date and time on which an error information occurred Displays an error code of the error occurred Error code For error codes refer to the following lt gt Section 10 2 Error Code List Summary Displays error messages and system information 1 In the case of time synchronization using SNTP the clock time of CPU No 1 is displayed for the time from when the module starts up until it succeeds in time query to the SNTP server 2 The date and time of an error information that occurred before obtaining the clock time from CPU No 1 is not displayed 3 For system information no error code is displayed 7 12 Online 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series b Updating the error log icki z Clicking the button updates the error log c Clearing the error log history Clicking the Clear button clears the error log history ao Z2 2 Event log bs This area displays event log data of the jobs whose executions have been completed There are two kinds of Event log data Startup log and Detailed log by which the job startup history and job execution details can be checked respectively no a Startup log Startup log data of the jobs each of which has Startup logging setting in Job 2 settings are displayed g N c gt Section 7 10 1 4 Startup logging
23. Timed out during response transmission 0x20310012 SID Session ID Response Transmit Error IP address Detected failure of the MES interface module during response transmission 0x20310013 SID Session ID Response Transmit Error IP address Send I O error Check if it is connected to the network Check if the gateway and or hub is operating e Check if the power of the module is not turned off 0x20400001 SID Session ID DB Connect Data source User Failed Failed in DB connection due to insufficient memory 0x20400002 SID Session ID DB Connect Data source User Failed Failed in DB connection due to insufficient resources e Terminate any unnecessary applications Add more memory to the personal computer 0x20400010 SID Session ID DB Connect Data source User Failed Invalid DB connection request e Check if the source IP address belongs to the MES interface module 0x20400011 0x20400012 10 27 System error 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Corrective action Error description and cause S
24. lt lt 23 lt lt 2 oeern sett awl Generated SQL text UPDATE CompletionReport SET Completed Processi Completed Rejected Process1 Rejected Date CURRENT_TIMESTAMP WHERE Work_No Process1 Work No cancel SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Exception process setting No of fields in project 4 Tag component data length in job 3 words total INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Figure 1 2 MX MESInterface MES interface function configuration tool FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 1 1 Features 1 2 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC LE series 2 The information system load can be reduced Data can be monitored on the MES interface module side and when the conditions are met the data can be sent to the information system Also the data can be operated and the results of the operations can be sent to the information system This can reduce the information system loads compared to the conventional system of constantly obtaining and monitoring data MES interface module lt Information system gt Se gt Conditions met Sends data as required TUTTE UCEU EURO EROEEEE 2 Constantly obtaining monitoring data from information system are require
25. 3 Insert DB1 ERRORLOG Date lt lt Date Server time Process_No lt lt 1 Work_No lt lt Process1 Work_No 4 MultiSelect DB1 RECIPEDATA Work_No gt gt Process2 Work_No RECIPE_A gt gt Process2 RECIPE_A RECIPE 5 Delete DB1 CompletionReport 6 Operation CompletionRate lt lt Process1 Completed 1000 CompletionRate lt lt CompletionRate 100 Add Communication action x tla Figure 7 66 Action list Table 7 58 Setting items in Action list Item Description Type Displays the type of the action registered Summary Displays the description of the action registered Selecting an action in Action list and clicking the t button reverses the t button order between the selected one and the one immediately above it The t button cannot be clicked on the first action Selecting an action in Action list and clicking the al button reverses the l button order between the selected one and the one immediately below it The button cannot be clicked on the last action E Point When more than one action are set they are executed in order starting from the top 1 Type The types of the existing actions are displayed Table 7 59 Displays in Type Item Description Select Select of Communication action Update Update of Communication action Insert Insert of Communication action MultiSelect MultiSelect of Communication action Delete Delete of Communicat
26. An item used for another item is unable to be deleted Because a unique name must be used for Server service name and Device tag name use a different name Uncheck the High speed sampling checkbox in the Device tag settings Registration of High speed sampling is limited to one tag only Is any other than the first item Control CPU in Access target CPU settings selected in CPU name in Component setting input Delete the component setting with selection of any other than the first item or change the setting so that the first item will be used for it If High speed sampling is selected only the first item in Access target CPU settings Control CPU can be selected for the tag component Is the number of device points set in the tag setting more than 96 Reduce the number of device points in the tag setting to 96 or less When High speed sampling is selected set tag component devices within the total of 96 points Unable to change the Prohibit data writing setting Is the tag used for a setting item by which data are written to the tag Completion notification of Handshake operation substitution tags of Select in Communication action etc Stop using the tag for the setting item by which data are written to the tag before changing the setting If the tag is used for a setting item by which data are written to the tag unchecking the Prohibit data writi
27. O oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 1 About constants Constants can be used for Operation tag and Component that are operands The following shows the constant types and values that can be entered in the Component column Table 7 77 Constant types and values available for Component Constant type Values that can be entered in Component Up to 16 characters Number Signed decimal notation Example 521 98 e Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 Up to 32 characters String For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Specify the date and time of the MES interface module in the following format Year 4 digits YYYY Date String Year 2 digits YY Month 2 digits MM Day 2 digits DD Hour 2 digits hh Minute 2 digits mm Second 2 digits ss Example YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 2005 07 01 15 12 00 2 About variables Variables can be used for Component of Substitution tag or Component of Operation tag By using a variable a value computed in Operation action ca
28. OB68h Max number of acquired records illegal The tag component value specified for the maximum number of acquired records is 0 or less Set 1 or more to the tag component value specified for the maximum number of acquired records OB80h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OB81h 0B82h Communication start error System error 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module An error occurred in the Ethernet communication and the communication failed to start Check the Ethernet connection Check if Server service settings is correct Check if the ODBC setting is correct Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0B83h From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Communication connection error 0B84h Communication connection timeout Description An Ethernet communication error has occurred Action e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct Check if the ODBC setting is correct Check if the server computer has no problem referring to the following Section 10 1 1 2 Checking an error of the server computer OB85h to OB87h OB
29. Table 7 29 Operation of the resend processing using Resend DB buffer request Data type of tag component Description Bit Other than the above The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when the specified tag component is ON Normal Turns OFF after completion of the resend processing E Error Outputs error code OB83h to the error log and turns OFF Resend DB buffer request Tag component value DB buffer resend processing Execute resend The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when 1 is written to the specified tag component Normal 0 is written after completion of the resend processing Error Outputs error code 0OB83h and 0 is written Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the resend processing is completed Even if the value changes however the resend processing is not interrupted 2 To make another DB buffer resend request after completion of resend processing wait for a sampling interval of the specified tag component or more and then turn it ON or write 1 7 6 System Setting 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 4 Clear DB buffer request MELSEC LA series a Select a tag component used to request for clear processing of the DB buffer Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting i
30. When using Windows 2000 J Sounds Speech and Audio Devices Accessibility Options From the control panel select Add Remove v Performance and Maintenance j Security Center Applications a o To display the Control Panel select Start z Ore Setting gt Control Panel FF Bao ol When using Windows Vista From the Control Panel select Uninstall a program To display the Control Panel select Start Control Panel Q 28 k Bo Jg Ez 23 l To the next page FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 5 2 Uninstallation 5 7 D SINSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION From the previous page 1 Add or Remove Programs ie Windows needs your permission to continue If you started this action continue ia Uninstall or change an application K Microsoft Windows User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer J To the next page 5 2 Uninstallation MELSECTE cries Select the program to be deleted and click the Change Remove button lt For DB Connection Service and Setting Tool gt DB connection service and Setting tool MESInterface DBConnector lt For MES Interface Function Configuration Tool gt MES interface function configuration tool MX MESInterface REMARKS When using Windows 2000 a Click Change or Remove Prog
31. for job start conditions or in send data to the database For the time synchronization function setting refer to the following C 7 Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting z 6 3 1 Using the SNTP time query result in the programmable controller CPU By using the SNTP time query timing XB and the SNTP time query result area buffer memory address 11501 to 11507 the time information acquired from the SNTP server computer can be utilized in the programmable controller CPU A z 1 Program examples The following are program examples where when MO turns ON the time of the m programmable controller CPU is set at the SNTP time query timing XB ON e When the head I O No of the MES interface module is 0000 it indicates that the module is installed in slot 0 of the main base unit A time error in these programs shall be equal to two scan times or less 9 e MO X0B U0 o BMOV G11501 DO K7 nao DATEWR DO Figure 6 21 Program example 1 Z 5 a 5a MO XOB 25 t FROM KO K11501 DO K7 6 DATEWR DO Figure 6 22 Program example 2 5 6 E O ma Le al fe 8 6 ihe t2 Hos Za ZKE u56 ZLO re Oy ei 526 te Zo Ole a i ann 6 3 Time Synchronization Function 6 24 6 3 1 Using the SNTP time query result in the programmable controller CPU 6 FUNCTIONS 6 3 2 Daylight saving time function MELSEC IA series The daylight saving time function allows the
32. 0CO0h e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative explaining a detailed O0C56h description of the problem e Check if the CompactFlash card is damaged CF card check error Failed to access the CompactFlash OC80h Turn the power OFF and ON or event log writing card during event log output reset the programmable controller CPU Remaining capacity of the CF card full error event io e Check the capacity of the OC8ih a CompactFlash card is not sufficient for log writing ae CompactFlash card writing the event log oDooh Setting file out of range Access was made to outside the access error setting file range New setting file creation f A ODO1h Failed to create a new setting file error Turn the power OFF and ON or 0D02h Setting file open error Failed to open the setting file reset the programmable controller ODO3h Setting file seek error Failed to seek the setting file CPU 0D04h Setting file read error Failed to read out the setting file ODO5h Setting file write error Failed to write the setting file ODO6h Setting file close error Failed to close the setting file 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code OD80h to 0D82h 100Eh 2000h to 20FFh MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name System error Description
33. 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Sampling 41 to 50 error codes 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Sampling 51 to 60 error codes 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 e es ea Sampling 61 to 64 error codes 1072 1073 1074 1075 3 22 3 5 Buffer Memory List 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LE series 3 The following table shows the error code area assignment for the Access target CPUs 1 to 64 Buffer memory address 4008 to 4071 Table 3 17 Access target CPU 1 to 64 error code areas Access target CPU 1 to 64 error code areas Name gt EE ps jo 10 Access target CPU 1 to 10 error codes 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 Access target CPU 11 to 20 error codes 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 6 amp Access target CPU 21 to 30 error codes i4 ne DZ Access target CPU 31 to 40 error codes AS oO Access target CPU 41 to 50 error codes Access target CPU 51 to 60 error codes 4064 4065 4066 4067 Access target CPU 61 to 64 error codes 4070 4071 o Z O lt q o O wu a o 4 The following table shows the assignment of the Trigger buffer overflow count areas for Jobs 1 to 64 Buffer memory address 11520 to 11583 Table 3 18 Trigger buffer overflow count are
34. 10g Programmable controller CPU Network Q25HCPU Host control CPU No other station specified Host Device tag setting Sequence scan time No of tags Sampling setting 1ms For trigger conditions 1 tag For communication data 1 tag for 16 64 256 fields 4 tags for 1024 fields 16 tags for 4096 fields For trigger conditions High speed sampling 1 x 100ms For communication data Do not sample Data type For trigger conditions Bit transmit and receive For data Single precision No of components For trigger conditions No of jobs x 2 For communication data Same as the number of fields Trigger conditions Handshake operation No of jobs 1 job for 16 64 256 1024 fields 2 jobs for 4096 fields Job setting No of actions 1 action for 16 64 256 fields 4 actions for 1024 fields 16 actions for 4096 fields Select Update condition Comparison with constant value 1 condition only Measuring method Program execution Measurement interval None From ON of Handshake startup to OFF of Completion notification App 53 Appendix 4 Processing Time No of measurements Average of 20 measurement results Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier APPENDICES MELSEC A series 2 Measurement results w lt L a When Enhance sampling efficiency is checked be The follow
35. 11506 The second data 00 to 59 is stored Second 3 M The day of the week data is stored SNTP time query result Day of 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday the week 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 11507 onitoring interval timeout count Buffer memory address 11510 The cumulative number of times that a monitoring interval timeout has occurred is stored The monitoring interval timeout occurs when trigger detection has not been completed within the monitoring interval If 3 6 Buffer Me this timeout occurs perform the following e Increase the monitoring interval Increase the sampling interval of the tag that is used for trigger conditions e Reduce the trigger detection time Reduce the number of configured jobs mory Details 3 6 10 Information linkage function area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LA series 4 No of trigger buffer data Buffer memory address 11511 The number of times the current trigger buffer has been used is stored If the number of times the trigger buffer has been used is always large check the number of jobs for which Trigger buffering is enabled and the trigger condition setting lt gt Section 7 10 Job Setting OVERVIEW 5 Trigger buffer overflow count Buffer memory address 11512 The cumulative number of trigger buffer overflows is stored If the trigger buffer overflows frequently check the number of jobs for which Trigger buffering
36. 1290 when the update count is increased the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 is updated with the value of the specified tag number 4 No of components Buffer memory address 1293 The No of components displayed as the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 is stored Remark Oooo coco The following is an example where the current value of tag No 5 is confirmed in Buffer memory batch monitor of GX Developer CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 7 Z Q lt Q m O Mn a 2 oui memory baei perir 3 alak Specify 5 as the No of requested tag Buffer memory Module start address O He FA wr a address 1290 with Buffer memory batch monitor of ae ee Senn GX Developer 4FEDC 8A98 4765445210 a _ Check that 5 is stored as the No of stored tag Buffer 2000 0000 0900 aoe memory address 1291 Doou 0900 9080 opoo Check that the Update count Buffer memory address Beon oron eror ogon 1292 is updated Booo 9980 e008 Doon 4 Check that the No of components for tag No 5 is Dovo vooo vooo vooo stored in the No of components Buffer memory Dee ooeo tooe bees address 1293 0000 0000 0000 0000 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Check that the tag component value is stored in the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to the address required for
37. 2 Sent 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 DataSource INSERT INTO TABLE COL VALUES S X u gt Database Message 0x00000388 Oracle ODBC OraJORA 00904 COL invalid identifier 9 QA N ae Zz B22 zZ W FSE woo nao INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION e e z O O Mn Z Z Q i a a 38 ae lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 28 8 8 2 SQL failure log Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC IA series CHAPTER 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT This section explains the XML message format used with the XML processing function Refer to the following for the XML processing function L gt Section 6 2 XML Processing Function This section explains the functions of the XML message format 1 Instruction of job execution Table 9 1 Instruction of job execution Function Description One shot execution e Executes the specified job only one time regardless of whether the trigger conditions and jobs are enabled or not If the specified job is being executed the job is not carried out again Validate Puts the job into the status in which the specified job is executed when the trigger conditions are met Job enabled status e This is the same operation as that of enabling the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool job Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status Invalidate e Puts the job into the stat
38. 4 25 4 10 Removing Battery for Storage 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELS AG Q series CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION This chapter explains how to install the execution software of MX MESInterface to each operating environment and how to uninstall it 5 1 Installation This section explains how to install MX MESInterface 1 MX MESInterface installation procedure Installation start l Execute SETUP exe c Select the component to be installed Which software is to be installed MES Interface Function Configuration Tool DB Connection Service and Setting Tool Enter user information Enter user information Enter the product ID Enter the product ID Select the installation destination Select the installation destination Installation Installation end Figure 5 1 MX MESInterface installation procedure E Point If a confirmation message for overwriting DLL files is displayed at installation click the Yes button and overwrite the DLL files Not overwriting the DLLs may fail to execute MX MESInterface correctly 5 1 Installation OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION ol ja 25 5 EJ Sz eZ 23 FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE A
39. 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 4007 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 15 Access target CPU error information area INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION c The following results when the Access target CPU error occurs Example When an error occurred in the access target CPU for Access target CPU setting No 16 e Access target CPU error X16 is turned ON e Access target CPU error information area Buffer memory address 4004 bit 15 is turned ON e The error code is stored in the Access target CPU 16 error code area Buffer memory address 4023 FUNCTIONS 3 Access target CPU 1 to 64 error codes Buffer memory address 4008 to 4071 The error code showing the error contents is stored in the corresponding area of access target CPU setting number for which the Access target CPU error has occurred For error codes refer to the following lt gt Section 10 2 Error Code List MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 33 3 6 9 Access target CPU setting status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 34 MELSEC Kel series 3 6 10 Information linkage function area 1 Time synchronization setting status Buffer memory address 11500 a b The setting status of Time synchronization setting is st
40. 626 Zac SE ami ann 4 8 Battery 4 20 4 8 1 Battery specifications 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 21 MELSEC Le series 4 8 3 Battery replacement This section explains how to replace the MES interface module battery The battery of the MES interface module is used for file protection If the voltage of the MES interface module battery has dropped the battery must be replaced 1 Checking the MES interface module for a battery voltage drop Check for a battery voltage drop in the Battery status area Buffer memory address 7 2 The following results from battery errors 1 ON is written to the Battery status area Buffer memory address 7 The ERR LED is turned ON and ERR LED status X10 and Other error X1C are turned ON The file contents will not be erased immediately after the battery error occurrence but may be erased if the battery error is not recognized Finish the battery replacement in the total power failure compensation time since the Battery status area is turned ON is within the specified time Hiie so a go Y100 is turned ON at battery error Figure 4 19 Checking for a battery voltage drop 4 8 Battery 4 8 3 Battery replacement 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 2 MES interface module battery Q6BAT life s z a The following shows the service life of the MES interface modul
41. A e W x e a WW Q x a fa Zz LEF Taa 283 E W eo nao b The battery Q6BAT life is 5 years when disconnected to the MES interface module ZZ a c Even though the data is retained for the specified time after the Battery status Sz area Buffer memory address 7 is turned ON replace the battery as soon as g2 possible 22 However it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the usage status even when the battery error has not yet occurred 2 Point If the battery is not replaced after a battery error occurs data in the CompactFlash card being accessed may be corrupted or a file system error may occur 3 2 re zee re Oy ei 528 Ser aaa 4 8 Battery 4 22 4 8 3 Battery replacement 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series 3 Replacement procedure of the MES interface module battery When the MES interface module battery has been exhausted replace the battery with a new one according to the procedure shown in Figure 4 20 The programmable controller must be powered ON for 10 minutes or more before removing the battery Even if the battery is removed the memory is backed up by the capacitor for a while However if the replacement time exceeds the guaranteed value in the table below data stored in the memory may be erased To prevent this replace the battery quickly Table 4 11 Power failure compensation time Power failure comp
42. Check the execution conditions of other applications 0x20700022 System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0x20700023 ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed Failed to generate process during program execution e Check if the application to be executed in program execution exists or not Check if the name of the application to be executed in program execution is a directory Make a proper security setting for the application to be executed in program execution 0x20700024 ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed The wait for process completion timed out or was interrupted during program execution In DB Connection Service Setting Tool increase the DB access timeout value Terminate the application executed by program execution before logoff 0x20800010 0x20800011 0x20800012 0x2FE00010 SID Session ID TCPOpen Request Error IP address Invalid TCPOpen request System error Check if the source IP address belongs to the MES interface module e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Database error number and Database error message are output to the space after Database Message in the access log of DB Connection Service For the output log format refer to the following Section 8 8 1 Access log
43. Clear DB buffer request of the specified tag component Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting 7 When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database a When auto resend is selected for the job If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or failure of the database server computer or database software the system starts DB buffering after detection of a timeout After DB buffering is started whether SQL texts can be sent to the database or not is checked every time each job is activated When the system has not been recovered from network disconnection or failure of the database server computer or database software DB buffering is executed For use of a MES interface module with serial No first five digits 09101 or earlier or an MX MESInterface of software version 1 02C or earlier processing of DB buffering is different lt gt Appendix 1 2 Operations of former versions Recovery from network disconnection eo Job startup Job startup Job startup After sending SQL texts timeout detected Sending SQL texts DB buffering DB buffering execution Auto resending executed after checking if SQL DB buffer data texts can be sent Figure 6 16 When auto send is selected for the job 6 19 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 9 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LA series b When manual resend is selected for the job If SQL te
44. Completed TAG 1 1 FIELD1 1 2 Rejected TAG 1 2 FIELD1 1 3 Date Date _ SERVER _ Item row File format _ Label column setting area APPENDICES Communication action Communication action Actiontype E Database NewServer Table name DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions Field name TagjType oe ones ae a Combine Field name Condition TagiType Component I 2 gt 2 gt gt li i EEA INDEX 2 Label Table App 43 Label Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 DB tag link settings No 1 to 256 FIELD64 10 256 FIELD1 1 1 to gt FIELD64 10 256 t Indicates DB tag link settings No 1 to 256 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 36 Appendix 3 14 ACFIELD CSV APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 44 Setting item MELSEC IA series Item Description Setting value WAR FleLDNAME Field name Any character string Tag TAG Date DATE Date string DATESTR TYPE Constant type Numerical value NUMBER Character string STRING Variable VARIABLE None NONE When TAG is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 4 TAG Tag When other than the above is selected Blank with TYPE When TAG is selected with TYPE 1 to 256 ESI ELEMENT Component When other
45. Description When Date Error code SID Session ID DB Connect Target data source Connection ID Success Output succeeded log format menties Date Error code SID Session ID DB Connect Target data source Connection ID Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 DB Connect DataSource ID Success succeeded Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20400022 SID 00000001 DB Connect DataSource ID Failed When failed Database Message 0x000003f9 Oracle ODBC Ora ORA 01017 invalid username password logon denied b Disconnection Table 8 16 Disconnection to a database Item Description When i r Date Error code SID Session ID DB Disconnect Target data source Connection ID Success Output succeeded log format When failed Date Error code SID Session ID DB Disconnect Target data source Connection ID Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When Example Jai 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 DB Disconnect DataSource ID Success succeede 8 25 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 8 1 Access log 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series 4 SQL text reception processing results For details on Database error number and Database error message in the output log format in the case of failure refer to the manual for each database Depen
46. Displays setting values Label column Displays item numbers or setting items ACCOUNT CSV DBBUF CSV CPU CSV TAG CSV COMPONENT CSV SERVER CSV Available file JOB CSV CONDITION CSV ACTION CSV ACFIELD CSV ACCONDITION CSV ACEXCEPTION CSV ACOPERATION CSV REMOTE CSV ORDERBY CSV MULTISELECT CSV App 9 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions APPENDICES MELSEC LA series 2 Precautions for editing setting information files For details on how to edit setting information files and setting information files that can be imported refer to 1 below C gt Appendix 3 1 Setting information files list Point 1 When editing a setting information file using such as spreadsheet software change the setting items to match the setting information file formats explained starting from the following descriptions 2 When editing a setting information file make sure to use the exported setting information file A setting information file must not be created by the user XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING a Space All spaces are treated as a part of the item If a space is used with a setting item in which a space cannot be used an error will occur APPENDICES b Uppercase lowercase characters Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished c Special characters 1 Line feed To input a Line fee
47. E_DAYOFWEEK I bees When TYPE is DATE week Blank When DST is DISABLE When TYPE is WEEK Blank When MONTH is 1 3 5 7 8 10 or 1 to 31 LAST When TYPEis C E DAY Ending day en S When MONTH is DATE 1 to 30 LAST 4 6 90r11 When MONTH is gt 1 to 28 LAST When DST is DISABLE Blank a When DST is ENABLE 00 to 23 E HOUR Ending time When DST is DISABLE Blank App 17 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 5 DST CSV APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 6 DBBUF CSV 1 File format Table App 17 File format Item Description File name DBBUF CSV File contents System setting DB buffering settings lt gt Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting ITEM EF status WA REcorpsize E RESENDING E CLEARING Item row File format Label column setting area System setting Ea DB buffering settings Tag i Component DB buffering status No of DB bufferings Resend DB buffer request Clear DB buffer request DB buffer Full DB buffering capacity DB buffer utilization 64 MB 2 Label Table App 18 Label Label Description STATUS DB buffering status RECORDSIZE No of DB bufferings FULL DB buffer full 4 USERATE DB buffer utilization RESENDING Resend DB buffer request B CLEARING Clear DB buffer request 3 Setting item
48. For communication data Same as the number of fields In the case of MultiSelect 16 data 4 components 64 data 8 components 256 data 16 components 1024 data 32 components 4096 data 64 components 16384 data 128 components 40000 data 200 components Length of array In the case of MultiSelect 16 data 4 64 data 8 256 data 16 1024 data 32 4096 data 64 16384 data 128 40000 data 200 Trigger conditions Handshake operation No of jobs In the case of Select Update or Insert 1 job for 16 64 256 1024 fields 2 jobs for 4096 fields In the case of MultiSelect 1 job In the case of Select Update or Insert Job setting 1 action for 16 64 256 fields 4 actions for 1024 fields No of actions 16 actions for 4096 fields In the case of MultiSelect 1 action Select Update condition None Sort condition None Program execution None A From ON of Handshake startup to OFF of Completion Measuring Measurement interval oe oe notification method Appendix 4 Processing Time App 51 No of measurements Average of 20 measurement results Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later APPENDICES MELSEC A series 2 Measurement results w lt L N a When Enhance sampling efficiency is checked il iz The following shows the results in the case where the Enhance sampling 36 X u efficiency box is
49. For how to find an error code refer to the following C gt Section 10 1 1 Finding an error code 10 1 Error Codes 10 1 2 Error types 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 1 3 System monitor 26 Q series The module status of the MES interface module can be checked from System monitor 1 Checking the module status and error code in Module s Detailed Information of the diagnostics function a Operation procedure Select Diagnostics System monitor from the menu of GX Developer Select QH71MES96 on System monitor dialog box and then click the Module s Detailed Information button displays Module s Dtailed Information dialog box Operate it referring to the following descriptions Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name QU71MES96 Product information 091020000000000 B 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module access Possible 140 Clear Hold Settings Fuse Status aaee Noise Filter Setting Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Input Type Remote password setting status Error Display No Present Eror No Error Error History The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under Display format HEX C DEC HAW Information Figure 10 2 Module s Detailed Information dialog box 10 1 Error Codes 10 1 3 System monitor a J XML MESSAGE
50. Handshake operation for the trigger condition of a job When other than Handshake operation is selected for the trigger condition the following phenomenon may occur at system switching of a redundant system Data separation e The write data is not reflected to the programmable controller CPU C7 Section 7 10 2 8 Handshake operation 2 17 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration 2 6 1 Precautions for using Redundant CPU 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 2 6 2 Precautions for using database The following shows the precautions for using database OVERVIEW 1 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and Microsoft SQL Server 2008 N a Set the security authentication mode into the Mixed Mode The setting can be made in SQL Server Properties Configure FA Q 4 a a Le Zz fe SYSTEM SQL Server Properties Configure local Server Settings Database Settings Replication General Memory Processor Connections Security n SQL Server provides authentication based on Windows accounts and a named SQL Server login ID and password lt q Authentication S rr O E WwW A C Windows only n Audit level None Success C All Ownership chaining IV Allow cross database ownership chaining a 2 Z W eZ Startup service account a56 3 Start and run SQL Server in the following account S T lt G W System account E 2 o r nao C This
51. Handshake operation is selected selection is not allowed for Trigger 2 23 For selection of Handshake operation set the following items bs Trigger 1 Handshake operation Z Se Tag Component Handshake startup Process1 Completion notification Process1 2 Figure 7 55 Handshake operation m Table 7 50 Setting items when selecting Handshake operation g Select a tag component used to request for job startup Handshake startup Only the tag components whose Data type is Bit are selectable Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable Select a tag component that allows notification of execution Z y completion of the job Bae eee Only the tag components whose Data type is Bit are selectable ES gonpeioninaticaon Note that the following tags are not selectable aO Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set 1 Do not specify the same Completion notification to multiple jobs INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS im 6 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 67 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series c Program example 1 Devices used in the program Table 7 51 Devices used in the program Device name Device Application MES interface
52. Numeric type Integer aa Long Integer type NUMBER tinyint Single t Discrete Tag me es CHAR float eee Anal nalo Single precision type Up to 16 characters Double type g pa VARCHAR real Tag Integer Double precision type For characters that can be used nie AutoNumber type for variables refer to the arhar Currency type following text Text type 12 ex sni lt gt Appendix 2 2 Characters Memo type i available for item names float Single type Numeric type Floating component names NUMBER real Double type ag point variable names etc CHAR char Text type 2 ns ef Floating point type VARCHAR varchar ee ag Real ext Memo type 12 char 7 CHAR Text type 2 Character string varchar String Tag VARCHAR sent Memio type T 94 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 1 Not available for Select Update Delete conditions 2 Memo type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used For Microsoft Access 2007 3 Values are assigned with precision of six decimal digits a Lu 5 5 Select Update Delete conditions f When Select Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action type set conditions for the records to be selected updated multi selected or deleted When a field value of a record matches a condition value the record is selected updated or deleted Up to 8 rows can be set for one commun
53. SQLServer2000 DB 192 168 3 13 5115 USERNAME4 wn LW Q 8 9 a y T PASSWORD SORCENAME DBTYPE_ __ ERRORWRITE DEVICETAG z PASSWORD1 PASSWORD2 DB1 ORACLE9I ENABLE PASSWORD3 DB2 ORACLE10G DISABLE PASSWORD4 DB3 SQLSRV2000 ENABLE 64 DISABLE INDEX File format E Item row Label column setting area Server service settings Gh New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help Osea BRB C3 e NewProject System setting Ej Server service name NewServer Ci target CPU settings tag settings E Server service settings m S KEEP Server type Database server x J Job settings LE P IP address o o o0 0 Lo P gt Port No 1024 to 65535 5112 gt Password Confirm password Em gt Data source name o Eag Database type loracle 9i x ET p cress error notification setting Notify the access error status 4 i 13 Eag Connection timeout 1 to 180 EA Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 26 Appendix 3 10 SERVER CSV APPENDICES 2 Label Table App 30 Label a6 Q series Label Description EI SERVER1 to 1 SERVER32 Server service settings No 1 to 32 3 Setting item Table App 31 Setting item Item Description Sett
54. Services srl ROMANIA i PA ve faa Brianza MB 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd Pb 21 Aleea Lacul Morii Nr 3 Phone ii 039 6053 1 BG 1756 Sofia RO 060841 Bucuresti Sector 6 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE Phone 359 0 2 817 6004 Phone 40 0 21 430 40 06 Fax 39 039 60 53 312 Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 Fax 40 0 21 430 40 02 CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA MUR a EUROPE B V POLAND INEA CR d o o CROATIA Craft Con amp Engineering d 0 0 SERBIA private bag 2016 Dane Pone Losinjska 4a Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80 86 EL Ouyang Krakowska 50 HR 10000 Zagreb SER 18106 Nis Phone 27 0 11 977 0770 BEAN anad Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Phone 381 0 18 292 24 4 5 Fax 27 0 11 977 0761 aie 012 Saon a oe CZECH REPUBLIC ae SERBIA utoCont C S s r 0 0 0 Li ee EUROPE B V SPAIN Technologick 374 6 Izletnicka 10 N Ri 76 80 CZ 708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec SER 113000 Smederevo E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Barcelona Phone 420 595 691 150 Phone 381 0 26 617 163 Phone 902 131121 34935653131 Fax 420 595 691 199 Fax 381 0 26 617 163 Fax 34 935891579 B ELECTRIC s r o CZECH REPUBLIC AutoCont Control s r o SLOVAKIA Mladoboleslavska 812 Radlinsk ho 47 Tae ELECTRIC EUROPE B V UK 72 1970 Praha 19 Kbely SK 02601 Dolny Kubin TravellersLan Phone 420 286 850 848 420 724 317 975 Phone 421 0 43 5868210 UK Hatfield Herts AL10 8XB a 420 286830 850 Fax 421 0 43 5868210 Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Beijer Electr
55. The following words are reserved terms and therefore cannot be used Table App 4 Reserved terms Reserved terms abstract boolean break byte case catch char class const continue DATETIME debugger default delete do double else enum event exit export extends false final finally float for function goto if implements import in include Infinity instanceof int interface invoke long NaN native new null oneshot package private protected public return short static super switch synchronized SYSTEM this throw throws trace transient true try typeof undefined var void volatile S lt c A o DW d ol zir ol n m ol CO w gt while with Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc App 6 App 7 APPENDICES M ELS AG el series Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc The shaded sections can be used Note that use of colon is not allowed for User name of Account setting Table App 5 Characters can be used in character string constants etc i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 HJ vu SP 0 P p 1 l 1 A Q a q EA 2 B R b r 3 C S c s EA 4 D T d t 5 5 E U e u 6 amp 6 F V f v i 7 G
56. an FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 10 4 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel series b Display items The following shows the detailed information of the MES interface module Table 10 1 Displayed items Item Description Module name Displays the name of the mounted module I O Address Displays the head I O signal number of the module Module Implementation Position Displays the slot position where the module is installed Product information Displays the product information 1 Vecie Module access Displays that it is accessible when the Watchdog timer error X1F is OFF e on Status of I O Address Displays whether or not the module set with parameters by the user matches the Verify module that is actually mounted Displays the latest error code Present Error For error codes refer to the following Error Display Section 10 2 Error Code List Error History Displays the error history recorded from power ON to the present time with error codes The suffix of the product information code represents the function version of the module The function version of the MES interface module is B or later Example When the suffix is B it means the module is of function version B 1 0 5 10 1 Error Codes 10 1 3 System monitor 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A series 2 Checking the LED status and the switch setting status in H W
57. and inserts an insert value tag component value constant value variable into a field of the generated record R Substitutes field values of the records whose conditions are met for MultiSelect substitute values tag component values Delete Deletes a specific record by specifying a database and a table 1 Cannot be selected when the database is Wonderware Historian 2 Database Select a database to be accessed 3 Table name Up to 32 characters Set a table name of the database to be accessed For characters that can be used for table names refer to the following gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names etc 4 DB tag link settings Set assignments between field values and tag component values or constant values Up to 256 rows can be set in DB tag link settings for each communication action T 84 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi a6 Q series ELS a When Select is selected for Action type Select substitutes a field value of the record whose conditions are met for a substitute value tag component value variable Set conditions of the record to be selected in Select Update Delete conditions L 5 Select Update Delete conditions Conditions for sorting the selected records are set in Select sort settings cF 6 Select sort settings OVERVIEW 1 Field name
58. gt fe Display Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels or higher Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version 2 3 Microsoft Windows xP Professional Operating System English version 3 4 Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Operating System English version 2 3 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System English version 4 SPECIFICATIONS Operating system Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition English version 3 4 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System English version 3 4 7 8 11 Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English version 3 4 7 8 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English version 3 4 7 8 9 e Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English version 3 4 7 8 2 Interface Ethernet a When using the DB interface function relational database any of the following 9 1 aa Oracle 8i Oracle gi Oracle 10g Oracle 11g 32 bit x 64 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 5 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 5 6 Required software Microsoft SQL Server 2008 32 bit x64 5 6 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE 2000 Microsoft Access 2000 Microsoft Access 2003 5 Microsoft Access 2007 6 Wonderware Historian 9 0 Industrial SQL Server pe When using the time synchronization function SNTP server Equipp
59. is selected Item Description IP address Set IP addresses permitted to connect in decimal notation Mask bit length Blank 2 The IP address is added to the Permitted IP addresses list Example 192 168 0 64 3 Set the following items then click the Ada button Table 8 5 Setting items when Limit IP addresses permit to connect is selected Item Description IP address Set IP addresses permitted to connect in decimal notation Set the enabled bit length of the set IP address Range 1 to 32 Mask bit length 4 The IP address mask bit length is added to the Permitted IP addresses list Example 192 168 0 64 26 8 17 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Kel series Example When specifying IP addresses in a batch If the IP address is set to 192 168 0 64 and Mask bit length is set to 26 the IP addresses with permission connection are 192 168 0 64 to 192 168 0 127 whose logical product is 192 168 0 64 z gt O IP address permitted 192 168 0 to connect 1 1jlojojojo o o jloj1 loj jojojojoj oj o o ojojololol1 2 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 192 Mask bit length 26 Lilililililihhhhhhhhhlhlilililllililifallolololololo qL BE cas 192 168 0 64 IP address Ta e Tot ooo loo e 2 The range in which the logical product above is met i
60. 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later 1 Measurement conditions Server computer Table App 63 Measurement conditions Item Description CPU Intel Xeon 2 8GHz Memory 1GB OS Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Database Oracle 10g Access target CPU Programmable controller CPU In the case of Select Update or Insert Q25HCPU Host control CPU In the case of MultiSelect QO6UDHCPU Host control CPU Network Sequence scan time No other station specified Host ims Device tag setting Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later No of tags For trigger conditions 1 tag In the case of Select Update or Insert For communication data 1 tag for 16 64 256 fields 4 tags for 1024 fields 16 tags for 4096 fields In the case of MultiSelect For receive data 1 tag Use array Sampling setting For trigger conditions High speed sampling 1 x 100ms For communication data Do not sample Data type For trigger conditions Bit transmit receive For data Single precision To the next page Appendix 4 Processing Time App 50 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Device tag setting MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table App 63 Measurement conditions Item Description No of components For trigger conditions No of jobs x 2
61. 100 8310 ne NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd MALTA Kazpromautomatics Ltd KAZAKHSTAN German Branch Wiener Stra e 89 99 Paola Hill Mustafina Str 7 2 Gothaer Stra e 8 AT 2500 Baden Malta Paola PLA 1702 KAZ 470046 Karaganda D 40880 Ratingen Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 356 0 21 697 816 Phone 7 7212 50 11 50 Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 356 0 21 697 817 Fax 7 7212 50 11 50 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 TEHNIKON BELARUS _INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V CZECH REPUBLIC Oktyabrskaya 16 5 Off 703 711 bld Traian 23 1 Czech Branch BY 220030 Minsk MD 2060 Kishinev Avenir Business Park Radlick 714 113a Phone 375 0 17 210 46 26 Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES CZ 158 00 Praha 5 Fax 375 0 17 210 46 26 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 Phone 420 251551470 ILAN amp GAVISH Ltd ISRAEL get eee
62. 2 Menu configuration This section shows each command provided on the menu bar fi Ss m 1 File Import Ctrl I Export Ctrl E Exit z Z2 Figure 8 5 File menu TE pafe no Table 8 1 File menu items af Reference Item Description E section Import Imports an existing file 2 z Section 8 6 Export Exports the DB Connection Service Setting Tool to a file 5 Exit Exits the DB Connection Service Setting Tool N 2 Help Product information 6 Connect to MELFANSweb SF a 56 Figure 8 6 Help menu 9 R 5 7 E O w Table 8 2 Help menu items Lais S iad Reference Item Description section Product information Displays product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool Section 8 7 ection 8 Connect to MELFANSweb Displays the Connect to MELFANSweb screen INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL oe z O O Mn Z Z Q G m a 38 tr lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 14 8 4 2 Menu configuration 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 8 15 MELSEC IA series 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool The following shows how to change the DB Connection Service settings Set the following items then click the Reflect settings button After updating the settings check for an error by selecting Administrative
63. 3 This device turns OFF 1 second after XB turns ON SNTP time query timing XB Initial value OFF 1 second SNTP time que XB ans query timing Time synchronization setting status Initial value 0 Buffer memory address 11500 SNTP time query result Initial value 0 Buffer memory address 11501 to 11507 Sets time Sets time data data Inquires time Inquires time Time query processing to the SNTP tothe SNTP_ server computer server computer Initial 1 Turns ON while the ERR LED is ON during a module continuation error or flashing during a module stop error x10 ERR LED status 2 Turns OFF when the ERR LED i turned OFF by turning the Error cloar request Y10 ON with the ERR LED ON However this is not possible while the ERR LED is flashing 3 While the ERR LED is ON or flashing when X10 is ON any or some of X11 X12 X16 and X1C turn s ON 1 Turns ON when an error regarding Sampling error occurs 2 When this device is ON the error code is stored into the Tag status area Buffer memory X11 Sampling error address 1000 to 1075 3 Turns OFF when the Error clear request Y10 is turned ON 1 Turns ON when an error regarding information linkage occurs x12 Information linkage 2 When this device is ON the error code is stored into the Error log area Buffer memory error address 150 to 247 3 Turns OFF when the Error clear request Y10 is turned ON To the next page 3 4 I O S
64. 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 3 Continue this job Finish this job e When Continue this job is selected After executions of exception processing described in the above 1 and 2 the system continues executions of other actions e When Finish this job is selected After executions of exception processing described in the above 1 and 2 the system forcibly terminates the job without executing other actions At this time update insert delete values before execution of the exception processing are committed and they are written to relevant tag components Point 1 When a job is forcibly terminated due to exception processing an error occurred during job execution job cancellation is not notified lt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation 2 If Enable DB buffering is selected for a job its exception process setting is disabled lt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering T 104 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 8 Multi select setting A click on the Multi select setting button displays the Multi select setting dialog box a Complete the setting referring to the following explanation i O After completing the setting click the _OK button Multi select setting z M Specify the maximum number of acqu
65. 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 13 Online Remote operation T7 127 7 13 3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 128 7 13 4 Changing the job status MELSEC IA series The job status can be changed x Point The job status changed by this operation returns to the status set in Job settings by the operation of Update settings turning the power ON and then OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU For Update settings refer to the following gt Section 7 13 2 3 Update settings Change job status Job List J081 J082 J083 IV Enable job Vv Enable startup logging r Enable detailed logging Disable writing to z PLC device Disable writing to database Execute Figure 7 103 Change job status From Job List select the job whose status is to be changed Select a checkbox of the status to be changed Table 7 89 Selection items of Change job status Item Description Enable job e Checked The job is enabled and thereby it is executed when the trigger conditions are met e Not checked The job is disabled and thereby it is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met Enable startup logging e Checked The startup logging is enabled and thereby startup records are logged e Not checked The startup logging is disabled and thereby startup re
66. 84 Items displayed for Communication action Description Display Displays the number of acquired records when Select or MultiSelect is selected for Action type The number of records is displayed in Acquired record No as follows e When Execution result is Success 5 Acquired record No Select Number of acquired records 0 or 1 MultiSelect Number of acquired records When Execution result is Failed Nothing is displayed Displays the number of inserted records when Insert is selected for Action type The number of records is displayed in Insert records No as follows e When Execution result is Success Insert Number of inserted records Zero may be displayed due to the following em Insert records No 1 Database restrictions are violated 2 When the database is Wonderware Historian Disable writing to database is set up lt gt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status When Execution result is Failed Nothing is displayed Displays data of DB tag link settings which were set in Communication 7 DB tag link settings action 8 SQL text The SQL text executed in Communication action is displayed 2 Inthe case of Operation action Action details Substitute tag Component Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Component a 1 gt 1 Variable 4 lt lt TAGI Startup Number 1 2 _ gt gt 1 lt lt o 1 _2 TAG1 Startu
67. APPENDICES SLSEC KEY series Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MES Interface Appendix 1 1 Addition of new functions This section explains the functions added in the MES interface module and MX MESInterface and the serial No and software version corresponding to the functions added Table App 1 Functions added in MES interface module and MX MESInterface g First 5 digits of serial No Software version of MX Reference Functions added for MES interface module MESInterface section Red t CP l dded t licabl edundant CPU modules were added to applicable i Section 2 2 systems Connectable database servers were added 09012 or later Microsoft SQL Server 2005 1 01B or later Section 2 4 2 e Wonderware Historian 9 0 Industrial SQL Server Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH QO6UDHCPU was added to Section 2 2 applicable systems 09042 or later 1 02C or later CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET G was Section 3 2 ion 3 added to the network communication route The following devices were added as accessible devices e Link direct devices Jn W8000 or higher A Section 3 2 e Extension data register D32768 or later e Extension link register W8000 or later Daylight saving time i rted aylig saving ime supporte Section 7 6 2 Daylight saving setting was added in the System setting A tting i fi le rray se ing is con gurati Section 7 8 2 Array setting was added
68. App 55 Label i a z Label Description z amp Le Job settings No 1 to 64 1 Before actions 2 After actions REMOTEEXEC1 1 to REMOTEEXEC64 2 g REMOTEEXEC64 2 5 Indicates 1 Before actions 2 After actions Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 a 3 oO 5 APPENDICES a6 Q series 3 Setting item Table App 56 Setting item APPENDICES INDEX Item Description Setting value Execute program before When enabled ENABLE REMOTEEXEC i after action When disabled DISABLE SERVER Program execution destination 1 to 32 COMMAND Command line Up to 127 characters When enabled ENABLE RETURNCHECK Check return value When disabled DISABLE ra RETURNVALUE Normal return value 2147483648 to 2147483647 Write the value into the tag When enabled ENABLE ERRORWRITE when the value is faulty When disabled DISABLE EJ ERRORTAG Tag 1 to 64 EJ ERRORELEMENT Component 1 to 256 ERRORVALUE Substitute value Any character string Do not execute job when When enabled ENABLE ERREXEC the value is faulty When disabled DISABLE Wait for execution When enabled WAIT WAIT completion When disabled NOWAIT Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 18 REMOTE CSV App 46 APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 19 ORDERBY CSV 1 File format Table App 57 File format Ite
69. Buffer memory address 4000 to 4003 OVERVIEW a The information on whether Access target CPU settings have been made or not is stored b The bit corresponding to the preset Access target CPU setting No is turned ON 0 Not set 1 Set CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 4000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 34241 4001 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 4002 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 4003 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 14 Access target CPU setting information area oO 7 Z Q lt Q m O rt a Oo 2 Access target CPU error information Buffer memory address 4004 to 4007 a The access target CPU error information is stored b The bit corresponding to the Access target CPU setting number for which the Access target CPU error has occurred is turned ON 0 No Access target CPU error 1 Access target CPU error occurred SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 4004 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3424 1 4005 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 4006 48 47 46 45
70. By the error code identify the error and take corrective actions Ee Section 10 1 Error Codes e Section 10 2 Error Code List Is the MES interface function working Activate the MES interface function e Section 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function e Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function Is the job enabled Enable the job cS Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status e Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT Check the log output to the server computer identify the error and take corrective actions e Section 10 1 Error Codes e Section 10 2 Error Code List Is there any problem on the server computer Is there an error code in the response message returned by the ML processing function No By the error code identify the error and take corrective actions eae Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT e Section 10 2 Error Code List According to each of the following identify the error and take corrective actions lt Section 10 3 3 1 Troubleshooting about LED indication and I O signals e Section 10 3 3 2 Troubleshooting about network connection e Section 10 3 3 3 Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module and access target CPU Section 10 3 3 4 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Section 10 3 3 5 Troubleshooting about the XML pr
71. Computer g Windows Meeting Space iy Windows Photo Gallery B Windows Live Messenger Download gt AllPrograms tart Search APPENDICES Select Classic View gt Control Panel gt Control Panel Home System and Maintenance User Accounts Get started with Windows Back up your computer Security hy Check for updates Check this computer s security status Add or remove user accounts Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Customize colors flow 2 program through Windows Firewall Network and Internet D Clock Language and Connect to the Internet iy L Region View network status and tasks Change keyboards or other input Set up file sharing methods ps Hardware and Sound Ease of Access Play CDs or other media automatically Let Windows suggest settings Printer Optimize visual display Adjust screen resolution INDEX Mouse Z Additional Options Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs Mobile PC Change battery settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings Select Administrative Tools LEYE gt Control Panel 2 Add Administrativ Hardware eTools 3 Device Ease of Manager Acce j Controllers Options le iSCSlInitiator Keyboard Offline Files Pen and pap Near om Input Devices formatio cE R aa vi amp Personaliz pene and Problem Programs Reports a and Features Sha
72. Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV APPENDICES MELSEC A series From the previous page Table App 53 Setting item D qL Item Description Setting value D z When NONE is selected with OPERATION Blank 7 Tag TAG XE inoue Date string DATESTR npu IN2CONSTTYPE ae A When other than the above is Numerical value NUMBER da selected with OPERATION Character string STRING 2 Variable VARIABLE 8 E None NONE A When NONE is selected with OPERATION Blank 3 When TAG is selected with E 1 to 64 _ IN2CONSTTYPE IN2TAG Input 2 Tag When other than the above is selected with OPERATION ere selected with Blank IN2CONSTTYPE When NONE is selected with OPERATION Blank id When TAG is selected with fa Input 2 IN2CONSTTYPE 110 25 a IN2ELEMENT P When other than the above is lt Component When other than the above is selected with OPERATION selected with Blank IN2CONSTTYPE When NONE is selected with OPERATION Blank When TAG is selected s Blank with IN2CONSTTYPE When DATESTR is selected Character string valid is with INZCONSTTYPE as a date Z When NUMBER is selected eivai umerical value INPUT2 Input 2 Variable When other than the above is with IN2CONSTTYPE selected with OPERATION When STRING is selected Any character string with INZCONSTTYPE When VARIABLE is selected i Variable name with IN2CONS
73. Information of the diagnostics function a Operation procedure a J XML MESSAGE an FORMAT Click the H W Information button in Module s Detailed Information The H W Information dialog box is displayed Operate it referring to the following descriptions 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 HIW Information Module Display format Module Name QJ71MES96 Product information 091020000000000 B HEX C DEC HAW LED Information HAW SW Information No vaiue mo __wo vane i 8000 l n WwW Q Q rA W A Q lt Stop monitor 2 Figure 10 3 H W Information dialog box b Displayed items The MES interface module information that is stored in the following buffer memory areas is displayed Table 10 2 Displayed items No ICED Buffer memory Address HAW LED 0000 RUN LED OFF ERR LED OFF 1 i 8000 RUN LED ON ERR LED OFF 0 1 Information C000 RUN LED ON ERR LED ON 1 Switch 1 status Mode setting 2 H W SW gt A z 2 ine inicio Switch 2 status Default operation setting Battery error detection setting 3 rmation 3 Switch 3 status Response monitoring time setting 4 10 1 Error Codes 10 6 10 1 3 System monitor 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 7 10 2 Error Code List The error code list is shown below 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module M
74. Interface Function Configuration Tool 3 12 MES interface module cccceeeettteeeee 3 11 H H rdware test nanyana 4 13 HEIP Tr A A ts aie od A A 20 9 4 l O Signal ista eaea ER 3 14 VO signals details eeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 3 16 Insert ACtION ceccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 87 Intelligent function module switch settings 4 9 IP TRG cats a etches tried 8 3 8 17 J Rol o EE E EET A 21 6 1 7 55 7 78 Job cancellation ccccccceeeeeeeeeecceceeeeseeeeeeetees 7 77 M MOVING an Hem seeti edia eaii ieii 7 8 Multi select setting ec eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeneeees 7 105 MultiSelect action ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaees 7 89 N Network Setting cecccceeeecneeeeeeeeneeeeeeenteeeeeeeaas 7 19 O ED GAEE E Secrest I E ete A 20 8 2 8 5 One shot execution of a job ssssssensennnseen 7 122 9 1 P Parts ameSn dain a e e a a aaeei 4 6 Performance specifications ccceseeeeeeeeees 3 1 Program executiOn ccceceeeeeees 6 11 7 72 8 3 Project Setting 2 02 cece cceeeeseecceeeeteeeeeeeeeteneceeeettenee 7 17 R RAG 2s 226s eee iat acetic EEEE A 7 115 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING n Ww 9 fa z m a a lt Remote operation ccccceceeeeeeeeeteeeseneees 7 123 Change job status 0 0 0 eeeceeeeeeeenteeeeeeeneee 7 128 CompactFlash
75. Label Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 Select Update Delete conditions No 1 to 8 CONDITION64 10 8 E Indicates Select Update Delete conditions No 1 to 8 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 CONDITION1 1 1 to CONDITION64 10 8 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 38 Appendix 3 15 ACCONDITION CSV APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 47 Setting item MELSEC IA series Item Description Setting value AND AND FJ coms Combination OR OR For the first line Blank FIELDNAME Field name Any character string Tag TAG Date DATE Date string DATESTR TYPE Constant type Numerical value NUMBER Character string STRING Variable VARIABLE None NONE EQUAL z NOTEQUAL Select Update lt LESSTHANEQUAL COMPARE oe Delete conditions gt GREATERTHANEQUAL lt LESSTHAN gt GREATERTHAN When TAG is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 6 TAG Tag When other than the above is selected Blank with TYPE When TAG is selected with TYPE 1 to 256 kA ELEMENT Component When other than the above is selected Blank an with TYPE When TAG is selected with TYPE Blank When DATE is Server time SERVER selected with Unit ti UNIT TYPE nit time When DATESTR is selected with Character string valid as
76. MELSEC A series 7 4 4 Importing a project Import an existing project a Any setting can be selected from an existing project and can be imported into the current i project setting This function is useful when settings of an existing project is utilized for another project D Select Project Import Project file from the menu Zz E As the Open dialog box appears specify the project to be imported O For the operation for the Open dialog box refer to the following F gt LCF Section 7 4 2 Opening a project 2e 3 When the project to be imported is selected the Import from project file dialog box is displayed A Make the setting referring to the following descriptions 6 oO After completing the setting clicking the Import button starts the import x Lu A Import from project file We Existing registration A EAMA information J a lt Project root nips a peaages Oo Access target CPU settings Setting ae of device ta N DH controicru 4 Item type ee o Oo CPUL_in_Device1 No of Benes services 9 m Cf cPuz_in_Devicet No of jobs i F xs Selection tree O24 a E out ENAA Import information SRE mls Device2 No of access target CPUs E 2 a DGS Server service settings No of device tags DE OS DB_Server No of server services O APP Server N OE Job settings Df ErrorwatchJob lo of jobs INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Import FUNCTIONS Ca
77. MES interface module Signal direction MES interface module Programmable controller CPU Table 3 12 I O signal list Signal direction programmable controller CPU MES interface module Device z Device Signal name Signal name No No 3 14 Module READY X0 ON Module prepared YO OFF Module being prepared Use prohibited CompactFlash card status x1 Yd ON Installed OFF Not installed xo File access status y2 File access stop request ON Stopped OFF Running ON Stop request OFF X3 Use prohibited Y3 Network connection status X4 Y4 ON Connected OFF Not connected Information linkage status X5 Y5 ON Executing OFF Stopped X6 Y6 X7 Y7 X8 Use prohibited Y8 SEN Use prohibited X9 Y9 XA YA XB SNTP time query timing YB ON Query complete OFF No query XC YC XD pae YD Use prohibited XE YE XF YF 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 1 I O signal list To the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 3 12 I O signal list Signal direction MES interface module Signal direction programmable controller CPU S Programmable controller CPU MES interface module i Device Device 2 Signal name Signal name ERR LED status Error clear request ON Lighting flashing OFF Extinction ON Error clear request OFF A Stn Sampling error va ON Error OFF
78. MULTISELECT2 1 ENABLE NUMBER 20 2 NTCREC NTCTAG NTCELEMENT FILLZERO i DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE 5 9 ENABLE ENABLE 2 3 DISABLE TROUBLESHOOTING gt 1 APPENDICES Item row File format Label column setting area INDEX Communication action 1 ES Multi select setting Specify the maximum number of acquiring records at Notify the number of acquired records Clear the unused tag components by zero 2 Label Table App 61 Label Label Description Job setting No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 MULTISELECT1 1 to MULTISELECT64 1 MULTISELECT64 10 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 48 Appendix 3 20 MULTISELECT CSV APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 62 Setting item MELSEC IA series Item Description Setting value MAXREC Specify the maximun Specify DISABLE number of acquiring records Not specify ENABLE Tag TAG MAXTYPE Constant type Numeric value NUMBER When TAG is selected for 1 to64 MAXTAG Device tag number MAXTYPE Other than the above Blank t perot When TAG is selected for 1 to64 omponent number o MAXELEMENT P MAXTYPE device tag Other than the above Blank When NUMBER is
79. Module User s Manual Co0o0h to CFFFh Errors detected in the Ethernet interface module 3 Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual E000h to EFFFh Errors detected in the CC Link IE controller network CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual FOOOh to FEFFh Errors detected in the MELSECNET H 10 network system Q Corresponding MELSECNET H 10 Network System Reference Manual FFDOh System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem FFD1h Monitor condition dissatisfied error Reading is not possible because the monitor condition is not met e Delete the monitor condition by GX Developer FFD2h to FFD4h System error 10 2 Error Code List e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem To the next page 10 20 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module se XML MESSAGE on FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code FFD5h MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name ROM operation error Description Writing a TC setting value was attempted to the programmable controller CPU that was running the ROM Action Change the TC s
80. No applicable record 2 Exception processing Multiple applicable records Exception processing Applicable records overflow EXCEPTION64 10 2 t Indicates 1 Exception processing No applicable record 2 Exception processing Multiple applicable records or Exception processing Applicable records overflow Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 16 ACEXCEPTION CSV APPENDICES INDEX App 40 APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 50 Setting item MELSEC IA series Item Description Setting value Do not select DISABLE EXEC Select from the head record Select ENABLE Quit Continue this job Finish this Continue the job DISABLE job Terminate the job ENABLE Do not send notification to ae DISABLE EJ NOTICE Send notification of this tag component exception Send notification to tag ENABLE component TAG Tag 1 to 64 KA ELEMENT Component 1 to 256 VALUE Substitute value Optional Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format P g Appendix 3 16 ACEXCEPTION CSV APPENDICES 26 Q series Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV W z 1 File format Bic S Table App 51 File format Ze File name ACOPERATION CSV File contents Operation action lt 5 Section 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action 2 fe y v
81. Not selectable when Data type of the tag component is Bit or String 3 Tag Type Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison Note that tags with Arrat setting are not selectable 4 Component Select or enter a component constant value that is used as a condition for comparison T 64 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series Example The following shows that the job is activated when the value of the tag component Process 1 Temperature reaches 45 or higher Ranges nUn a29 Ww wus Trigger 1 value monitoring startup x OVERVIEW Tag Component Condition Tag Type Process1 Temperature gt Constant Figure 7 52 Value monitoring startup setting example 1 Example To activate the job repeatedly while the condition of Value monitoring startup is met Make settings as follows CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Table 7 49 Value monitoring startup setting example 2 Item Description Combination AND Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Value monitoring startup Specified time period startup As the condition alternates between true and false as shown below job startup can be repeated while the Value monitoring startup condition is met SPECIFICATIONS Tag component value Trigger 1 Timing of Value monitoring startup Condition Value PROCEDURE TO SETTINGS
82. O assignment tab Table 4 4 I O assignment tab setting items Type Select Intelli Model name Enter the model name of the module Points Select 32 points StartXY Enter the MES interface module head I O number Detailed setting For a multiple CPU system specify the control CPU of the MES interface module Clicking the button displays the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Make the setting with referring to the following descriptions Selecting HEX in Input format facilitates the input After completing the setting click the End button Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX Slot Type Model name oo OO m QU71MES96 ooo 0003 i a eS Figure 4 8 Switch setting for I O and SUPT function module dialog box 4 9 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series Table 4 5 Setting items of the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Switch number Description Switch 1 Mode setting Switch 2 Default operation setting battery error detection setting OVERVIEW Switch 3 Lower byte Response monitoring time setting Switch 4 to 5 For system use Do not set 1 Mode setting Switch 1 Select the MES interface module operation mode Table 4 6 Mode setting Switch 1 setting items CONFIGURATION
83. OK_ button starts aT paige pee beretim ade ton writing in any device tag setting without existence of user setting system area in the control CPU except Universal model QCPUs no Zz z o a x i ER Upon completion of writing a dialog box g appears asking for confirmation of the setting z D Writing is completed S Do you want to update the settings now update o l Zz When Yes button is clicked a Bap Clicking Yes refreshes the setting data to the F oe MES interface module Ba O MX MESInterface X e 1 Updated INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION When button is clicked Clicking does not refresh the setting data to the MES interface module Execute Update settings later turn OFF the LD The written settings will be enabled after power and then ON or reset the programmable controller CPU MX MESInterface the settings are updated or the MES interface module is restarted For Update settings refer to the following CF Section 7 13 2 3 Update settings FUNCTIONS Figure 7 91 Writing the MES interface function settings a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 12 Online T 113 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL AG Q series EJ Point 1 Setting data are refreshed to the MES interface m
84. Performance and Maintenance on the Control Panel displays the Performance and Maintenance dialog box F Sener To display the Control Panel select Start ms e age Control Panel B Startup and shutdown Clicking Administrative Tools displays Administrative Tools dialog box g pe DB Control Panel My Documents Q My Computer E My Network Places J To the next page 8 5 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC TA eries From the previous page cas z ODBC Data Source Administrator Ae Double clicking Data Sources ODBC displays s UserDSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling Abi Q Ww 8 De ee ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box 3 4 2 System Data Sources jame river dd Select the System DSN tab then click the Add button 3 For use of the 64 bit version of Oracle install the 32 bit z version of Oracle Client and then start the ODBC Data 7 Source Administrator An ODBC System data souwe stores irfamaion about how to cornet to 4 For use of a 64 bit version operating system type the re ie indicat ta provider sstem data source ts visible to all users eon ins machine foldina NT savices following at the command prompt to start the ODBC Data aS cra Me Source Administrator SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe Create New Data Source
85. Q QnA series programmable controller CPU and file registers for individual programs cannot be accessed by specifying the program name Do not use local devices and file registers for individual programs since they may not be read written correctly For the QCPU Q mode QnACPU specify SM for the QCPU A mode ACPU specify M9000 or later For the QCPU Q mode QnACPU specify SD for the QCPU A mode ACPU specify D9000 or later For the device name specify either of them For n specify the block number For n specify the network No For n specify the intelligent function module special function module I O number When using the QOOJCPU the access is not possible M L and S devices are in the same region regardless of the parameter device setting 10 ERO R cannot be specified 11 M32768 or later cannot be specified 12 B8000 or later cannot be specified 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 9 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z Q lt Q m O int a Oo SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS Mi als a6 Fl cries 3 3 Function List This section lists the MES interface module functions 1 Function summary The following explains the function summary of the MES interface module and MX MESInterface Th
86. Setting After actions Setting Figure 7 60 Program execution Program execution settings before action execution or Program execution settings after action execution is displayed Make the setting referring to the following descriptions After completing the setting click the OK_ button Program execution settings before action execution IV Execute program before action Program execution destination APP_Server x Command line C DBAPP RECIPE_02 EXE IV Check return value Normal return value 0 JV Write the value into the tag when the value is Faulty Component DB_Error IV Do not execute job when the value is Faulty Figure 7 61 Program execution settings before action execution 1 72 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series Program execution settings after action execution Ww IV Execute program after action s gt Program execution destination JAPP_Server Command line c DBAPP RECIPE_02 EXE z Q E IV Check return value 20 Normal return value 0 irs nz JV Write the value into the tag when the value is Faulty a S Tag Component Process2 DB_Error no Cancel z o i Figure 7 62 Program execution settings after action execution T 5 Table 7 53 Setting items when selecting Program execution settings before action execution or Program e
87. Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 1 Setting information files list Appendix 3 20 App 8 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC IA series Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions This section explains the setting information file format and editing precautions This section shows with an example in which the setting information file is displayed with spreadsheet software 1 Setting information file format The setting information file format has the type made up of label columns and setting areas and the type made up of label columns item rows and setting areas a Type made up of label columns and setting areas Table App 8 Type made up of label columns and setting areas Item Description NWTYPE LAN IPTYPE SPECIFY IPADDRESS suener GATEWAY File format SNTPADDRESS TIMEZONE L Setting area Displays setting values Label column Displays setting items Available file SYSTEM CSV DST CSV b Type made up of label columns item columns and setting areas Table App 9 Type made up of label columns item columns and setting areas Item Description Item row Displays setting items SAMPLING__ INTERVAL BEFORE LOGGING EXECUTE l 10 NO ENABLE 64 Flle formei HIGHSPEED 1 NO ENABLE 20 TAGS EXECUTE ENABLE Setting area
88. Setting items in Time Q n synchronization setting a NWTYPE LAN g IETMVRE SPECIFY EF iPappRess 192 168 3 3 E sueneT 255 255 255 0 EF Gateway DNSTYPE SPECIFY DNS1 id DNS2 5 HTTPTYPE DEFAULT g HTTPPORT lt HTTPNAT NO Fail eeu Ee DEFAULT FTPPORT FTPNAT NO File format SYSTEMNAME QJ71MES96 DIAGNOSIS NO INTERVAL DESTINATION EDEVICE STARTUP YES EF sntp PLC E sNTPADDRESS EJ TIMEZONE Wa pssursize 64 __ Label column Change disabled L Setting area Can be changed by the user System setting INDEX Network settings IP address 192 168 3 Subnet mask 255 255 255 Default gateway Account setting QJ71ME596 Add Time synchronization setting Synchronize with PLC CPU time Synchronize with SNTP Lo ma zi DB buffering settings co Mh Someones DB buffering status No of DB bufferings Resend DB buffer request Clear DB buffer request DB buffer Full DB buffer utilization DB buffering capacity 64 MB Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 3 SYSTEM CSV App 12 APPENDICES 2 Label Table App 11 Label MELSEC LEY series Label Description Setting value NWTYPE Fixed value LAN IPTYPE Fixed value SPECIFY IPADDRESS IP address IP address Decimal SUBNET Subn
89. Switch 3 i nn al v Specify 0 Response monitoring time setting 15 to 255 Second The upper byte data is ignored However when other than 0 is specified When setting the time between 0 in this area Switch setting error 0180h occurs at hardware test and 14 or making no settings response monitoring time operates with 15 seconds Figure 4 10 Response monitoring time setting Switch 3 Lower byte Point After Write to PLC is executed the intelligent function module switch settings are enabled when turning the power ON from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU eeseeeseeseeceoevaeeeoeoe eee seeseeeeseeeeeeeaeseseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeee 8 For GX Developer operation method refer to the following manual lt 3 GX Developer Operating Manual eeeeaeseaeneeaeeeeeeaeneeneeeaesneeneeeeeeeeaeneeeeeeeeaeeeaeneeeneeaeee 4 11 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 4 6 Self diagnostics Test This section explains the self diagnostics test designed for checking the MES interface module communication function and hardware OVERVIEW 4 6 1 Self loopback test Execute the self loopback test for a hardware check including the communication function of the MES interface module 10BASE T 100BASE TX interface CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 1 MES interface module operation mode setting In Switch setting for I O and intelligent func
90. T from 100BASE TX depending on the device on other end For connection with a hub not having the auto negotiation function set the hub side to half duplex auto communication mode 2 Distance between a hub and node 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO oO Z Q lt Q m O rt a 2 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 2 Software specifications Table 3 2 MX MESInterface performance specifications Item No of connected databases No of databases that can be connected Specifications Maximum 32 items project Oracle 8i Oracle 9i Oracle 10g Oracle 11g 32 bit x64 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 e Microsoft SQL Server 2005 e Microsoft SQL Server 2008 32 bit x64 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE 2000 e Microsoft Access 2000 e Microsoft Access 2003 e Microsoft Access 2007 e Wonderware Historian 9 0 Industrial SQL Server Reference section Section 7 9 1 DB interface Job Allowable number of settings Maximum 64 items project Section 7 10 1 Trigger buffering Maximum 128 times No of conditions can be combined Maximum 2 conditions Combination can be selected eith
91. Tag data are collected at high speed at the specified intervals When High speed sampling is selected the tag sampling interval can be set in units of 100 milliseconds within the range from 1 to 600 x 100ms 1 Precautions when selecting High speed sampling e Be sure to create a user specified system area in the program memory of the control CPU For the redundant system be sure to create system area for the user setting to the Redundant CPU of both systems in the same capacity When the control CPU is the Universal model QCPU creation of a user specified system area is not required L gt REMARKS 1 Creating a user specified system area e Registration of High speed sampling is limited to one tag only Setting this to multiple tags is not allowed e The choice of CPU name in Component setting input is fixed to the first item in Access target CPU settings Control CPU e Devices of tag components can be set within the total of 96 points The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of Device tag settings Example When Double word 2 points is set for Data type of all components up to 48 component settings can be registered T 38 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series c Do not sample The tag is not sampled ElPoint 1 Select Do not sample in the cases sho
92. The following explains the display of the Startup log 1 Icons a Each of icons represents the completion status of a job 3 F Table 7 81 Icons and their meanings 7 g a Icon Meaning The job was completed normally No detailed log LI The job was completed normally With detailed log E Selecting the job and clicking the View details button displays the View details dialog box INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION d The job was canceled No detailed log The job was canceled With detailed log i Selecting the job and clicking the View details button displays the View details dialog box 2 Date 9 Displays the date and time on which a job is activated z 3 Job 7 Displays a job that was activated 4 Summary Displays trigger conditions a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 26 ZrO z O E O Z Le Table 7 82 Displays in Summary Display Description Startup Shows that any job other than handshake operation was activated Handshake start Shows that job execution of handshake operation was activated Handshake end Shows that job execution of handshake operation was completed 5 EA 7 12 Online T 117 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 118 7 12 Online b Detailed log Detailed log data of the jobs each of which has Test mode
93. W g w En 8 H X h x 9 9 l Y i y A 3 J Z j z B K k a a aa a Ei e N a FS O z o Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names etc The shaded sections can be used However a number cannot be used as the first character Table App 6 Characters can be used in field names table names etc 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NUL SP 0 P p EA 1 A Q a q 2 2 B R b r za 3 C S c s EE 4 D T d t 5 5 E U e u 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 G W g w 8 8 H X h x 9 9 l Y y ee E ES oe EA a M m Ee gt IN F O o Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc APPENDICES M SLSEC KEY series Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format This section explains the format of CSV files Setting information files created by exporting the project settings with the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool LC gt Section 7 4 6 Exporting a CSV file Exported setting information files can be utilized for creating setting sheets or printing Appendix 3 1 Setting information files list This section lists the exported setting information files Table App 7 List of exported setting information files A A Reference F
94. a date TYPE EJ VALUE Constant value When NUMBER is selected with Numerical value TYPE When STRING is selected with TYPE Any character string When VARIABLE is selected with Variable name TYPE When NONE is selected with TYPE Blank App 39 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 15 ACCONDITION CSV APPENDICES 26 Q series Appendix 3 16 ACEXCEPTION CSV W 2 1 File format Bic z Table App 48 File format Ze File name ACEXCEPTION CSV Communication action Exception processing 2 File contents 5 Section 7 11 1 7 Exception processing No applicable record 2 E N Ez z ITEM ELEMENT VALUE File format EXCEPTION1 1 1_ DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE EXCEPTION3 1 1 ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE 3 300 EXCEPTION3 1 2 enaere ewesie sase EXCEPTION15 2 1 DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE 100 LY Item row Label column setting area Communication action Exception processing No applicable record I Send notification of this exception C Continue this job Finish this job Exception processing Multiple rm Ea IV Select firster find records y 2 J Send notification of this exception I Continue this job G Finish this job Label EXCEPTION1 1 1 to EXCEPTION64 10 2 Table App 49 Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 1 Exception processing
95. account Figure 2 11 SQL Server Properties Configure INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 2 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE 2000 a Set the security authentication mode into the Mixed Mode Specify the command parameter at installation of the MSDE 2000 setup sapwd sa SECURITYMODE SQL sa Specify any password A O 3 Microsoft Access 2000 Microsoft Access 2003 and Microsoft Access 2007 S a The number of fields to be updated UPDATE by the one Communication action u z Oo 9 is up to 127 Le b Do not make multiple accesses to one and the same file 258 Do not make access from multiple MES interface modules 228 c Memo type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used when using Microsoft Access 2007 Oo ail HOO d A field having multiple values cannot be used when using Microsoft Access wz 2007 SE DoD 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration 2 18 2 6 2 Precautions for using database 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA series 4 Wonderware Historian a The insertion INSERT only can be used with Communication action b The rollback of insertion INSERT to the database is disabled 2 19 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration 2 6 2 Precautions for using database 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LA series CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the performance specifications functions buffer memory etc o
96. and Job settings 2 The top item listed under Access target CPU settings default name ControlCPU cannot be moved 7 8 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 4 Project File Handling M a6 Q series This section explains how to handle project files MES Interface Function Configuration Tool treats the MES interface function settings for a single MES interface module as one project 7 4 1 Creating a new project Create a new project When a new project is created the project currently being edited is discarded Perform either of the following Click L New e Select Project New from the menu 7 4 2 Opening a project Retrieve an existing project Perform either of the following Click co Open e Select Project Open from the menu 2 The Open dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the Open button Look in B My Documents Am Music Am Pictures File 2m Files of type MES interface function project file mup x Cancel Figure 7 12 Open dialog box Table 7 7 Setting items in the Open dialog box Item Description Look in Select the location where the project is stored File name Specify a project file name Select a project file type Files of type Prol yP gt MES interface function pr
97. and devices stored to the auto refresh area in the CPU shared memory of the Motion CPU Example D256 to D511 Auto refresh area 0000 to OOFF Refresh settings Change screens Setting 1 7 J Set starting devices for each PLC Send range for each PLC PLC side device The auto refresh area Caution Caution Offset HEX from starting address of the auto refresh area Refer to the user s manual of the each PLC about the starting address The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W RZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Figure App 7 Refresh settings for the Motion CPU CPU No 2 c Refresh settings for the QCPU CPU No 1 Set the number of points and devices of the QCPU to which auto refresh area data in the Motion CPU shared memory is stored Example CPU No 2 auto refresh area 0000 to OOFF D256 to D511 Refresh settings Change screens Setting v Set starting devices for each PLC Send range for each PLC PLC side device The auto refresh area Caution D256 Stat End Stat End Caution Offset HEX from starting address of the auto refresh area Refer to the user s manual of the each PLC about the starting address The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W A ZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Figure App 8 Refresh settings for the QCPU CPU No 1 d Device tag settings for the MES interface module Register the QCPU CPU No 1 dev
98. battery data such as setting information and system data may be lost CONFIGURATION SYSTEM a Operation procedure Stop file access Turn the File access stop request Y2 ON from OFF Confirm that file access has stopped Check the File access status X2 is turned ON SPECIFICATIONS A Power OFF the programmable controller CPU File access stop request Y2 e wW ao e a WW Q x a fa Zz LEF B RE E W eo nao In operation During stop V File access status X2 Power OFF the programmable controller Figure 4 21 Shutdown operation required when the programmable controller is powered OFF while the MES interface module is operating without battery INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Es Point If the shutdown operation is not performed before powering OFF a programmable controller even though the MES interface module is operating without battery data in the CompactFlash card being accessed may be corrupted or a file system error may occur FUNCTIONS 2 Making battery error undetected during operation without battery Q A battery error occurs when the file protection battery is not mounted to the MES interface module e 1 ON is written to the Battery status area Buffer memory address 7 e The ERR LED is turned ON and ERR LED status X10 and Other error X1C are turned ON MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION 2 Ba
99. card operation 08 7 131 Connection result of previous job execution 7 127 DB buffering operation s 7 130 DB buffering status eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneee 7 129 Module operation 2 eceeceeeeeeeeeeeteees 7 125 Module status ceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 7 124 Trigger buffering Status eeeeeeeeee eee 7 131 Replicating an item cc eceeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeenteeeeeeeaes 7 8 REQUEST tag iti caddie BOR ae 9 2 RESPONSE loaren i A A 9 3 S Select ACtON senose da aeeti 7 85 Select sort settings cccceccceeeetecccceeeeeeecreeeeees 7 97 Select Update Delete conditions 000 7 95 Self loopback test ececceeceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 4 12 Server seice onn a a a A A 21 7 50 Settings and procedure to operation 005 4 2 ONT P tie asat Ter aa AT AART A 20 7 20 SQL failure l0g ennn ua 8 4 8 19 8 28 SQL text transmission Communication action 0 06 A 20 6 10 7 82 Sta rnup lO sanar reta ARa OREA 7 117 Startup logging 0 ceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetteeeeeees 7 57 Statistical processing eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ereere 7 46 System configuration eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenaes 2 1 System Setting 0 cee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 18 T TES MOMS Feslsce phere E tees teen 7 58 Time synchronization 6 24 7 20 TMO ZOMG eea e aA AEEA A 21 7 20 Transfer Setup ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeete
100. characters only and include some non alphanumeric character s e g amp to create complicated user name and password 2 To protect from illegal access using the default account delete the account after creating another account b An account of User name QJ71MES96 and Password MITSUBISHI is set by default To protect from illegal access using the default account delete the account after creating another account 7 6 System Setting 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting Configure the settings for the DB buffering function a For the DB buffering function setting refer to the following i lt gt Section 6 1 9 DB buffering function 2 DB buffering settings Tag J Component z DB buffering status i o No of DB bufferings Resend DB buffer request ao Le Coa DE buf fer reques DB buffering capacity gt 6 DB buffer utilization 64 MB Figure 7 26 DB buffering settings z z O 1 DB buffering status 5 A a Select a tag component into which whether data are currently accumulated in the DB buffer or not is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled af Zw e Tags for which Array setting is set as 3 20 b Data are stored as follows depending on the data type o nao Table 7 27 Values stored in DB bufferin
101. checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 64 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is checked No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 Select 0 2s 0 3s 0 6s 1 9s 7 58 9 Update tf 0 2s 0 2s 0 5s 1 38 4 7s a Insert 3 oO E b When Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked The following shows the results in the case where the Enhance sampling efficiency box is not checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 65 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked i No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 z Select 028 o3s o6s 19s 75s Update 0 2s 0 3s 0 7s 2 58 9 6s Insert c When MultiSelect is selected The following shows the results in the case where MultiSelect is selected for Action type in a Table App 66 Measurement results when MultiSelect is selected for Action type Z No of data 16 64 256 1024 4096 16384 40000 MultiSelect 0 2s 0 3s 0 6s 1 98 7 58 30s 72s Appendix 4 Processing Time App 52 Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later APPENDICES MELSEC IA series Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier 1 Measurement conditions Table App 67 Measurement conditions Item Description Server computer Access target CPU CPU Intel Xeon 2 8GHz Memory 256MB OSs Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Database Oracle
102. database server computers and application server computers The database server computer is a personal computer with a relational database which links information with the MES interface module The application server computer is a personal computer with a program that operates upon request from the MES interface module Job Unit for accessing a database Update settings Processing updates the MES interface module settings from MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Configuration computer Personal computer for configuring various settings required for the MES interface function in the MES interface module This computer can be shared with a server computer Time zone Standard time zone for each region of the world Each nation uses the time difference 12 hours maximum from the time at the Greenwich Observatory in the United Kingdom GMT as the standard time The region using the same time difference is called a time zone The standard time for Japan is 9 hours ahead of the GMT In some nations daylight time in which the clock is advanced for one hour is used in summer Tag component Component Generic term for a component Device data making up a device tag Tag This data organizes the communications path data type device etc for access to each programmable controller CPU device data as a single data unit Data source Connection information necessary for accessing data using ODBC With Wind
103. e Set required items in Component setting input and click the Add button The component is added in Component List Modifying a component Z2 When a component to be modified is selected in Component List its settings are 2S displayed in Component setting input e Modify the item settings in Component setting input and click the Replace button f 6 Deleting a component z Select a component to be deleted in Component List and click the Delete button 5 5 Deleting the settings in Component setting input e Clicking the Clear button deletes the settings in Component setting input ae cada Component setting input 8 a 2 Component name CPU name ControlCPU zj o dear E 8 nao Head device Data type Single word X bytes Add I Perform statistical processing Component List ef 2 EIE Component name CPU name Device Data type Statistical type o Z 0 O 1 E 8 Z Le INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Ow oD Nn e U Ne A w N je JES r Figure 7 35 Component setting a a fe o eA o9 We E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 43 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi b Q series ELS Table 7 35 Items in Component setting Item Description Component name Enter a component name Up to 16 charact
104. ee 1 to 40000 Decimal integer EJ vaxvaLue Setting value selected for MAXTYPE Other than the above Blank Notify th ber of Not notif DISABLE NTCREC ify e number y acquired records Notify ENABLE When DISABLE is Blank EJ Ntctac Device tag number selected for NTCREC Other than the above 1 to 64 When DISABLE is Component number of Blank EJ NTCELEMENT selected for NTCREC device tag Other than the above 1 to 64 Clear the unused tag Clear to 0 ENABLE FILLZERO components by zero Not clear to 0 DISABLE App 49 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 20 MULTISELECT CSV APPENDICES Appendix 4 Processing Time MELSEC A series This section explains the processing time required for communication action as a result of measurements made under the conditions shown in 1 The processing time can be lengthened however depending on any of the following factors e Operating environment personal computer network and the CompactFlash card e Loading status of the server computer and the network Sequence scan time e Accessing status from a personal computer terminal display or intelligent function module to the programmable controller CPU e Access from a personal computer by MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and XML processing Settings of the MES interface module Use the measurement result shown in 2 as reference of the processing time Appendix 4
105. for using a CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 15 MELS a6 el series Remark Sooo occa When the power is turned off or the programmable controller CPU is reset during writing to the CompactFlash card the write processing may not be completed In this case the MES interface module can be powered off without file access stop processing because it automatically restores the files when powered on again In some cases however it cannot completely restore files If a problem may arise by this stop file access before turning off the power or resetting the programmable controller CPU Also it is recommended to back up important data in various ways such as saving them to other media lt Section 4 7 2 1 Stopping file access eeeeeceeecoseeceoevaoeeeeeeeeoseseeeaseeeaoeveeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeea eee eee 4 7 2 nstallation removing the CompactFlash card This section explains how to install remove the CompactFlash card Installation of the CompactFlash card Installation of a CompactFlash card l Install the CompactFlash card L 2 Installation of the CompactFlash card Is the programmable controller power ON Power ON the programmable controller Check that the CompactFlash card is fully inserted to the MES interface module Turning CompactFlash card status X1 ON indicates correct installation End Figure 4 1
106. gt Exit Figure 7 5 Project menu Table 7 1 Project menu items S Reference Item Description p section New Creates a new project Section 7 4 1 Open Retrieves an existing project Section 7 4 2 Save Overwrites and saves the current project Section 7 4 3 Save As Saves the current project under a new file name Section 7 4 3 Project file Imports an existing project Section 7 4 4 Import CSV Files Imports an existing CSV file Section 7 4 5 Export CSV Files Exports the current project settings to a CSV file Section 7 4 6 Recent Files Select a file recently used in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool to open it Exit Terminates the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 2 Edit Add item Ctrl Ins Delete item Ctri Del Replicate item Shift Ctrl Ins Figure 7 6 Edit menu Table 7 2 Edit menu items oa Reference Item Description i section Add item Adds the item selected in the Edit items tree Delete item Deletes the item selected in the Edit items tree Section 7 3 4 Replicate item Copies the item selected in the Edit items tree and adds it T 4 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 2 Menu configuration MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 3 View w 3 view ps fe Toolbar v Status bar Figure 7 7 View menu Z z 5 HE Table 7 3 View menu items BS pafe ee Reference 2 Item Description section Toolbar Select whe
107. in the Device Tag setting Timeout can be set 09102 or lat 1 03D or later Connection timeout was added in the Server Service al Section 7 9 1 setting Multiple records can be acquired by one action e MultiSelect was added as a communication action in the Job setting The max no of characters available for table names and field names in communication actions of the Job setting was changed to 32 Max event log capacity was changed to 4M bytes Section 7 11 1 Section 3 1 Following CPU modules were added to applicable systems as mountable modules Q02PH QO6PHCPU Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Q03UDE Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEHCPU 10012 or later Windows Vista was added Connectable database servers were added e Microsoft Access 2007 10012 or later 1 04E or later Section 2 2 Section 2 4 Section 2 4 2 Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface App 1 Appendix 1 1 Addition of new functions APPENDICES MELSEC A series g First 5 digits of serial No Software version of MX Reference Functions added i for MES interface module MESinterface section 64 bit version Windows operating systems were added Q N Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition a z A x am z Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System Sedona A2 9 Connectable database servers wer
108. interface connector RJ45 The MES interface module distinguishes 10BASE T from 100BASE TX depending on the device on other end 3 Serial number plate Indicates the serial number of the MES interface module 4 EJECT button Used for ejecting a CompactFlash card from the MES interface module 5 CompactFlash card slot Used for installing a CompactFlash card to the MES interface module 6 CompactFlash card slot cover Cover for the CompactFlash card slot 7 Battery Battery for file protection Connector pin for battery lead 8 Battery connector pin The battery lead is disconnected from the connector at shipment to prevent battery consumption 3 Indicator LED display contents QJ71MES96 10BASE T 100BASE TX REA 100 RUN M a ERR _ SD RD Figure 4 5 LED display Table 4 3 LED display Name LED status Description In normal operation RUN ON It may take some time until the RUN LED is turned ON after the module is started OFF Watchdog timer error Hardware error OFF In normal status ERR ON Module continuation error Flash Module stop error ON 100 Mbps 100 M OFF 10 Mbps ON During data send or data receive SD RD OFF Data not transmitted 4 3 Parts Names 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Mi aL 26 Q ceries 4 4 Wiring 4 4 1 Wiring OVERVIEW This section explains how to connect cables to the MES inte
109. is enabled and the trigger condition setting gt Section 7 10 Job Setting CONFIGURATION SYSTEM e5 6 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 1 to 64 Buffer memory address 11520 to 11583 The cumulative number of trigger buffer overflows for each job is stored 2 Z Q lt Q m O rt a 2 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 35 3 6 10 Information linkage function area 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION This chapter explains the settings and procedure to operate the MES interface module in a system Point 1 Before use make sure to read SAFETY PRECAUTIONS at the beginning of this manual 2 The mounting and installation environment of the MES interface module are the same as those of a programmable controller CPU For details refer to the following manual gt QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 4 1 Handling Precautions This section explains the precautions for handling the MES interface module itself 1 Do not drop or apply severe shock to the module case since it is made of resin 2 Before touching the module always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from hu
110. job is selected After execution of exception processing described in the above 1 the job is forcibly terminated without executing remaining actions At this time update insert delete values before exception processing execution are committed and they are written to relevant tag components x Point 1 When a job is forcibly terminated due to exception processing an error occurred during job execution job cancellation is not notified lt gt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation 2 If Enable DB buffering is selected for a job its exception process setting is disabled lt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering T 100 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELS 26 Q series b Exception processing Multiple applicable records When Select Update or Delete is selected for Action type set processing for the case where there are multiple records to be selected updated or deleted Exception processing Multiple applicable records IV Select firster find records IV Send notification of this exception Tag Component Substitute value Warning_No lt lt 5 Continue this job Finish this job Figure 7 84 Setting example of Exception processing Multiple applicable records 1 Select firster find records When Select is selected for Action type checking the Select fir
111. lt gt Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting x l To the next page To the next page Figure 4 2 MES interface module start up procedure 4 3 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION From the previous page y MELSEC A series From the previous page Set the target MES interface module Write a project to the MES interface module Section 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module e Section 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings 4 MES interface module Power OFF the programmable controller Configuration computer According to Network settings connect the MES interface module and configuration computer to a network LF Section 2 1 4 System configuration for operation Power ON the programmable controller When changing the settings Check communications with the MES interface module by executing the PING command in the command prompt screen 5 Configure the settings in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool for the MES interface function Chapter 6 FUNCTIONS Section 7 6 System Setting Section 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting e Section 7 8 Device Tag Setting e Section 7 9 Server Service Setting e Section 7 10 Job Setting Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions Set the target MES interface module Write the project to the MES interface modul
112. lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt a mefe PG deleterow SS Insert awholetag jer Generated SQL text INSERT INTO History DateTime TagName Value SELECT Date YYYY MM DD hh mm ss AnalogTag1 Machine1 Analog1 UNION ALL SELECT Date YYYY MM DD hh mm ss AnalogTag2 Machine1 Analog2 UNION ALL SELECT Date YYYY MM DD hh mm ss AnalogTag3 Machine2 Analog1 No of fields in project 19 Tag component data length in job 3 words total Figure 7 74 Setting example of Insert INSERT when database is Wonderware Historian Database Historian Table History Fixed The number of records corresponding to the Datetime Tagname Value number of fields set Field name Tag component is inserted AnalogTag1 Machine1 Analog1 10 2006 10 20 15 30 00 AnalogTag1 10 AnalogTag2 Machine1 Analog2 5 D 2006 10 20 15 30 00 AnalogTag2 5 AnalogTag3 Machine2 Analog1 20 ooo 2006 10 20 15 30 00 AnalogTag3 20 K I Ri Module date and time are added Figure 7 75 Operating example of Insert INSERT when database is Wonderware Historian 7 88 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATI
113. missing any trigger To the next page A 21 From the previous page Term Description New data and old data are mixedly exists in units of 16 bits 1 word in 32 bits data 2 words or Data separation a larger data due to data reception timing Daylight saving The system in which clocks are set one hour ahead of standard time in a specific period of time in Summer time summer For highly reliable processing programmable controller CPU devices are used to manage Handshake processing between the programmable controller CPU and MES interface module Field Corresponds to a column in a relational database and indicates a type of data Record attribute Variable Temporary Variable that can be used in a single job for temporary storage of values selected from a database variable and for writing operation values to a database or tag components ae Corresponds to a row in a relational database One row Record stores the values of multiple columns Fields Rollback Processing for canceling changes to a database PACKING LIST The following table shows the products included to the QJ71MES96 MES interface module and MX MESInterface Version1 SW1DNC MESIF E Model Product name Quantity QJ71MES96MES interface module 1 QJ71MES96 Battery Q6BAT 1 SW1DNC MESIF E MX MESInterface Version 1 with one license CD ROM 1 SW1DNC MESIF EA MX MESInterface Version 1 with multiple licenses CD ROM 1
114. module Input X5 Information linkage status External input command X100 Processing request MO In process M100 Handshake startup Internal relay e F M200 Completion notification Specify at Job settings M201 Job cancellation notification 2 Program example The following is a program example in which a job is executed when an execution request X100 from the outside turns ON x100 _ SET MO MO M200 4 RST MO M200 s E M200 MO M100 M200 Sets In process flag at processing request Resets In process flag at normal completion For XML processing ran Send data generation rst M201 Job restart processing SET M100 M100 M200 j Receive data processing aA Processing for normal job execution RST M100 MeO i Error handling rst MO Processing for failed job execution est M100 Figure 7 56 Program example 7 68 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 3 Timing charts Timing charts for the program example in 2 are shown below z When the job is executed normally m gt e Information linkage status X5 zZ K 9 Processing request X100 3y z ao ag a z nz In process MO i gt g Nal Hand
115. next page 3 20 3 5 Buffer Memory List 3 SPECIFICATIONS Table 3 15 Buffer memory list MELS AG Q series From the previous page Address ee Initial Reference J Application j Decimal Hex value section 248 to 799 Ae Use prohibited System area F8x to 31FH ee ee Sampling Current cycle Unit second o R amplin urrent c it seco 320 to 3214n pang 7 Section __ monitoring 802 to 803 l 3 6 6 cycle area Maximum cycle Unit second 0 R 3224 to 323n 804 to 999 Use prohibited System area 324 to 3E71 1000 to 1003 Tag setting information 0 R 3E8x to 3EBu 1004 to 1007 Basing Sampling information 0 R 3ECu to 3EFu 1008 to 1011 Sampling error informatio 0 R s ampling error information cti 3F0H to 3F3x Tag status area o ie O eee Sampling 1 error code 0 R 3F4n The composition of each area is the same as that of the Sampling 1 1013 to 1075 Sampling 2 to error code 3F 5x to 4334 64 error codes 9 Refer to for the assignment of each area 1076 to 1289 ae Use prohibited System area 434 to 5094 1290 No of requested tag 0 R W 50Ax 1291 No of stored tag 0 R 50Bu 1292 Update count 0 R 50C1 Current tag Section 1293 data value area 3 6 8 No of components 0 R 50Dx 1294 to 1299 System area 50Ex to 5131 1300 to 1811 Current tag data value 0 R 5144 to 7
116. of 16 b If 17 or more errors occur the excess errors are registered to the error log areas starting from the error log 1 area again 3 Error log 1 to 16 Buffer memory address 152 to 247 The error history is stored The Error log area is composed of 16 logs of the same data arrangement a Error code An error code which indicates the error contents is stored For error codes refer to the following Section 10 2 Error Code List b Time The time when the error occurred is stored in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Buffer memory address 152 to 157 Error log1 0 Error code 158 to 163 Error log2 S 1 System area Use prohibited i ae Year 00x to 99x The last T A 2 Montane tots two digits of the year LOA 3 Hour 00x to 23 Day 014 to 31H N gt Time 242 to 247 Error log16 w 4 Second 00h to 59x Minute 00H to 59x x Year 00x to 99x The first 5 two digits of the year Day of the week On to 6x Figure 3 7 Error time area c If an error that has already stored in the Error log area recurs the error code is not stored in the Error log area 3 26 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 5 Error log area 3 SPECIFICATIONS EJ Point MELS a6 Q series 1 The information of the Error log area can be confirmed on the following diagnostic screen Select System monitor Error Display of GX Developer Section 10 1 3 System monitor The Error log area can be cleared in either of the fol
117. of tags MELS AG Q series From the previous page Table 3 2 MX MESInterface performance specifications Specifications 64 tags project No of components 256 components 2 tag 4096 components project Data type Signed single precision integer type 16 bits signed double precision integer type 32 bits single precision floating point type 32 bits bit type character string type 1 to 32 characters Statistical processing Average maximum minimum moving average 3 moving 3 3 maximum moving minimum Reference section Section 7 8 3 DB buffering Buffering capacity during communication error 4 Maximum capacity CompactFlash card capacity 32M bytes 16 M bytes to 512 M bytes Section 7 6 4 XML processing Working log Command type One shot execution of a job enabling the job disabling the job Reception protocol Request message size Maximum 128 k bytes HTTP1 0 User authentication Error log capacity No of accounts 16 User ID 1 to 20 characters Password 6 to 14 characters Maximum capacity 1 M byte e At least 4800 logs can be recorded Event log capacity 4 2 3 4 Chapter 9 Maximum capacity 4 M bytes Section 7 12 5 e At least 4800 logs can be recorded When there is no detailed log At least 2 logs can be recorded When there is a detailed log The monitoring interval is 1 to 600
118. of the first action L Section 6 1 8 Program execution function Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution o Fd O O Z 5 Le To the next page Figure 6 2 Job execution procedure MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 2 6 1 2 Job execution procedure FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series From the previous page Executed order Actions are executed Up to 10 actions can set for a job and they are executed in order L Section 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action Section 6 1 7 Arithmetic processing function Operation action e Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions In Update Insert actions substitute or insert values are committed to database Is the Execute program after action box checked Not checked Checked The program in the application server computer is executed after execution of the last action Section 6 1 8 Program execution function Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution If a value was written to a tag component it is written to the device data of the programmable controller CPU Job execution is completed Figure 6 2 Job execution procedure Point For the case where an error occurs during job execution refer to the following Section 6 1 10 2 When an error occurs in
119. relay X Output relay Y Internal relay M 9 1 Latch relay L 2 Annunciator F Edge relay V Link relay B 2 Data register D Link register W x x OJO O SOJOJO OJO O x O O O O O O O x x x O O x O x x 1x x OJOLOJOJO OJO OJOJOJ OJO OJSOJsOJ O O O OJOJ O O x x x O x O xX x x x 1x JO xX x x x x O O LO OJO OJO O JO x O O O OJO O O x x x x x x O O O O O O O O O O O Contact TS Timer Coil TC O Current value T TN 4 O Contact CS O Counter Coil CC O Current value C CN 4 O Contact SS O Retentive timer Coil SC O Current value ST SN 4 O x Link special relay SB O x Link special register SW O x Step relay S 9 x O Direct input DX x x Direct output DY x x Accumulator A x x Index register 2 O 2 V x x R o O File register ZR o x ERn R 510 x x O Link input Jn x O x O x Link output Jn Y O x O x ean rere Link relay Jn B O x O x Link special relay Jn SB O x O x Link register Jn W O x O x Link special register Jn SW O x O x Intelligent function 7 Buffer register Un GO O x O x module device 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges Accessible x Inaccessible To the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 g 9 MELSEC A series The local devices of the
120. series Install the CompactFlash card When installing the CompactFlash card into the MES interface module pay attention to the orientation of the card gt Push the CompactFlash card securely into the slot until it is flush with the EJECT 3 button LED cover z 2 EJECT button Tab direction i a oO pE D 26 A nO Insert in Orientation of a this direction CompactFlash card CompactFlash card 5 CompactFlash card slot q 2 d l z a P A Figure 4 15 Installation of a CompactFlash card Lower the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module until it clicks When a CompactFlash card is installed the CompactFlash card slot cover cannot be attached to the MES interface module Save the removed CompactFlash card slot cover carefully e W x e a WW Q a a fa Zz LEF oae RE E W eo nao INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 18 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series 3 Removing a CompactFlash card Q Open the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module then remove the CompactFlash card LED cover EJECT button EJECT button Remove in this direction m NS C
121. tec eeeeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetenneneaees App 24 Appendix 3 10 SERVER CSV jincstic ies hei ade eee anai adel ods ait aae eel eae died aaua eats App 26 Appendix 3 11 JOB CSV vies issn aeaa e aceite wate at asides td ante bd etapa aAa Eaa eaeeza nee ate Se eanit App 28 Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV cccecececceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeesecsaaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeseesessensasaeeeeeees App 30 Appendix 9 13 ACTION CSW atrcait e a a aso neath E a meetin davai tn eid App 34 Appendix 3 14 ACFIELD CSV cata chee ene ects cl kkt te tata Pla ig sce iad EAEE A E E E EEEE EEEren App 36 Appendix 3 15 ACCONDITION CSV o ccc ceeececeecceccee cee ee cette eet caeeaaeaaeceeeeeeeeseeseceeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneees App 38 Appendix 3 16 ACEXCEPTION CSV oo ccc cccceeeeeeececeeceee eee ee eee ee eet ce aaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseteccceaesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 40 Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV 0 cccccccceceeeeeeeeccececne aces eee eeee sees a aaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeseesececnceeeeeeeeeeeeetees App 42 Appendix 3 18 REMOTE CSV rie i ainda eter a a ai aiaa T i i aada App 45 Appendix 3 19 ORDERBY O OV a a teas seed A e sea a aa aaan EESE App 47 Appendix 3 20 MULTISELECT CSV a aaa a aa pea aeaaea a a aaa E a reaa nidra nenin i App 48 Appendix 4 Processing TIM secretii ena eea sdccagehidaadageha A NEE E EA lad AREE REE EaR App 50 Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later
122. than the above is selected Blank an with TYPE When TAG is selected with TYPE Blank When DATE is Server time SERVER selected with Unit ti UNIT TYPE nit time When DATESTR is selected with l Character string valid as a date TYPE KJ vaLue Constant value When NUMBER is selected with Numerical value TYPE When STRING is selected with TYPE Any character string When VARIABLE is selected with Variable name TYPE When NONE is selected with TYPE Blank App 37 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 14 ACFIELD CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Kel series Appendix 3 15 ACCONDITION CSV Ww 2 1 File format Bic z Table App 45 File format Ze File name ACCONDITION CSV ar F mE A o File contents Communication action Select Update Delete conditions lt gt Section 7 11 1 5 Select Update z Delete conditions 8 Yn 6 Gal z ITEM g CONDITION1 1 1 Work_NO1 TAG EQUAL 1 1 CONDITION1 2 1 AND NUMBER NUMBER LESSTHAN CONDITION1 3 1 OR____ Work_NO2 Equa a j2 L Item row File format Label column setting area APPENDICES Communication action Communication action Action type Database NewServer x T blenare DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions o TagiType Eoee i Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component aa a a i E K EE INDEX 2 Label Table App 46
123. than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 0 to 23 HOUR Hour l When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 0 to 59 EJ Minute Minute When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank SECOND Fixed value Blank When TIMER is selected with TYPE 1 to 32767 Unit second EJ timer Period l When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 MONITORTAG Tag i When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE is selected with TYPE 1 to 256 MONITORELEMENT Component When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank EQUAL x NOTEQUAL When VALUE lt LESSTHANEQUAL COMPARECONDITION Condition is selected with TYPE gt GREATERTHANEQUAL lt LESSTHAN gt GREATERTHAN When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE Tag HAG COMPARETYPE Tag type is selected with TYPE nstant VALUE When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE is selected with TYPE and TAG is 41064 COMPARETAG Comparison tag selected with COMPARETYPE When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE is selected with TYPE and TAG is Comparison 1 to 256 COMPAREELEMENT selected with COMPARETYPE component value When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Appen
124. the CSV file description Check the setting and correct it if any Did the number of settings exceed the upper limit e Check the number of settings Section 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file Device tag name is not displayed for the setting item by which data are written to a tag All the text is not displayed in a table The text display is truncated 10 33 Is the tag set to data write disabled Isn t the column width narrow 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Set the tag to data write enabled lt 3 Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting e Adjust the column width of the table lt Section 7 3 1 Screen structure 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC LA series 2 System setting gt Section 7 6 System Setting Table 10 11 System setting Symptom Checked item Corrective action Set the tag to data write enabled A desired device tag name is not displayed se XML MESSAGE an FORMAT Is the tag set to data write disabled i ing i i in DB buffering settings g lt gt Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting o Zz e S 3 Access target CPU settings C gt Section 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting 3 a Table 10 12 Access target CPU settings Q E Symptom Checked item Corrective action If it is any item other than the first one change the item or add an item f en e Sin
125. the MES interface module differs depending on the following factors Conduct a verification by user prior to starting the system Operating environment personal computer network and the CompactFlash card e Loading status of the server computer and the network e Sequence scan time e Accessing status from a personal computer terminal display or intelligent function module to the programmable controller CPU e Access from a personal computer by MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and XML processing Settings of the MES interface module For the reference value of the processing time refer to the following L gt Appendix 4 Processing Time 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges This section explains the accessible devices and accessible ranges For inaccessible programmable controller CPUs refer to the following C 3 Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly OVERVIEW 1 Accessible programmable controller CPUs Table 3 3 Accessible programmable controller CPUs PLC series Model QOOJCPU QO0CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJSCPU QOOUCPU QCPU Q mode QO01UCPU QO2UCPU Q03UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q2Z0UDE
126. the jobs of the SQL texts If the resend processing fails the error code OB83h is output to the error log 2 Clearing the DB buffer 1 Selecting the Clear radio button and clicking the Execute button clears all of the SQL texts that are stored in the DB buffer E Point If clear processing is executed during resend processing error code 0B44h may be output lt gt Section 10 2 Error Code List If this error occurs execute the Clear error and turn off the ERR LED lt gt Section 7 13 2 4 Clear error 7 130 7 13 Online Remote operation 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 13 7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering The current and past maximum values of No of trigger buffering data can be viewed it S gt O Trigger buffering status Now Maximum No of bufferings 2 3 6 z Figure 7 106 Trigger buffering status z 2 be as Table 7 91 Item displayed in Trigger buffering status z Description pi E Displays a past maximum value in the 2 No of bufferings 1 Displays th current number a number of buffering data buffered sd hat tle buffering data buffered jobs S jobs fra O 4 The space is displayed as blank during data acquisition or in the case of failure of data acquisition a Point When the number of buffering data is large check the number of jobs and the E sa
127. trigger condition changed from false to true or not is determined at the time of sampling lt Section 7 10 2 6 Value monitoring startup 2 No of times data can be stored in the trigger buffer a The trigger buffering function allows up to 128 pieces of trigger information tag data time to be stored concurrently Note that there are no restrictions on the number of bufferings per job b No of trigger buffer data can be confirmed by the following e No of trigger buffer data Buffer memory address 11511 e Online Remote operation lt gt Section 7 13 Online Remote operation c If a trigger occurs with No of trigger buffer data already reached 128 it is discarded The number of times the trigger buffer data are discarded can be confirmed in the Trigger buffer overflow count area Buffer memory address 11512 3 Clearing the trigger buffer The following clears the contents of the trigger buffer e Update settings _ gt Section 7 13 2 3 Update settings Stop of the MES interface function operation by MES interface function configuration tool Online Remote operation gt Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function e Turning the programmable controller power OFF and ON e Resetting the programmable controller CPU 6 9 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LE series
128. type For details please consult the relational database vendor 10 The redundant relational data base cannot be used 41 The Server Core installation of Windows Server 2008 is not supported Be sure to install a full installation Performance required for personal computer and operating systems Table 2 7 Performance required for personal computer and operating systems Performance required for personal computer Operating system fo 518 Required memory Windows 2000 Professional Pentium 300MHz or more 128 MB or more Windows xP Professional Windows 2000 Server Pentium 550MHz or more 256 MB or more Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Pentium 2GHz or more 2GB or more Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Ultimate Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more Windows Vista Enterprise 2 4 3 Computer for developing XML processing applications This section explains the operating environment of the computer for developing XML processing applications Table 2 8 Operating environment of computer for developing XML processing applications Item Description Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Program development environment Sun Microsystems J2SE v1 4 2 2 13 2 4 Operating Environment 2 4 3 Computer for developing XML processing applications 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number The serial No and function version of the MES i
129. value Enable daylight setting ENABLE DST Daylight saving Disable daylight setting setting When the time is synchronized with DISABLE programmable controller CPU JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL When DST is ENABLE S_MONTH Starting month AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC When DST is DISABLE Blank ao Setting by week WEEK Specification S_TYPE Setting by date DATE method When DST is DISABLE Blank When TYPE is WEEK 1 to 4 LAST S_WEEKNUM Starting week When TYPE is DATE Blank When TYPE is WEEK SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Starting day of S_DAYOFWEEK When TYPE is DATE Blank wee When DST is DISABLE Blank When TYPE is WEEK Blank When MONTH is 1 3 5 7 8 10 or 1 to 31 LAST 12 Kall s_nav Starting da When TYPE S When MONTH is saa DATE 1 to 30 LAST 4 6 9or 11 When MONTH is h 1 to 28 LAST When DST is DISABLE Blank a When DST is ENABLE 00 to 23 S_HOUR Starting time When DST is DISABLE Blank JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL When DST is ENABLE EJ amp _MontH Ending month AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC When DST is DISABLE Blank i Setting by week WEEK Specification KJ c_tyvre Setting by date DATE method When DST is DISABLE Blank When TYPE is WEEK 1 to 4 LAST 2 nding wee en is alo E _WEEkNUM Endi k When TYPE is DATE as an When DST is DISABLE When TYPE is WEEK SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Ending day of
130. value after starting sampling is stored Minimum The minimum value after starting sampling is stored Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the number of times specified by No of samples and an averaged value Moving average 2 is stored Since the processing range moves at each sampling the latest value fi z can be obtained gt 6 Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the number of times specified by No of samples and the maximum Moving maximum 2 value is stored Since the processing range moves at each sampling the latest value is can be obtained Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the lt number of times specified by No of samples and the minimum value x Moving minimum 3 is stored a Since the processing range moves at each sampling the latest value can be obtained 1 Ifa statistical value of Average Maximum or Minimum is reset a value obtained after resetting will be stored 2 z How to reset a statistical value of Average Maximum or Minimum pe Perform substitution of some value for the relevant tag component using Operation action of a job S D 7 Section 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action 7 g a The statistical processing is reset and a value processed after the substitution is stored 2 Statistical values of Moving average Moving maximum and Moving minimum cannot be reset 3 When Movin
131. 0502h 0604h 0607h CPU fault detected APS mismatch Setting file error An error was detected from the CPU of the module mounting station APS of the request packet does not match the one of the response packet The Start I O specified in Access target CPU settings is incorrect Failed to read out the setting file The setting file is corrupted e Check the CPU status of module mounting station e Retry the transmission Correct Access target CPU settings e Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool O60Ah 0610h 0617h Component device error Access target CPU setting error Module stop error The device name specified in the component setting is incorrect Or an invalid device was specified Information on the network communication route set in Access target CPU settings is corrupted Unable to handle the processing due to a module stop error Correct the device specified in the component setting e Initialize the module and then configure the Access target CPU settings again Remove the cause of the module stop error and reset the programmable controller CPU 0618h Setting update time out error Because the load applied to the module is high setting update timed out e Reexecute the setting update e Reset the programmable controller CPU 0619h Device name error The device name specified in Device tag
132. 0600002 SID Session ID GetNext Failed SID Session ID Reset Failed Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient resources SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed e Check if the source IP address belongs to the 0x20600010 x SID Session ID GetNext Failed MES interface module SID Session ID Reset Failed Invalid SQL execution request 0x20600011 Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative explaining a detailed description 0x20600012 of the problem SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed Check if the source IP address belongs to the 0x20600020 SID Session ID GetNext Failed SID Session ID Reset Failed DB Connection Service does not support the SQL instruction to be executed To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 10 28 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service es XML MESSAGE on FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error code Error description and cause Corrective action SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed 2 21 SID Session ID ROLLBA
133. 1 Installation of the CompactFlash card 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series Removal or replacement of the CompactFlash card Before removing or replacing the CompactFlash card be sure to stop file access by the following procedure Removal replacement of a CompactFlash card Is the programmable controller power ON Power ON the programmable controller Disable the read from write to the CompactFlash card by file access stop processing L gt 1 Stopping file access Remove the CompactFlash card LF 3 Removing a CompactFlash card Install a new NO CompactFlash card Install a new CompactFlash card lt gt 2 Installation of the CompactFlash card OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS A e wW ao e a WW Q x a fa Zz LEF B RE E W eo nao NO Operation restarted YES a 25 Turn the power OFF and ON or reset the programmable y z controller CPU to restart the MES interface module Power OFF the programmable controller z a j 2 y Q2 Check that file access is active by the following 22 CompactFlash card status X1 ON File access status X2 OFF 6 _ End Yn rA O E Figure 4 12 Removal or replacement of the Compac
134. 1 Overview of warning messages APPENDICES MEL SEC TA series Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages Point The User Account Control UAC is provided to protect the system from being destroyed e g prevention of start up of a program which will execute an unintended operation Before taking either of the methods described below understand that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and consider the risk The following two methods are available for preventing warning messages 1 Disabling the User Account Control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the User Account Control function Select Start Control Panel Internet Internet Explorer E mail Windows Mail F Welcome Center wW Backup Status and Configuration gt Windows Media Player Small Business Resources By Windows Fax and Scan Windows Meeting Space ic Windows Photo Gallery B Windows Live Messenger Download 4 Y Paint gt AllPrograms E oo Help and Support l To the next page App 59 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES SEE MELSEC LY series From the previous page l w 3 a Select User Accounts 3 F gt Control Panel gt g lt ae Control Panel Home k O EEA System and Maintenance User Accounts mi ap Get started with Windows Add or remove user accounts Bac
135. 1 S o md Enhance sampling efficiency co High sp g X Devices must be connected in series up to 96 points Do not sample Array setting Use array Component setting input A h EZ a A j 10 Ea r ey No of statistical processings in project 0 No of device point fi tag 0 No of tag components in project 0 2 Label Table App 24 Label Label Description Set Device tag settings items No 1 to 64 E 141 to TAG64 Enter only the labels desired to be set Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 8 TAG CSV App 22 APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 25 Setting item MELSEC IA series Item Description Setting value TAGNAME Device tag name 1 2 3 Up to 16 characters f Do not sample NOT SAMPLING Sampling Normal sampling EXECUTE specification High speed sampling 4 HIGHSPEED When NOT is selected with SAMPLING Blank When EXECUTE is selected with 1 to 32767 Unit Second It oec INTERVAL Sampling interval SAMPLING When HIGHSPEED is selected with SAMPLING 1 to 600 Unit x 100 ms Appendix 3 8 TAG CSV BEFORE LOGGING Fixed value NO Prohibit data Disable DISABLE WRITE writing Enable ENABLE Enhance sampling When enabled YES E BLockREAD 7 efficiency When disabled NO
136. 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series c When Insert is selected for Action type Insert generates a new record and inserts an insert value tag component value i z constant value variable into a field of the generated record x 1 Field name Up to 32 characters 3 Set a field name for the field value to be inserted For characters that can be used for field names refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names etc Zz O 2 Tag 7 Select a tag constant or variable which is substituted z0 Le Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable 26 3 Component Select or directly enter a component value or a variable that is to be substituted 2 ie z S Communication action WL O Actiontype Insert Database D81 x Table name ERRORLOG n DB tag link settings n ee esha TagiType Component JA 1 Date Date Server time __ 2 Process_No lt lt Number 3 Work_No lt lt Process Work_No 4 Parameter lt lt Process Parameter lt af lt lt Ww TE lt lt lt lt Zw eee lt lt wW A lt DLO Zz Alar t Delete row x Insert a whole tag Generated SQL text INSERT INTO ERRORLOG Date Process_No Work_No Parameter VALUES CURRENT_TIMESTAMP 1 Process1 Work_ No Process1 Parameter No o
137. 131 1812 to 3999 Use prohibited System area 7144 to FOFH deo Gees A t t CPU setting inf ti 0 R ccess targe setting information FAOn to FA3x 9 2 4004 to 4007 7 Access target CPU error information 0 R FA4 to FA7H Access target 4008 CPU settin Section 9 Access target CPU 1 error code 0 R 3 6 9 FA8x status area Access target The composition of each area is the same as that of the Access target 4009 to 4071 CPU 2 to 64 CPU 1 error code FAQH to FE7n 3 error codes Refer to for the assignment of each area Shows whether or not reading writing is possible R Only reading is possible W Only writing is possible R W Both reading and writing are possible To the next page 3 5 Buffer Memory List 3 21 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 7 Z Q lt Q m O rt a 2 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 3 15 Buffer memory list Address Rosas Initial Reference gt Application 3 Decimal Hex value section 4072 to 11499 FE8 to Use prohibited System area 2CEBh 11500 Time synchronization setting status 0 R 2CECn 0 Synchronize with PLC CPU time 1 Synchronize with SNTP Secti
138. 2 Zw H wo oO nao INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 75 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi aL 26 fel ceries 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not For the DB buffering function setting refer to the following C gt Section 6 1 9 DB buffering function DB Buffering Enable DB buffering r Figure 7 63 DB Buffering Table 7 55 Setting items when selecting DB Buffering Item Description Enable DB buffering Set whether to enable the DB buffering or not Set whether or not to automatically resend data after recovery When the Automatically resend at time of restoration box is checked resend processing is automatically performed after recovery When the Automatically resend at time of restoration box is not checked resend processing is manually performed after recovery Automatically resend at time of restoration T7 76 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LE series 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors job cancellation that occ
139. 2 6 2 Precautions for USING database serrera sae aniani AR RRR TENANE EEE TOER a NR EEA 2 18 A 9 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 to 3 35 3 1 Performance Specifications serisine esheets E E e advange Mach deine eee eee 3 1 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges c ccccecceeceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeeeseeeaeeeeseeaaeeeteaaaees 3 5 aae FUNCIO EIS 3 22 21 kes nck A A edeesawashd Games T tewtvsued A cages cdinteeds sae etesaste 3 10 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeseenaeeeeeeeaas 3 14 341 WO Signal liSt snerru AE EA ACANNA E E A EA ANAA A 3 14 dkenso OPiS aO N AEO 3 16 Jon Buffer Memory Liebana ena a a E E E r 3 19 3 6 Buffer Memory Details neran u eana a a a a a a a a a ar 3 24 36 1 Module status area cut ind sii hai aie ith eth et TEE R aaa 3 24 3 6 2 Network Connection status area occ eeeeeeeeeeeeeene eee eeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeecaeeeeseenaeeeeeeas 3 24 3 6 3 Network settings status area ee cece ceeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseennaneeesaes 3 24 SEA Curent enor area atic cect stsitucde rat eeck a R a a a a A 3 25 36 5 Error log Area sanesiiens iiai a i eria Seek AT E A a a ar 3 26 3 6 6 Sampling monitoring cycle area seesseeeessserrssseirrrssttttrnsstttrrsttttnussttennnssttnnnsatennnnat ennnen 3 28 SO TOSE G enua ea a a a a aT S hdasarte 3 28 3 6 8 Current tag data Value goa mner neri
140. 3 1 3 2 3 5 4 2 4 6 2 5 2 6 1 10 7 7 1 7 8 1 7 9 1 7 10 1 7 11 1 7 11 2 7 12 5 7 13 2 7 13 4 8 1 8 2 8 6 10 2 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 Appendix 3 9 Sections 2 6 2 6 1 2 6 2 Appendix 1 Apr 2007 SH NA 080644ENG C Change of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Sections 2 2 2 5 3 2 7 7 7 7 1 7 8 1 7 11 1 7 12 2 10 2 1 Appendices 2 4 6 Oct 2007 SH NA 080644ENG D DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS PACKING LIST Sections 2 2 2 4 2 2 6 2 3 1 3 3 3 6 10 4 1 6 1 6 6 1 9 7 3 1 7 4 5 7 6 2 7 6 4 7 8 1 7 8 3 7 9 1 7 10 1 to 7 10 3 7 10 5 7 11 1 7 11 2 7 12 5 8 5 8 8 1 8 8 2 10 2 1 Appendices 1 1 3 1 3 2 3 8 3 10 3 13 3 15 3 16 Addition Sections 6 3 2 7 8 2 Appendices 1 2 3 5 3 19 3 20 Oct 2007 SH NA 080644ENG E Gorrection Sections 3 3 7 8 7 11 1 7 12 5 Appendices 3 8 3 20 Jan 2008 SH NA 080644ENG F Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS Sections 1 1 2 2 to 2 4 2 6 2 3 1 3 2 4 4 1 4 7 1 Chapter 5 Sections 6 1 9 6 1 10 7 2 7 3 1 7 3 4 7 5 to 7 11 7 12 5 7 13 4 8 1 to 8 3 8 5 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 3 3 3 4 3 6 to 3 13 Addition Appendix 7 Chenge of section No Appendix 7 Appendix 8 Sep 2008 SH NA 080644ENG G Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC A
141. 3 Setting items in Component setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC TA series 9 Precautions on Component setting If a wrong device number is set for a component in Component setting an error will occur on another component that has the same access target CPU setting Correct the device number in Component setting OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 8 Device Tag Setting T7 49 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Q series 7 9 Server Service Setting Configure the settings for access to a server computer The set server service name is used in Job settings Q Double clicking Server service settings in the Edit items tree displays relevant items 2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed setting edit screen area Make the setting referring to the following descriptions New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit Yiew Online Help OSs ERa g AmE S NewProject K System setting Server service name NewServer Access target CPU settings Device tag settings Server service settings orem Job se
142. 46 to 149 92h to 95x 150 96x 151 97H 152 98x 153 99x 154 to 157 9An to 9Dx 158 to 163 Q9Ex to A31 164 to 169 A4H to A9u 170 to 175 AAn to AFx 176 to 181 BOH to B54 182 to 187 Error log 6 Same as Error log 1 B6x to BBu Section eea Error log area 365 Error log 7 Same as Error log 1 BCH to C11 194 to 199 C24 to C71 200to 205 C8x to CDH 206 to 211 CEH to D31 212 to 217 D4 to D9x 218 to 223 DAu to DF 224 to 229 E0u to E5x 2300 235 E6x to EB 236 to 241 EC to F11 242 to 247 F2u to F71 Error code 0 R Time 0 R Use prohibited System area _ Error count 0 R Error log write pointer 0 R Error code 0 R Error log 1 System area Time 0 R Error log 2 Same as Error log 1 Error log 3 Same as Error log 1 Error log 4 Same as Error log 1 Error log 5 Same as Error log 1 Error log 8 Same as Error log 1 Error log 9 Same as Error log 1 Error log 10 Same as Error log 1 Error log 11 Same as Error log 1 Error log 12 Same as Error log 1 Error log 13 Same as Error log 1 Error log 14 Same as Error log 1 Error log 15 Same as Error log 1 Error log 16 Same as Error log 1 Shows whether or not reading writing is possible R Only reading is possible W Only writing is possible R W Both reading and writing are possible To the
143. 88h System error Message transmission error OB89h Message transmission timeout An Ethernet communication error has occurred e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct Check if the ODBC setting is correct OB8Ah System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OB8Bh Message reception error OB8Ch Message reception timeout An Ethernet communication error has occurred Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct Check if the ODBC setting is correct Check if the database has been restarted or not When the database is Microsoft Access 2000 2003 2007 e Check if 128 or more fields are set in Update actions e Check the sent SQL text and the database contents e Check if the table and field settings are correct Check if the uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated or not Check if multiple accesses have been made to one file at the same time accesses from multiple MES interface modules e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct Check if the ODBC setting is correct OB8Dh to OB90h System error 10 2 Error Co
144. A det AAEN EAEE R E acest 7 2 T32 IMOMUCONTIQUPATIONE 2i 5 oft acts ranen ag aaa tac ain este ech d ec Oe eee ean 7 4 3 3 Toolbar Configuration sienes ri de ceded anc dec waded ae czas Lec E EA A a ban EE caeevel 7 6 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 0 cece eee enne ee eee entrees ee taaeee eee taeeeeeesaeeeeeenaeeeees 7 7 4 Project File Handling esec a a dined Aiea 7 9 7 4 1 Creating a new proj t nnessiriicrii ieii eei iaia a aeiia aeaa NAAA iN Saada aa aii 7 9 LAZ Opening a projette air eA r E A AAT AE tee ea bere 7 9 TAS SWNT A PEC nar R AA A O A 7 10 FAAS oponga poeet iie E E A EE AAE Ee 7 11 RES mponing a ECS VIE sra ror aa r E TT E E ie E O AS 7 13 FAG Exporting a CSV flessioni ienai ani AINEA aceve AATE AAAA i TAREA ade ceed ee deve 7 16 7 4 7 Printing a setting information file 0 0 cece ee eeeeee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeenenaeees 7 16 Edie Proe SSMING eaa siecteded otheaelaads ties chdediccstiael opdecatandncdbestded steed ceetatdad sheet 7 17 PO System Sende aun aria AA A EETA EAA EEA E AA nee AAEE ARA 7 18 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting asssssesessnnesesrsnessssnnessnnnnestnnnneesrnnnesstnnnaaetananestinnanntnnnnaetennat 7 19 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaees 7 20 7 6 3 Setting items in Account Setting 2 2 eresian nirre eiA AEAEE ARARE EEEE R E NRE 7 24 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffe
145. A series From the previous page Table 10 5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Corrective action 401 Error description and cause The computer ran out of memory when initializing the access log file 402 The computer ran out of resources when initializing the access log file Terminate any unnecessary applications Add more memory to the personal computer 403 404 405 406 The full path name of the access log file is too long The access log file could not be opened The log could not be written to the access log file Failed to delete an old access log file Shorten the path to the access log file with DB Connection Service Setting Tool e If no directory exists for storing the access log file create it When the attribution of the access log file is set to read only cancel the setting If read write is disabled for the access log file enable it in the security setting When the access log file name represents a directory rename or delete the directory When the access log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault When the disk space is full ensure a free disk space When the access log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault When the attribution of the oldest access log
146. A1SCPUC24 R2 A2CCPUC24 and A2CCPUC24 PRF Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Windows Vista A 18 Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System To the next page Generic term abbreviation From the previous page Description Windows XP Computer link module Serial communication module Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Generic term for the UC24 QC24 N and Q series C24 Especially when referring to the QC24 N and Q series C24 they are written as Serial communication module Personal computer Abbreviation for the IBM PC AT compatible personal computer A 19 DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS The following table shows the definitions and descriptions of the terms used in this manual Term Description Abbreviation for Comma Separated Values oy Text file in which the data are aligned and set off by commas and double quotations DB buffering Function temporarily stores SQL text that failed to be sent due to a communication error and resends the text when the communications have been recovered Abbreviation for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP Protocol to exch
147. AND OPERATION Sampling interval False Trigger 2 Timing of Specified time period startup True f i i i i i i A i i i False 1 E H 1 H H Fixed cycle INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Combined by AND FUNCTIONS Timing when AND is used j i i Startup point True False im 3 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO Figure 7 53 Job startup points when Value monitoring startup and Specified time period startup are combined DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T7 65 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 66 MELSEC Kel series 7 At module startup The job is activated only once when the MES interface module is started up 8 Handshake operation a The job is activated when Handshake startup of the programmable controller CPU turns ON Upon completion of the job execution Completion notification of the programmable controller CPU turns ON Handshake operation is a startup method by which completion of job execution can be notified to a programmable controller CPU lt gt Sampling interval Programmable conitr ller Handshake operation started CPU operation gt Handshake startup r 2 eet i O oFF Completion notification ai OFF Handshake operation
148. Account User name 1 to 20 characters Password 8 to 14 characters Confirm password Figure 7 24 Add Account dialog box Table 7 25 Setting items in the Add Account dialog box Item Description Enter a user name 1 to 20 characters Case sensitive For characters that can be used for user names refer to the User name following lt 3 Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Enter a password 8 to 14 characters Case sensitive For characters that can be used for passwords refer to the following Password Confirm password i lt gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 7 6 System Setting 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 2 Modifying an account is Selecting an account and clicking the Edit button displays the Edit Account ee dialog box 35 Set the following items and click the OK_ button Zz fej Edit Account B pg User name 1 to 20 characters QJ71ME596 fi z Password 8 to 14 characters RRR gt 6 Confirm password Seer Figure 7 25 Edit Account dialog box z z o i O Table 7 26 Setting items in the Edit Account dialog box a Item Description Enter a user name 1 to 20 characters Case sensitive For characters that can be used for user names refer to the
149. B CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number 2 16 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA series 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration This section describes precautions for system configuration 2 6 1 Precautions for using Redundant CPU The following describes the precautions for using the Redundant CPU 1 Mountable base unit When using the MES interface module in a redundant system be sure to mount the MES interface module to the extension base unit for CPU or redundant power supply The MES interface module cannot be mounted to the main base unit in a redundant system 2 Access target CPU setting e When the MES interface module is mounted to the Redundant CPU it can access the CPU of host station only It cannot access the CPU of other station When the MES interface module is mounted to other than the Redundant CPU it cannot access the Redundant CPU of other station 3 Device Tag setting e When a system switching occurs to the Redundant CPU collection of device tag may stop for about 15 seconds e When selecting High speed sampling from Sampling settings of Device Tag setting be sure to create system area for the user setting to the Redundant CPU of both systems in the same capacity C7 Section 7 8 1 REMARKS 1 Creating a user specified system area R xor Job setting When accessing the Redundant CPU it is recommended to select
150. B buffer became full the data could not be stored in the DB buffer e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Check the network status e Ensure a DB buffering capacity OB3Ch OB3Dh System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OB3Eh DB buffering error Failed in file operation during DB buffering operation Check the CompactFlash card If the CompactFlash card is damaged replace it OB3Fh 0B40h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0B41h DB buffer read error Data in the DB buffer could not be read normally 0B42h DB buffer clear error Failed to clear the DB buffer 0B43h DB buffer read error Data in the DB buffer could not be read normally Check the CompactFlash card If the CompactFlash card is damaged replace it 0B44h DB buffer empty error The DB buffer is empty Do not clear the DB buffer during resending of DB buffered data e Check the CompactFlash card e If the CompactFlash card is damaged replace it 0B45h DB buffer content error Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid e Check the CompactFlash card If the CompactFlash card is damaged replace it OB46h 0B47h System error e Plea
151. B buffering status RECORDSIZE INo of DB bufferings FULL DB buffer full EJ userate DB buffer utilization RESENDING Resend DB bufer request EJ carne Clear DB buffer request 3 Setting item Table App 16 Setting item itom Description Setting value When set 1t064 TAG Tag When not set Blank When set 1 to 256 E ctement Component When the TAG is blank Blank When not set Blank Shows setting item name il Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 12 e Appendix 2 5 DBBUF CSV and a condition in entering a setting value Figure App 2 How to see the setting intormation tile formats a Setting values 1 Setting values in Example YES Enter alphabetic characters in uppercase 2 Blank Unnecessary to enter setting values 3 Settings other than 1 and 2 above Enter any value according to the setting range for the setting value column App 11 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 3 SYSTEM CSV Lu fo 3 1 File format P am Table App 10 File format Ze Item Description File name SYSTEM CSV e System setting Network settings gt Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting 2 a File contents System setting Time synchronization setting gt Section 7 6 2
152. B1 RECIPEDATA Work_No gt gt Process2 Work_No RECIPE_A gt gt Process2 RECIPE_A RECIPE 5 Delete DB1 CompletionReport 6 Operation CompletionRate lt lt Process1 Completed 1000 CompletionRate lt lt CompletionRate 100 Add Communication action zi BS Communication action Communication action APPENDICES INDEX Substitution tag Component Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Component 1f izl lt lt lt lt lt lt Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 13 ACTION CSV Action type Database NewServer x Table name J DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions oH a TaaiType Somponenc Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component 2 gt gt App 34 APPENDICES 2 Label Table App 40 Label a6 Q series Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 ACTION1 1 to ACTION64 10 ACTION64 10 t Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 3 Setting item Table App 41 Setting item Item Description Setting value Select SELECT Update UPDATE Insert INSERT TYPE Action type MultiSelect MULTISELECT Delete DELETE Operation OPERATION When other than OPERATION is 41692 selected for TYPE DB Database When OPERATION is selected for Blank TYPE When other
153. CK Failed 0206000 SID Session ID GetNext Failed Sa tdatab i nis A n servic SID Session ID Reset Failed ota correct database Ype in Perver service oy settings of MES Interface Function Failed in preparation before SQL execution Configuration Tool SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed eer noun SID Session ID COMMIT Failed Select Job settings Communication action in n ID SSRA Pie MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed i i set a correct table name 0x20600022 1 SID Session ID GetNext Failed SID Session ID Reset Failed Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record that is to be obtained by the SQL execution Set a correct database type in Server service tti f MES Interface Functi SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed sence hot EPA ER Configuration Tool SID Session ID COMMIT Failed f T Select Job settings Communication action in A SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed i 0x20600023 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and SID Session ID GetNext Failed set a correct table name field names and SID Session ID Reset Failed o ete i Select Update Delete conditions Failed in SQL execution Also set a correct data type for the data entered in the fields Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20600024 System error representative explaining a detailed descri
154. CPU module it does not function normally b When mounting to remote I O station of MELSECNET H The MES interface module cannot be mounted to remote I O station of the MELSECNET H Mount the MES interface module to a CPU module of the master station 2 Application to multiple CPU system When using the MES interface module in multiple CPU system refer to the following manual 7 QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System The MES interface module is compatible with the multiple CPU system with function version B from the first product 3 Compatible software packages The following table shows the systems where the MES interface module can be used and the compatible software packages Note that GX Developer is inaccessible to a programmable controller CPU via the MES interface module Table 2 2 Compatible software packages Item Software version Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Single CPU system GX Developer MX MESInterface Version 7 or later Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Version 4 or later Version 6 or later Version 8 68W or Version 1 00A or later Version 1 04E or Q02PH QO6PHCPU Multiple CPU system later later Single CPU system Version 7 10L or Q12PH Q25PHCPU Multiple CPU system later Version 1 00A or Version 8 45X or later Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system lat ater Single CPU sy
155. CTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Q series 7 3 Screen Structure This section explains the screen structure of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 7 3 1 Screen structure Toolbar Section 7 3 3 Toolbar configuration Edit items tree L Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree New MES interface function configuration tool DOR Menu gt Section 7 3 2 Menu configuration G ser settings Job settings Detailed setting edit screen Status bar Figure 7 1 Screen structure T7 2 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 1 Screen structure MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC TE eries Remark Sooo ooo ooo z When a text takes up too much space and all characters are not displayed per x form the following w e Resize the column of the table Drag the right border of the column to the desired width z Communication action i Action type update xl Database oe xl Table name CompletionReport 2 DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions m 2 Rejected lt lt Processi Rejected 3 _ _3 Date lt lt Date Server time 4 lt lt Figure 7 2 Before resizing the column no Zz O Communication action 3 i Action type z Database os x Table name CompletionReport T DB tag link settings
156. Communication action or Operation action dialog box is displayed Make the setting referring to the following lt Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action e Section 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action Deleting an action e Select an action to be deleted in Action list and click the Delete button Copying an action e Select an action to be copied in Action list choose Replicate the selected action from the combo box next to the Add button and click the Add button 7 78 7 11 Job Setting Actions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series Copying an action of another job within the project Q Select Replicate actions of other jobs in the combo box next to the Add button 2 W and click the tton gt Add butto 7 e 2 The Replicate Actions of other Jobs dialog box is displayed Replicate Actions of other Jobs Source Jobs Source Actions Selected Actions to replicate Type Summary Job name Type Summary E Update DB CompletionReportHComplet CompletionReport Update DB CompletionReportHComplet z o UT 26 HO no Zz O z o iL O W A N ar Zw Sana n Irz No of fields in project 8 Tag component data length in job 3 words total n50 e Figure 7 65 Replicate Actions of other Jobs dialog box ES w A nao By repeating the following steps replicate set cop
157. D The job starts when the trigger conditions Job settings g naa kela e Be Tre E 5 Bow 0b Trogert sable SCSY 5 a N Trigger 2 Disable 5 O Actions 9 T Type Summary lt EE n0 An 7 Foe nao Add Communication action x sls Q Program execution DB Buffering A A Before actions Setting I Enable DB buffering z 2 After actions p Setting of y z S lt T Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution 2 D z FER ay shea Gabi Ez Tag Component Substitute value aS 25 No of fields in project No of fields in job 0 Tag component data length in job 0 words total Figure 7 42 Job settings Point 1 How to add delete copy or move an item For information on how to add delete copy or move an item refer to the following C Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 2 When an item is added or copied a New job item is added FUNCTIONS a a fe o eA o9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 55 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting Up to 64 items can be set in Job settings within one project For job operations refer to the following L gt Section 6 1 10 1 Operation behavior of jobs Job name Trigger conditions Combination Disable MA Trigger 1 Trigg
158. E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U Sampling interval Figure 7 50 Job startup points when Value monitoring startup is selected DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 63 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series b When Value monitoring startup is selected specify conditions for comparison Trigger 1 Value monitoring startup BA Tag j Component Condition Tag Type Component Figure 7 51 Value monitoring startup 1 Tag Component Select a tag component to be compared with Note that tags with Arrat setting are not selectable 2 Condition Select a condition for comparison Table 7 48 Selection items for Condition Item Description The tag component value is equal to the condition value The tag component value is not equal to the condition value The tag component value is equal to or greater than the condition value Not selectable when Data type of the tag component is Bit or String The tag component value is greater than the condition value Not selectable when Data type of the tag component is Bit or String The tag component value is smaller than the condition value IV A W Not selectable when Data type of the tag component is Bit or String The tag component value is equal to or smaller than the condition value IA
159. E2 RECIPES FROM RECIPEDATA WHERE Work_No Process1 Work No No of fields in project 20 Tag component data length in job 20 words total Figure 7 68 Setting example of Select FUNCTIONS Database DB1 Table name RecipeData Work_No RECIPE1 RECIPE2 RECIPE3 536 32 Matched Tag component Selected Selected Selected 7 11 Job Setting Actions Process1 Work_No Process1 RECIPE1 Process1 RECIPE2 Process1 RECIPE3 536 5 32 1 z Figure 7 69 Operation example of Select Bae ute Zwo ZOz O SF Bele ann T 85 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action m 5 a im Z n w l Q ie z O 65 O oL 56 mS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSECTE eries b When Update is selected for Action type Update substitutes a substitute value tag component value variable for a field value of the record whose conditions are met Set conditions of the record to be updated in Select Update Delete conditions 3 gt 5 Select Update Delete conditions 1 Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name for the field value to be updated For characters that can be used for field names refer to the following lt gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names etc 2 Tag Select a tag constant or variable which is substitu
160. EC A series XML MESSAGE FORMAT 1 Send destination URL 2 x x When the basic authentication information and the XML request message for a function are sent to the URL below with the HTTP POST method the function is executed and the XML response message is returned by HTTP TROUBLESHOOTING http MES interface module IP address MESXML CGI HTTP basic authentication Accessing the URL shown in 1 requires HTTP basic authentication of the MES interface module The HTTP basic authentication uses the account information set with Account setting APPENDICES L7 Section 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting URL encoding To use HTTP it is necessary to use URL encoding to convert special characters in the XML request message Escape The following shows the URL encoding rules and an example of URL encoding application INDEX a URL encoding rules Table 9 4 URL encoding rules Characters before conversion Character string after conversion A Z a z 0 9 _ Same not converted Space Plus sign Others 2 digit hexadecimal character code b URL encoding application example Table 9 5 URL encoding application example Characters before conversion Character string after conversion 25 amp 26 2B 3D 3F 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method 9 4 9 2 1 XML message format sending method Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT
161. EJ 4 The Create New Data Source dialog box is 2 Sone te ees displayed then select Oracle in OraHome92 z ODBC for Oracle Microsoft Paradox Driver db 8 Microsoft Paradox Treiber db nm Microsoft Text Driver txt csv A Microsoft Text Treiber txt csv N Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Microsoft Visual FoxPro Treiber Oracle in OraHomes2 SQL Server of WwW cue Oracle ODBC Driver Configuration The Oracle ODBC Driver Configuration dialog TA a box is displayed then set the following Description eee oe e Data source name SAMPLEDS TNS Service Name SAMPLETNS Application Oracle Workarounds SQLServer Migration Translation Options Enable Result Sets M Enable Query Timeout V Read Only Connection I Enable Closing Cursors Enable Thread Safety 7 SOLGetData Extensions I Batch Autocommit Mode Commi only if all statements succeed INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Oracle ODBC Driver Connect O Clicking the Connection test button displays the Service Name Oracle ODBC Driver Connect dialog box Enter See the user name and password then click the o User Name O OK button 5 Password 5 Q O ey uw 5 If the connection is normal the confirmation dialog lt 5 Testing Connection x box appears ti 2 zkt Connection successful p 2 z ZrO Click the OK button in the Oracle ODBC Driver Configu
162. ELSEC IA series Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0001h System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Correct Access target CPU settings No response has been received from n 0002h Response time out error e Check the communication cable the other station status and access target CPU status 0041h Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative explaining a detailed 0044h description of the problem A processing code that is not e Check the CPU s on the access 0045h Processing code error supported was issued route 0046h Station No specification The specified station number is e Check the station number setting in error incorrect Access target CPU settings e Check the CPU s on the access 0047h Receive data error Data have not been received route 0048h EnA PI It local Mitsubishi 004Dh lease consy your oca itsu S i 004Eh System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0050h 0051h The RUN write setting of the Ethernet Check the Ethernet module setting 0055h Channel No error oo module is disabled of the access target CPU e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0064h System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set r
163. ELSEC Le series 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function Manipulate the operation status of the MES interface function a Module operation Stop C Restart Clear error 6 Figure 7 101 Operation z o BE 1 Stop 26 Q Selecting the Stop radio button and clicking the Execute button stops the operation of the MES interface function no z fe Point k 1 The following operation also stops the operation of the MES interface G function amp Click Stop 2 If some job is being executed the job is canceled O lt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation Zu nNDO oak nao 2 Restart Q Selecting the Restart radio button and clicking the Execute button restarts the operation of the stopped MES interface function INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION E Point The following operation also restarts the operation of the stopped MES interface function Click Restart FUNCTIONS j rar fa fe o eA o9 E ra E z E EZO 25 6 sro z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 13 Online Remote operation T 125 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 126 MELSEC IA series 3 Update settings D After writing the MES interface function set
164. ENTS5 1 to COMPONENT5 10 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 24 Appendix 3 9 COMPONENT CSV APPENDICES MELSEC IA series 3 Setting item Table App 28 Setting item Item Description Setting value COMPNAME Component name 1 2 Up to 16 characters 3 1 to 64 However only one high speed CPUNO CPU name j sampling tag allowed Single precision SINGLE Double precision DOUBLE Floati int REAL DATATYPE Data type PATO PON REAL Bit BIT Character string The number shows STRING1 to STRING32 the number of characters DEVICE Head device 4 Head device FORMAT Fixed value DEC DECIMAL PLACES Fixed value 0 OPERATOR Fixed value NONE OPERAND Fixed value Blank Perform When enabled ENABLE 6 STATISTICS statistical j When disabled DISABLE processing When DISABLE is selected i Blank with STATISTICS Average AVERAGE STATTYPE Statistical t When ENABLE Maximum MAXIMUM e atsticaltype When ENABLE yinimum MINIMUM is selected with ovi MOVINGAVERAGE STATISTICS ee Moving maximum MOVINGMAXIMUM Moving minimum MOVINGMINIMUM When DISABLE is selected Blank with STATISTICS Average Blank Maximum Blank E STATSIZE No of samples When ENABLE j Minimum Blank is selected with Movi TEET STATISTICS oving average o Moving maximum 2 to 20 Moving m
165. ES interface module is operating Failed in one shot execution of the job Check CompactFlash card status 0x41173101 Job execution error which is requested by the XML X1 and File access status X2 processing function e Execute the job after starting the module and sampling tag data Section 3 6 7 2 Sampling information Buffer memory address 1004 to 1007 0x41173103 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative explaining a detailed 0x41173105 10 2 Error Code List description of the problem 10 32 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response messages CA J XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom MELSEC IA series 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 1 Common to all settings Symptom Unable to connect MES Interface Function Configuration Tool to the MES interface module MES Interface Function Configuration Tool will not start Unable to import a project file Table 10 10 Common to all settings Checked item Is there any disconnection in the connection route Corrective action Connect the cables properly Is the IP address setting correct e Correct the IP address setting
166. ETTING TOOL 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC IA series CHAPTER 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL This section explains DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions Installing DB Connection Service on the server computer allows to use the MES interface function of the MES interface module The following shows the functions of the DB Connection Service Point 1 It is necessary to install DB Connection Service on all the database server computers and application server computers to be accessed from the MES interface module 2 When using DB Connection Service on the database server computer the ODBC setting for the database to be used must be set beforehand gt Section 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 3 When using DB Connection Service on the application server computer an account for user program execution must be created beforehand 4 Changes to the DB Connection Service settings are made with DB Connection Service Setting Tool gt Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 1 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC A series 1 ODBC connection function The OBDC connection function connects the MES interface module and the ODBC interface for database The following shows operation on the database server computer Databas
167. EX Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface App 4 Appendix 1 2 Operations of former versions APPENDICES MELSEC IA series Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables Appendix 2 1 ASCII code table Table App 2 ASCII code table i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o o SP P p Ew 1 A Q a q 2 s 2 B R b r 3 C S c s 4 4 D T d t 5 5 E U e u 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 G W g w a Bi 8 H xX h x 9 9 Y i y A J Z j z B K k ee ee D M m Ee l gt Px gt fal oF O z o App 5 Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables Appendix 2 1 ASCII code table APPENDICES M ELS 26 Q series Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc u qL Be 1 ASCII characters a8 The shaded sections can be used However neither a number nor an underscore _ can be used as the first character g Table App 3 ASCII characters 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BH o SP o0 P p 3 rents 1 A Q a q z 2 g 2 B R b r 3 S c s 4 4 D T d t EN 5 E U e u o 6 amp 6 F V f v 2 7 G w g w i T 8 8 H X h x lt EF 9 l Y i y pA a E E i E ES a E a E gt N i n in F O o S 2 Reserved terms
168. Enter a server service name The set server service name is used in Job settings For characters that can be used for server service names refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc Note that using the name same as the one of the tag set in Device tag settings is not allowed Server type a Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed Table 7 40 Options of Server type Item Description Database server Used in Communication action of Job settings Application server Used in Program execution of Job settings b When Database server is selected set the following items Table 7 41 Items set for Database server Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed For characters that can be used for data source names refer to the Data source name following lt 3 Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc Select the type of the database server e Oracle 8i Oracle 9i Oracle 10g 11g Database type e SQL Server 2000 2005 2008 MSDE 2000 e Access 2000 e Access 2003 2007 e Wonderware Historian IndustrialSQL Server IP address Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection Service is installed Port No Range 1024 to 65535 Default 5112 Set a port number of the server computer 2 1 Set the same value in Port
169. FF Completed ON Failed B When the test is completed normally set the Mode setting to Online with Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer and reset the programmable controller CPU Switch 1 0000h When the test is completed abnormally check to see if switch setting is correctly set and performs the hardware test again If an error occurs again a possible cause is the hardware error of the MES interface module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 4 6 Self diagnostics Test 4 6 2 Hardware test 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 7 1 Precautions for using a CompactFlash card OVERVIEW This section explains the precautions for using the CompactFlash card 1 When removing or replacing the CompactFlash card a Be sure to stop file access before removing or replacing the CompactFlash card c Section 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b Not doing so may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash card being accessed or a file system error c If an error occurs in the CompactFlash card restore the card S CompactFlash card diagnostic time The MES interface module diagnoses such as file restoration the installed CompactFlash card when SPECIFICATIONS A 1 Powering ON the programmable controll
170. FF when the CompactFlash card is not installed or the file access status X2 is ON X2 File access status 1 Turns ON while file access is stopped a The following operations are available while file access is stopped Removing and installing a CompactFlash card lt 3 Section 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card Powering OFF the programmable controller during operation without battery L gt Section 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery b While file access is stopped the following status occurs Reading from or writing to a CompactFlash card is disabled The MES interface function is suspended Operation from MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is disabled 2 Turns OFF during file access operation Powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU brings file access in operation File access stop request Y2 In operation During sto File access status X2 SISIE Information linkage status X5 CompactFlash card status X1 V Replace the CompactFlash card Power OFF the programmable controller X4 Network connection status 1 Turns ON when the MES interface module is connected to the network 2 When powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU the MES interface module connects with the network 3 16 To the next page 3 4 I O Si
171. File name CONDITION CSV File contents Job settings Trigger conditions lt 5 Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions File format ITEM TYPE YEAR MONTH DAY WEEK HOUR MINUTE CONDITION1 1 SCHEDULING 3117 f3o CONDITION1 2 NONE _ f J C T T by CONDITION2 1 TIMER J J T T J CONDITION2 2 VALUE d m SECOND TIMER MONITORTAG MONITORELEMENT COMPARECONDITION HANDSHAKESTARTTAG HANDSHAKESTARTELEMENT HANDSHAKEENDTAG are eee 3 poy HANDSHAKEENDELEMENT Item row Label column setting area To the next page Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 30 Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Kel series From the previous page Table App 35 File format Item Description Job settings Trigger conditions Combination EJ The job starts when the trigger conditions changes from false to true H gt Trigger 1 Disable zi 4 Trigger 2 Disable j i em Year Month Day 3 Hour _ Minute 17 30 B gt Day M Mon M Tue M Wen M Thu Fri T Sat Sun File format Continued Trigger 1 Specified time period startup EZ 10 seconds Trigger 1 value mor Tag afi Component T Condition TagiType il Component a Process Temperatur
172. For Eou oa O S A 5 52 zg 25 ez CompactFlash card Figure 6 10 DB buffering function o Zz O O Z 5 Le Point 1 To automatically send SQL texts after recovery irrespective of transmission sequence select the auto resend processing L gt 5 c Automatically resending data after recovery 2 To send SQL texts after recovery without changing the transmission sequence select the manual resend processing C gt 5 d Manually resending data MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 12 6 1 9 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS 6 13 MELSEC IA series 2 Factors for starting DB buffering DB buffering is conducted when SQL texts cannot be sent to the database by any of the following causes a or b a Disconnection on the network or failure of the database server computer Upon detection of a connection timeout DB buffering is started K gt 7 When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database Time for detecting connection timeout is set to 10 seconds by default KL Section 7 9 1 8 Connection timeout Range 1 to 180 seconds Default 10 seconds Even if a trigger condition is met again during connection timeout detection the corresponding job is not executed K7 Section 6 1 10 1 Operation behavior of jobs b Failure of the database software Upon detection of DB access timeout DB bufferi
173. HCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ZASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 no Zz QnACPU e n Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU S va QCPU A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A QO6HCPU A G A1NCPU AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJHCPU A2CCPU A2CJCPU A2NCPU i ACPU A2NCPU S1 A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 A3NCPU A3ACPU A3UCPU A4UCPU 4 Cannot access the Redundant CPU of other station SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 2 Accessible routes a Single network MES interface module Network 2 to 7 Network 1 Relay Relay Network 8 Access target CPU station station Sy Pi See Network communication route Network indicates CC IE Cont NET 10 H or Ethernet The relay stations are assumed as the QCPU Figure 3 1 Single network Table 3 4 Single network Network communication Access target CPU PLC series CC IE Cont NET 10 H O O O O Accessible x Inaccessible MES interface module C24 multidrop 1 a gt CC Link Network communication route Figure 3 2 Single network Table 3 5 Single network Network communicat
174. HOO uae Zuo H aaa 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 16 6 1 9 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series c Automatically resending data after recovery Start vy Execution of the job with Auto resend setting is started 1 The job with Auto resend setting is sent to the database without being buffered 1 y In the order of storing the jobs data in the DB buffer the accumulated data of the jobs with Auto resend setting are sent again 1 2 Yes Is there any job for which Manual resend is selected Job with Manual resend setting will not be sent even after recovery L gt 5 d Manually resending data 1 Automatically resends job data after recovery The numbers 1 to 3 correspond to those shown in the above Job settings Auto resend area in DB buffer Job 1 Auto Job3 SQL TEXT Auto Job 10_SQL TEXT Auto Job 2 Auto Job 3_SQL TEXT Auto Job 3 Auto Job 1_SQL TEXT Auto Job 4 Manual Job 2_SQL TEXT Auto Job 5 Manual Job 6 Manual Job 2 SQL TEXT Auto 2 Manual resend area in DB buffer 3 Job 6_ SQL TEXT Manual Job 4 SQL TEXT Manual Job 5 SQL TEXT Manual Job 10 Auto 1 Figure 6 14 Automatically resending data after recovery 6 17 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 9 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series
175. ID Session ID DB Connect Data source Terminate any unnecessary applications MES interface module 1 User Failed 0x20400020 ser ailed Add more memory to the personal computer Failed to create a DB handle Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20400021 System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Set correct data source name user name and password in Server service settings of MES Interfi Function Confi tion Tool SID Session ID DB Connect Data source eee a oe ser ane ah si Daroma User Failed To use a 64 bit version operating system for the 2 are server type the following at the command Failed in DB connection prompt to start the ODBC Data Source Administrator SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe 0x20400023 0x20500011 oe 0x20500012 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi en System error representative explaining a detailed description i of the problem o 0x20500022 SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed 0x20600001 SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed x SID Session ID GetNext Failed SID Session ID Reset Failed Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory NEKIN SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed e Terminate any unnecessary applications gt i e COMMIT ate Add more memory to the personal computer ession ID Faile SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed 0x2
176. INSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series 2 Starting the MES interface module Point Start the server computer and then the MES interface module lt 1 Starting the server computer Procedure to operation p i MES interface module 1 Configuration computer Install MES Interface Function Configuration Tool LF Section 5 1 Installation v Mount a battery to the MES interface module 2 y Mount the MES interface module to a base unit b d Connect the MES interface module to the configuration computer on a 1 1 basis 3 Section 2 1 3 System configuration for initial setup Power ON the programmable controller RUN LED is turned ON and ERR LED flashes on the MES interface module Install a CompactFlash card to the MES interface module 4 Start MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Confirm the outline of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool cE Section 7 2 Starting the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Section 7 3 Screen Structure e Section 7 4 Project File Handling Section 7 5 Project Setting Format the CompactFlash card lt gt Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card Select System setting and make Network settings
177. If this is clicked the device range of the next array is displayed in Device n of Component List button When the device range of the last array is already displayed this button cannot be clicked If this is clicked the device range of the last array is displayed in Device n of Component List button When the device range of the last array is already displayed this button cannot be clicked Array block size T 44 f button 4 button 7 8 Device Tag Setting Selecting a component in Component List and clicking the T button reverses the order between the selected component and the one immediately above it The t button cannot be clicked on the first component Selecting a component in Component List and clicking the button reverses the order between the selected component and the one immediately below it The ES button cannot be clicked on the last component Make setting when changing the block size manually 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 1 MELSEC LA series Component name Up to 16 characters Enter a component name For characters that can be used for component names refer to the following K gt Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc CPU name Select one from a list of the access target CPU names set in Access target CPU settings If High speed
178. If you started this action continue User Accounts Control Panel Microsoft Windows desis continue __cancet_ User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer l To the next page Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R App 60 Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES MELSEG TA series From the previous page oon nomad Deselect Turn on User Account Control UAC to 8 User Accounts Turn User Account Control On or Off v 44 Search 2 m make your computer more secure Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure User Account Control UAC can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer We recommend that you leave UAC tumed on to help protect your computer E Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer l End App 61 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES LE MELSEC LY series 2 Method for permitting programs without any warning message The following shows a procedure for permitting programs without any warning message XML MESSAGE FORMAT Select Start Control Panel a F Welcome Center Li Backup Status and Configuration gt Windows Media Player Documents Pictures a Small Business Resources Items TROUBLESHOOTING ss Windows Fax and Scan e
179. MESInterface A The access target CPU setting NewCPU that you are trying to delete is used in the Following setting It cannot be deleted Device tag setting NewTag Component Component Job settings NewJob Action No 1 2 O 5 Figure 7 109 Error dialog box g n 2 Changing PLC series in Access target CPU settings The CPU type set for PLC series of Access target CPU settings cannot be changed if the change may generate illegal character strings of the devices for the tag 9 2 Lu components for which Access target CPU settings is selected FE 3 Changing the Prohibit data writing setting in Device tag settings giko The enabled data write setting cannot be changed to Prohibit if the tag is used for the setting items provided for tag writing e Completion notification of Handshake operation substitution tags of Select in Communication action etc INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j fa fe o eA 9 E ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 15 Precautions T7 133 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 134 MELSEC IA series 4 Type mismatch a Value substitution A value is assigned to a tag component after the type of the source is converted into the type of the tag component A value is assigned to a variable after the type of the variable is converted into the type of the substituti
180. MIT Success succeeded e ROLLBACK Table 8 21 ROLLBACK Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID ROLLBACK Success Output succeeded log format veneti Date Error code SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 ROLLBACK Success succeeded f GetNext Request for next record Table 8 22 GetNext Request for next record Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID GetNext Success Output succeeded log format Date Error code SID Session ID GetNext Failed When failed Database Message Database error number Database error message When Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 GetNext Success succeeded g DELETE Table 8 23 DELETE Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Success No of deleted records Output succeeded log format When failed Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When Aca 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 SQL lt DELETE FROM TABLE gt Success 1 succeede Example 2 When failed 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20600023 SID 00000c60 SQL lt DELETE FROM table1 gt Failed i Database Message 0x000003ae Oracle ODBC OraJORA 00942 table or view does not ex
181. Multi select setting SELECT Work No RECIPE_A RECIPE_B RECIPE_C FROM RECIPEDATA WHERE RECIPE_C Process2 RECIPE_C ORDER BY Work_No No of fields in project 22 Tag component data length in job 19 words total Figure 7 76 An example of MultiSelect setting Database DB1 Table name RECIPEDATA Work_No RECIPE_A RECIPE_B RECIPE_C 536 5 32 1 537 6 33 538 y 34 539 8 35 540 9 36 Select sorted Selected Matched Ascending oe Selected RECIPE_C 1 Tag component Process1 Work_No 1 Process1 RECIPE_A 1 Process1 RECIPE_B 1 Process1 RECIPE_C 1 536 5 32 1 Process1 Work_No 2 Process1 RECIPE_A 2 Process1 RECIPE_B 2 Process1 RECIPE_C 2 538 7 34 1 Process1 Work_No 3 Process1 RECIPE_A 3 Process1 RECIPE_B 3 Process1 RECIPE_C 3 540 9 36 1 Figure 7 77 An example of MultiSelect operation 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL e When Delete is selected for Action type Delete eliminates a specific record that satisfies the specified conditions Conditions for the record s to be deleted are set in Slect Update Delete conditions L 5 Select Update Delete conditions DB tag link settings is not used Communication action M ELS 26 Q series Action type De
182. NCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 2 Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Select items for Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 referring to 3 and subsequent descriptions z gt Table 7 46 Selection items for Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 2 Item Description Trigger 1 Trigger 2 No trigger conditions Disable oe O O z L gt 3 Disable When the specified date time and day of the z week match the actual date time and day of fi 3 Time specification startup _ the week the condition changes from false to O O gt a true resulting in job startup lt 3 4 Time specification startup The condition is alternated between true and false in the specified cycles unit seconds n Specified time period i i Bante and wren it changes from false to true the job O O is activated 2 F 5 Specified time period startup g The actual tag component value is compared 2 with the condition value tag component value lt a or constant value at every sampling times kalue monitonngietartup and the job is activated when the condition O O changes from false to true 9 lt gt 6 Value monitoring startup 2 The job is activated only once when the MES a At module startup interface module is started up Oo O ooo lt 3 7 At module startup The job is activated when Handshake startup of the programmable controller CPU turns 9 gt ON Se Handshake operation Upon completion of the job execution O x 2 S Completi
183. ND SETTING TOOL D SINSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELSEC Q series 2 MX MESInterface installation For system configurations refer to the following gt Section 2 1 2 System configuration for installation Point 1 Before installing MX MESInterface close any other applications running on Windows 2 The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating system or other companies software such as Windows Update and Java update may start automatically Please install the driver after changing the setting of the update program not to start automatically When installing MX MESInterface log on as a user with Administrator authority 3 The following screens are for Microsoft Windows xP Professional Operating System Start Start Windows Explorer then click the drive in DB Pen Bee p which the CD ROM is loaded Double click SETUP exe To display Windows Explorer right click Start then select Explore ites Tools Help When using Windows Vista When the screen on the left is displayed click Allow User Account Control a w Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before m i setup exe Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow Itrust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Y Details User Ac
184. ND UNINSTALLATION ez FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 14 6 1 9 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series 5 DB buffering operation a When no data are currently stored in the DB buffer Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met Section 6 1 2 Job execution procedure Were the SQL texts sent Sent to the database x Sent to the database without being stored in the DB buffer 2 Factors for starting DB buffering Not sent Is the Enable DB buffering Not checked box checked When disabled the job execution is canceled without lt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering DB buffering Checked Section 6 1 10 Precautions DB buffering is started End Figure 6 12 When no data are currently stored in the DB buffer Point Check the DB buffer status No of bufferings utilization and prevent the full status of the DB buffer K7 Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering Section 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering 6 15 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 9 DB buffering function FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series b When some data are currently stored in the DB buffer W Job execution starts when trigger conditions
185. ND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Sections 2 1 1 2 2 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 5 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 7 2 4 8 1 5 1 6 1 4 7 11 1 7 11 2 8 2 8 5 10 1 3 10 2 1 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 4 Addition Appendix 9 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date Manual number Revision Jan 2009 SH NA 080644ENG H Gorrection Sections 2 2 3 2 6 1 4 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 1 2 Jan 2010 SH NA 080644ENG I Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS Sections 1 1 2 3 2 4 2 2 5 2 6 2 3 1 3 3 4 3 4 7 2 4 8 1 to 4 8 3 6 1 6 6 1 9 7 3 1 7 3 4 7 8 1 7 9 7 9 1 7 10 7 10 1 7 11 7 11 1 7 12 5 8 1 8 2 8 8 1 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 2 10 3 3 Appendices 3 1 3 10 3 13 to 3 15 3 19 5 7 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Japanese Manual Version SH 080643 H This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers Before using the equipment please read this manual caref
186. No as the one set in Service port of DB Connection Service lt Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 2 Specify the number of the port that is not being used by any database or another application Usually it need not be changed 7 52 7 9 Server Service Setting 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 5 User name Up to 30 characters Set a user name used to access the server computer For characters that can be used for user names refer to the following z C gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 3 a When Database server is selected for Server type Set a user name that is required for ODBC access z b When Application server is selected for Server type Set the account user name used for the operating system OS of the application o Le server computer 2S 6 Password Confirm password Up to 30 characters Set a password used to access the server computer For characters that can be used for passwords refer to the following Z gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 5 5 7 Access error notification setting 6 a Notify the access error status Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status If the Notify the access error status box is checked an error occurred in access a eZ to the server computer
187. Normal E Information linkage error 2 X12 Y12 oZ ON Error OFF Normal aS X13 Y13 3 X14 Use prohibited Y14 X15 Y15 Access target CPU error 2 X16 Y16 O ON Error OFF Normal B X17 Y17 7 Use prohibited O X18 Y18 f n X19 Use prohibited Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B Another error o X1C Y1C QF ON Error OFF Normal Zu z X1D 7 Y1D OA Use prohibited zga X1E Y1E Fom w A Watchdog timer error Biase X1F Y1F ON Error OFF Normal Point As for I O signals to a programmable controller CPU do not output ON a Use prohibited signal Doing so may cause malfunctions of the programmable controller system INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 15 3 4 1 I O signal list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Device No XO MELSEC IA series 3 4 2 I O signals details The following table shows the details of the I O signals of the MES interface module 1 Input signals details Signal name Module READY Table 3 13 Input signals details Description Turns ON when the MES interface module becomes ready after the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset x1 CompactFlash card status 1 Turns ON when the CompactFlash card is installed and the file access status X2 is OFF 2 Turns O
188. Not doing so could result in damage to the product Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module When connecting a connector properly press crimp or solder it using the tools specified by the manufacturer Incomplete connection may cause short circuit fire and malfunctions Push the CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash card slot and install it securely After installing the CompactFlash card check that it is inserted securely Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to poor contact Wiring Precautions CAUTION Always store the communication cables and power cables connected to the module in the duct or fix them in place with clamps Not doing so may cause swing move or poor connection of the cable or damage of a module and or cable due to careless pull resulting in malfunctions Install connectors securely to modules Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module When disconnecting communication ca
189. ON TOOL MELSEC A series d When MultiSelect is selected for Action type MultiSelect substitutes field values of the records whose conditions are met for substitute values tag component values ai Conditions for the redords to be selected are set in Select Update Delete i conditions LF 5 Select Update Delete conditions Conditions for sorting the selected records are set in Select sort settings lt 6 Select sort settings 1 Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name for the field values to be multi selected BZ For characters that can be used for field names refer to the following ae L gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names etc 2 Tag Select a target tag z Only the tags with Array setting can be selected 3 3 Component 2 Select a target component R Point When MultiSelect is used in a job the total of Tag component data length in job 9 e must be 45000 words or less E 6 Tag component data length in job represents a total length of the tag component ES data set for the following Da O DB tag link settings in Communication action e Select Update Delete conditions in Communication action e Operation action Even if the same tag component is set more than once in the same job each setting is handled separately The number of settings can be confirmed on the status bar of Job setting or in the Communication acti
190. ONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 21 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 22 MELSEC IA series 3 When time information is not obtainable from the SNTP server computer When the MES interface module cannot obtain time information from the SNTP server computer due to failure of the network or time synchronization server it behaves as follows a When time information is not obtained at the time of powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU 1 The operation for the case of selecting Synchronize with programmable controller CPU time is performed Adjusted to the time of CPU No 1 Daylight saving setting is not enabled 2 Error code OAO6Gh is output to the error log 3 One minute later time query is executed again to the SNTP server computer If the time query is successful Daylight saving setting is enabled b When time information is not obtained in timings of once a minute 1 The module continues its operations based on the information that was successfully obtained by time query 2 When the previous time query was successful error code OA07h is output to the error log 3 One minute later time query is executed again to the SNTP server computer Point Whether time query to the SNTP server computer is executed successfully or not can be confirmed by Onli
191. PECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er fa fe o A 9 ra E z E EZO 260 36 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 58 MELSEC Le series 4 Startup logging a Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not b c lt If this function is enabled the job startup timing can be checked during system start up or tune up When the Startup logging box is checked the startup history of the job date and time job name is saved on a CompactFlash card The startup log can be checked from Online View working log L gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module When the log capacity becomes full Log capacity 2MB x 2 The first half of the data are deleted The latest log is stored after the remaining data When this function is enabled a processing time is required for saving or deleting the startup history of the job It is recommended to disable this function during system operation 5 Test mode a Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not Up to 4 jobs can be set to Test mode When the Test mode box is checked the test mode is activated and execution details of the job can be confirmed before operation Execution details of the job can be checked by selecting Onlin
192. Program example when Redundant CPU is used The same job cannot be restarted during the job operation After switching systems the job waits time set by Retry timer 30 seconds in program example 2 Completion notification M200 may not be turned OFF at system switching The job restart processing is performed at the next scan a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U 3 Precautions Executing the same job twice is necessary when switching systems Create the system in view of executing the same job twice Example When INSERT is used at Communication action 2 When the record of the same data production number etc is inserted to the TE table of data base twice create the information system to use the latest data FE aa 7 10 Job Setting T7 71 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Q series 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution Configure the settings for the program execution function For the program execution function refer to the following L gt Section 6 1 8 Program execution function Click the Setting button of Before actions or After actions Before actions Set a program to be performed before execution of the first action of the job e After actions Set a program to be performed after execution of the last action of the job Program execution Before actions
193. Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 11 MELSEC LE series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action The number of characters specified in Excessive number of 062Fh the component setting is out of characters error range Correct the component setting The decimal or exponential type Decimal Exponential form Pa ae 0630h specification in the component setting error sog setting is invalid 0631h e Ret iting the setting with MES a Failed to read out the setting file The ony ng ne seting with Setting file error f pani Interface Function Configuration 0649h setting file is corrupted Tool Excessive number of i F The total of device points for the high Change the setting so that the total 064Bh device points for high j speed sampling tag exceeded 96 device points will not exceed 96 speed sampling tag Ensure a system area in the program memory of the High speed sampling tag programmable controller CPU i Failed to register a component device 064Ch component registration Format the PLC memory of the high speed tag to the CPU error e For the Redundant CPU check the system area for the Redundant CPU of both systems e Ret iting the setting with MES i Failed to read out the
194. Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 Table 10 4 Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Error code Error description and cause Corrective action 4 There is no setting file e Configure the settings again with DB Connection Start the service using the default setting Service Setting Tool 7 W b Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector QA Table 10 5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector z Error code Error description and cause Corrective action 4 Unable to start the service due to insufficient memory Terminate any unnecessary applications 2 Unable to start the service due to insufficient Add more memory to the personal computer resources is 3 Please consult your local Mitsubishi S System error representative explaining a detailed description 4 of the problem i ae e Refer to the actions of error codes 101 to 129 Failed to read the setting file 5 A Actions are displayed with error codes 101 to The service is stopped 129 e Refer to the actions of error codes 401 to 403 6 Failed to initialize the log file and 501 to 503 The service is stopped e Actions are displayed with error codes 401 to 403 and 501 to 503 7 Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative explaining a detailed description 8 of the problem 9 The server port has alr
195. RATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 108 MELSEC TA eries 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action Configure the settings for operation of tag component values Up to 20 dyadic operations can be set for one operation action Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the Operation action dialog box Make the setting referring to the following descriptions Clicking the OK _ button after setting adds or modifies the action For the operation for adding or modifying an action refer to the following lt gt Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions Component Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Component Tag component data length in job O words total 8 9 10 11 Figure 7 88 Operation action dialog box 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 1 MELSEC A series Table 7 76 Setting items in the Operation action dialog box Item Description Substitution tag Select a tag or variable to which a value is assigned Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setti
196. S INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 13 MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action OBOEh e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative explaining a detailed 0B1Eh description of the problem The data could not be converted to the Shange the setting so that type 0B1Fh Type conversion error conversion will be available in any specified type case e Check if data can be written to the 0B20h Tag write error Failed to write data to the tag device specified for the tag component e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0B21h System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check if Device tag settings is correct e Check if the ERR LED is on or 0B22h Tag access error Failed to read or write the tag flashing on the MES interface module Section 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0B23h System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check if Device tag settings is 0B24h Tag value read error Failed to read data from the tag correct OB25h e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative explaining a detailed 0B28h description of the problem 0B29h Type conversion to tag The data could not be converted to the Check
197. S interface module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 6 Self diagnostics Test 4 12 4 6 1 Self loopback test 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 13 MELSEC IA series 4 6 2 Hardware test Test ROM RAM intelligent function module switch settings for the MES interface module 1 MES interface module operation mode setting Q In Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer set Mode setting to Hardware test Switch 1 0001h D Match the other intelligent function module switch settings to the setting contents used 2 Hardware test execution Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status 2 Reset the programmable controller CPU After the programmable controller CPU is reset the following hardware tests are executed automatically During the test the ERR LED flashes 1 ROM check Reads the ROM data and checks the sum 2 RAM check Reads the test data written to the RAM and checks the consistency 3 Switch setting check Checks that the intelligent function module switch settings are set within the allowable range However the Switch 1 Mode setting is not tested 3 Confirmation of hardware test result Q Check the ERR LED status to see the hardware test result Table 4 8 Hardware test result ERR LED status Hardware test result O
198. SYSTEM Setting NA Item Description number 0000h Online Normal operation mode Tests the ROM RAM intelligent function module switch settings gt Section 4 6 2 Hardware test Executes the 10BASE T 100BASE TX interface self diagnostics test lt gt Section 4 6 1 Self loopback test 0001h Hardware test 0002h Self loopback test SPECIFICATIONS 4 2 Default operation setting battery error detection setting Switch 2 Select the default operation setting battery error detection setting for the MES interface module o Zz nNDO OOF Zu b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0 Fom wo oO Specify 0 Switch 2 eO Battery error detection setting T E Default operation setting Account setting 0 Detects battery errors 0 Operates according to Account setting A 1 Does not detect battery errors 1 Operates according to the default Zz User name QJ71MES96 Ze Password MITSUBISHI 25 sg Default operation setting Network settings Z 0 Operates according to Network settings e 1 Operates according to the default When other than 0 is specified in this area IP ADDRESS 192 168 3 3 Switch setting error 0180h occurs at hardware test Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Figure 4 9 Default operation setting battery error detection setting Switch 2 Yn rA a Default operation setting bit 0 1 2 E 3 O Set whether to operate Account setting a
199. Send notification of this exception When the Send notification of this exception box is checked if there is no record to be selected updated multi selected or deleted a value will be assigned to the specified tag component When Send notification of this exception is selected set a tag component to which the value is assigned Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Note that the following tags are not selectable Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled Tags for which Array setting is set e Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value Table 7 71 Values that can be entered as a substitute value Data type of tag component Values that can be entered as a substitute value ON OFF is selectable Bit type Single precision integer Double precision integer Floating point type Up to 16 characters e Signed decimal notation Example 521 98 e Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 Character string Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 2 Continue this job Finish this job e When Continue this job is selected After execution of exception processing described in the above 1 the system continues executions of other actions e When Finish this
200. Send notification of this exception Ez If the Send notification of this exception checkbox is checked a value is z5 assigned to the specified tag component when the the number of arrays set in Array setting is less than the number of records selected by Select Update Delete conditions When selecting this set a tag component to which a value is assigned 2 Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned 5 Note that the following tags are not selectable Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled Tags for which Array setting is set e Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following table shows values available for substitution j er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 103 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series Table 7 73 Values available for substitution Data type of ta Yp g Values available for substitution component Bit ON OFF is selectable Up to 16 characters Single precision integer e Signed decimal point representation Double precision integer Example 521 98 Floating point e Signed exponential representation Example 5 2198E03 Up to 32 characters y For characters that can be used for strings refer to the following Sg lt gt Appendix 2
201. T2 Blank 1 to 239 When other than the above is selected Blank 102 I O Address When DIFFERENT is selected with OTHER STATION and CCLINK or C24 is selected with NET2 Oh to FEOh Hexadecimal When other than the above is selected Blank When NET10 or ETHERNET y 1 to 120 is selected with When NET2 DIFFERENT is When CCLINK STATION EE selected with is selected with 0 to 63 OTHER STATION NET2 When C24 is selected with 0 to 31 NET2 When other than the above is selected Blank 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 App 21 with OTHER STATION For characters can be used in CPU names refer to the following 3 Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc If the same CPU name already exists the existing name is overwritten If the same CPU name is set multiple times the setting of the label with the higher number is overwritten NO cannot be set when other than QCPU is selected with SERIES Make the setting causes an error CCLINK and C24 cannot be set when QNACPU is selected with SERIES and DIFFERENT is selected with OTHER STATION Make the settings causes an error When QCPUA or ACPU is selected with SERIES ETHERNET and C24 cannot be set when SINGLE is selected with OTHER STATION Make the settings causes an error CCLINK and C24 cannot be set when DIFFERENT
202. THERNET 4 5 C24 C24 When NO is selected with OTHER Blank STATION When SINGLE or DIFFERENT is selected with OTHER STATION and 1 to 239 o NETNO1 Network No NET10 or ETHERNET is selected with NET1 When other than the above is selected Blank When SINGLE or DIFFERENT is rg 101 O Address selected with OTHER STATION and Oh to FEOh Hexadecimal CCLINK or C24 is selected with NET1 EJ station Station number Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV When other than the above is selected Blank When NET10 or ETHERNET 440430 is selected with When SINGLE or NET1 DIFFERENT is When CCLINK selected with is selected with 0 to 63 OTHER STATION NET1 When C24 is selected with 0 to 31 NET1 When NO is selected with OTHER Blank STATION To the next page App 20 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Item NET2 NETNO2 Network Network No Table App 22 Setting item Description When CC IE Cont DIFFERENT is NET 10 H MELSEC IA series From the previous page Setting value NET10 selected with CC Link OTHER STATION Ethernet 6 78 C24 CCLINK ETHERNET C24 When other than the above is selected with OTHER STATION When DIFFERENT is selected with OTHER STATION and NET10 or ETHERNET is selected with NE
203. TION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 1 Combination a Selects a combination of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 OR When either of them is true the result is true AND When both of them are true the result is true The combination result of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 is changed from false to true the job is activated b The following shows the timings at which the combination result of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 is changed from false to true In any other cases because the combination result is not changed from false to true the job is not activated Table 7 45 Timings at which combination result of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 is changed from false to true Combination Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Combination result Changed from false to true Remained false Em False False Changed from false to true Changed from false to true i OR When either of them is true the result is true True i True False False p Remained false Changed from false to true True True Changed from false to true False False Changed from false to true Remained true True False False False i Changed from false to true Changed from false to true AND When both of them are true the result is true True Tue False False Remained true Changed from false to true False False 7 60 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FU
204. TOOL b c MELSEC IA series Notify the number of acquired records When the Notify the number of acquired records checkbox is checked the number of actually acquired records is notified to the specified tag component When selecting this set a tag component to which a value is notified 1 Tag Select a tag component to which a value is notified Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable Clear the unused tag components by zero When the Clear the unused tag components by zero checkbox is checked if the specified number of arrays of the tag component is less than the number of actually acquired records zeros are assigned to other array areas Example When the specified number of arrays of the tag component is 6 and the number of actually acquired records is 4 C t oil as Device Data type n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 Component A DO Single word Component A A 9 K 4 is 7 e 1 i 0 i 0 Component B D100 _ Double word Component B P E D102 ER D104 oe D106 G por D108 to ae D110 to Bi Component C ZR1000 String 8 characters T 106 ZR1000 to ZR1003 ZR1004 to ZR1007 ZR1008 to ZR1011 ZR1012 to ZR1015 ZR1016 to ZR1019 ZR1020 to ZR1023 Component C Table Data Data2 Date NULL 0 NULL 0 vV Acquired records 0 is assigned to unassigned tag components Figure 7 87 An example of Clear
205. TTYPE When NONE is selected Blank with IN2CONSTTYPE Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV App 44 APPENDICES MELSEC Kel series Appendix 3 18 REMOTE CSV 1 File format Table App 54 File format Item Description File name REMOTE CSV File contents Job settings Program execution lt 5 Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution y y y ITEM REMOTEEXEC SERVER COMMAND File format REMOTEEXECI 2 5 REMOTEEXECS REMOTEEXECS2 bisae SSS y y y RETURNCHECK RETURNVALUE ERRORWRITE ERRORTAG ERRORELEMENT ENABLE 0 DISABLE DISABLE e ee S ENABLE o ENABLE 10 1 2 NOWAIT 4010 DISABLE WAIT __ Item row L Label column setting area Program execution setting before action execution Program execution setting after action execution Ea Program execution settings before action execution IV Execute program before action Program execution destination 4PP_Server xl Commandline c DBAPP RECIPE_02 EXE V Check return value lormal return value El 0 EE I Write the palue into the tag when value is faulty Tag Component Process2 DB_Error lt lt V Do not execute job when the value is faulty Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 45 Appendix 3 18 REMOTE CSV 2 Label w 3 Table
206. Table App 19 Setting item Item Description Setting value When set 1 to 64 Bink When set 1 to 256 Component When the TAG is blank Blank When not set Blank Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 18 Appendix 3 6 DBBUF CSV XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV MELSEC Le series 1 File format Table App 20 File format Item Description File name CPU CSV File contents File format App 19 Access target CPU settings lt gt Section 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting 6 ITEM CPUNAME SERIES MULTI CPU OTHER STATION NET1 CPU1 _ Contorol CPU acpu_ no nor TT CPU2 _ Assembly equipment QCPU SINGLE ETHERNET CPU5 Painting equipment QNACPU DIFFERENT NET10 CPU60 Welding equipment ACPU SINGLE CCLINK Zoo om Mm L Item row Change disabled L Label column setting area Can be changed by the user Access target CPU settings QG New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help Os Ria NewProject K System setting oo CPU name Necu Access target CPU settings fil ControlCPU Maceo Mode eal EE oc 3 gt ac eres auam z Device tag settings Gi Server service settings Job settings 4 pam gt Multiple CPU specification No specification zi S gt Ot
207. Tools Event Viewer in Windows lt Section 10 1 Error Codes Point 1 Change the DB Connection Service settings when a job using the DB Connection Service is not operating The status is as follows The programmable controller is powered OFF e The MES interface function operation is stopped with Online Remote operation of MES interface function configuration tool K gt Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function 2 When reflecting the settings with a job using DB Connection Service is running the execution of the connected job is canceled and a communication error occurs Also for a job to which Enable DB buffering is selected any SQL text is buffered in the DB buffer 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC LA series DB connection service setting tool Eile Help w A Service port 5114 V Output access log m S Output destination 2 DB access timeout 30 seconds dbConnector log f J Limit IP addresses permit to connect Access log capacity IP Address 1 MBx 10 Files Z fe Mask bit length Optional z a il MV Output SQL failed log 3 Permitted IP Output destination B Z j l tl uj O addresses list sqlFailed log a DS SQL failed log capacity 1 MBx 10 Files n Zz ear Figure 8 7 DB Connection Service Setting Tool k a Table 8 3 Setting ite
208. U aor mode moqe n ACPU CC IE Cont NET 10 H O x x CC Link C24 Ethernet o x x O Accessible x Inaccessible Network communication Co existence network route route For the network No and station number set the values same with the parameter settings of the Q series E71 and QE71 on access target CPU side Also set Station No IP information in the parameter settings of the Q series E71 QE71 For the Station No IP information specify the IP address computation method table conversion method or both 2 For the QnACPU and QE71 on the access target CPU side use products of the manufacturing date 9707B or later 3 For the CC Link system master local module on the access target CPU side use modules of software version S or later 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 7 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO oO Z Q lt Q m O Mn a 2 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 8 3 Accessible devices Table 3 8 Accessible devices Device Device name Function input FX QCPU Q mode QCPU A mode MELSEC Le series QnACPU ACPU Function output FY Function register FD Special relay SM M 2 Special register SD D Input
209. URATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 1 System Configuration 2 4 2 1 4 System configuration for operation 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA series 2 2 Applicable Systems This section describes the applicable systems 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules a When mounted with a CPU module The table below shows the CPU modules and base units applicable to the MES interface module and quantities for each CPU model Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Table 2 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules Applicable module Base unit 2 CPU type CPU model Extension base unit QOO0JCPU 8 Basic model QCPU QOOCPU j O O Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU 64 O o Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Process CPU na Guai 64 O O Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Redundant E 53 x O Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU 8 QOOUCPU Programmable 24 Q01UCPU controller CPU Q02UCPU 36 Q03UDCPU QO04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Universal model Q13UDHCPU acpu gt Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Safety CPU QS001CPU N A x x QO06CCPU V C Controll dul N A ontroller mod
210. Up to 32 characters Set a field name for the field value to be selected For characters that can be used for field names refer to the following lt gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names etc 2 Tag Select a tag or variable for which a value is substituted Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 3 Component Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution target Communication action Table name RECIPEDATA Action type Select Database 061 x DB tag link settings Field name Select Update Delete conditions TagiType PSS Processi S gt Process Component Ja RECIPE1 F RECIPEZ RECIPES Combine Field name Condition N Work no Tag Type Process1 Component Work No PROCEDURE TO SETTINGS AND OPERATION 2 RECIPEZ 3 RECIPES S5 Processi gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Z Insert a whole tag Delete row Select sort settings Field name INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION t Delete row Exception process setting 23 amp delete row Generated SQL text SELECT RECIPE1 RECIP
211. X Developer communication port UDP IP of the Q series E71 on the target or relay station Is MES interface accessing the Redundant CPU of other station Corrective action Remove the remote password set for the GX Developer communication port UDP IP of the Q series E71 on the target or relay station Mount a MES interface module to the extension base unit of the Redundant CPU that is access target and access it The MES interface cannot access the Redundant CPU of other station Is system switching consecutively occurring e Review the system so that system switching will not occur consecutively 4 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom The DB interface function does not work No communication has been made with the server computer Checked item Is Running displayed in the status indication area of Remote operation 3 Section 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function Is a personal computer restarted after installing relational database Is the port No set in Service port of DB Connection Service Setting Tool the same as the port No set in Port No of Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Is the firewall function of the operating system OS or security software enabled on the server computer Corrective action If Stopped is di
212. a ESCO DRIVES amp AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM TECHNIEK B V NETHERLANDS 24 shenkar St Kiryat Arie Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 IL 49001 Petah Tiqva MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V FRANCE BE 1831 Diegem NL 2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 French Branch Phone 32 0 2 717 64 30 Phone 31 0 180 46 6004 Fax 972 0 3 924 0761 25 Boulevard des Bouvets Fax 32 0 2 717 64 31 Fax 31 0 180 44 23 55 TEXEL ELECTRONICS Lid ISRAEL F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Koning amp Hartman b v BELGIUM Koning amp Hartman b v NETHERLANDS 9113 ymanut P 0 B 6272 Phone 33 0 1 55 68 55 68 Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21 23 1L 42160 Netanya Fax 33 0 1 55 68 5757 BE 1800 Vilvoorde NL 1101 CH Amsterdam Phone 972 0 9 863 39 80 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V IRELAND Phone 32 0 2 257 02 40 Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 Fax 4972 0 9 885 2430 Irish Branch Fax 32 0 2 257 02 49 Fax 31 020 5877605 CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON Westgate tustness Park Ballymount INEABH d o o BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Cebaco Center Block A Autostrade DORA Phone 353 0 1 4198800 Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487 Lebanon Beirut Fax 353 0 1 4198890 BA 71000 Sarajevo NO 3002 Drammen Phone 961 0 1 240 430 Phone 387 0 33 921 164 Phone 47 0 32 24 3000 Fax 961 0 1 240 438 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V ITALY Fax 387 0 33 524539 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 ta ae AKHNATON BULGARIA Sirius Trading amp
213. abase The following commands can be selected for the SQL text Select MultiSelect Update Insert Delete function changes from false to true when the conditions are met starts a job Section 7 10 2 When multiple sets of conditions for data transmission are met in a concentrated s manner their data and trigger times are buffered in the module s internal memory so that p Trigger buffering B Section 6 1 5 j actions data operation transmission can be executed later using the buffered data function Section 7 10 1 Section 6 1 6 Section 7 11 1 Arithmetic processing function Operation action Performs operations for tag component values Section 6 1 7 Section 7 11 2 Program execution function DB buffering function Executes programs in the application server computer before execution of the first action and after execution of the last one in a job Buffers SQL texts into a CompactFlash card when they cannot be sent due to network disconnection or failure of the database server computer After recovery the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database Manual operation is also possible Section 6 1 8 Section 7 10 3 Section 6 1 9 Section 7 6 4 Section 7 10 4 Section 7 13 6 Processes execution of requests made by user applications using XML format messages The XML processing function allows the following instructions for job execution Section 6 2 XML processing fun
214. able for item names component names variable names etc DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting 7 33 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 34 2 3 4 MELSEC IA series PLC series QCPU Q mode QCPU A mode QnACPU ACPU Select the PLC series of the access target CPU Multiple CPU specification No specification No 1 to No 4 Select a CPU No when the access target CPU is used in the multiple CPU system When No specification is selected access is made to the control CPU Other station specification Select whether or not to specify any other station a No specification Select this when accessing the CPU on the host station b Other station Single network Select this when accessing a CPU on another station via only one kind of network such as CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet or via a network consisting of multi tier systems Specify Single network for systems containing the following network e CC Link IE controller network e MELSECNET H e MELSECNET 10 e Ethernet c Other station Different network Select this when accessing a CPU on another station via two kinds of networks Two kinds of networks represent two different networks such as combination of CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 and CC Link or Q series C24 and CC L
215. able name field names and Select Update Delete conditions Also set a correct data type for the data entered in the fields Check if the uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated or not Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20600024 System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Select Job settings Communication action in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and No record was updated inserted or deleted by the H 0x20600025 i set update insert or delete conditions correctly SQL execution i Check if the database has been filled with registered data 0x20600026 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative explaining a detailed description 0x20600028 of the problem Check if it is connected to the network Check if the gateway and or hub is operating e Check if the power of the module is not turned off Data source name Transmitting Commit 0x2060002B Success Response Failed Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response Database error number and Database error message are output to the space after Database Message in the SQL failure log of DB Connection Service For the output log format refer to the following 37 Section 8 8 2 SQL failure log 10 31 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A series
216. acle ODBC OraJORA 01722 invalid number c INSERT Table 8 19 INSERT When Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Success No of inserted records Output succeeded log format When failed Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Failed Database Message Database error number Database error message When 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 SQL lt INSERT INTO TABLE COL VALUES succeeded 1 gt Success 1 Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20600023 SID 00000001 SQL lt INSERT INTO TABLEE COL VALUES When failed 1 gt Failed Database Message 0x000003ae Oracle ODBC OraJORA 00942 table or view does not exist 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 26 8 8 1 Access log OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL e e z O O Mn Z Z Q i a a 38 tr lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL Output log format Example d COMMIT Table 8 20 COMMIT a6 Q series Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID COMMIT Success succeeded F Date Error code SID Session ID COMMIT Failed When failed Database Message Database error number Database error message When 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 COM
217. ae User name following Zw gt n gt 0 Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string S T 7 constants etc E 3 m Default QJ71MES96 Bese Enter a password 8 to 14 characters Case sensitive Password Confirm For characters that can be used for passwords refer to the following password lt gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Default MITSUBISHI INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 3 Deleting an account a Select the account to be deleted and click the Delete button FUNCTIONS im 6 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 25 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 26 MELSEC IA series 4 Precautions on security of the MES interface module Although the MES interface module supports the basic authentication account setting using user names and passwords it shall not completely protect the system from illegal access When the programmable controller system security needs to be protected against illegal access take measures at the user s discretion It is recommended to pay attention to the following a Set Account setting observing the following so that your account user name password will not be leaked 1 Prevent any simple setting consisting of alphanumeric
218. ae lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 8 8 Output Log Specifications Output character 8 23 MELSEC IA series This section explains the output log format for the SQL failure log and access log shown Section 8 8 1 or later Date Error code Message Line feed Table 8 10 Output log format for the SQL failure log and access log Item Description Year 1st to 4th bytes at the head of the line Four digit integer for year Numbers Year Month delimiter 5th byte at the head of the line Slash 2Fh Month 6th and 7th bytes at the head of the line 2 digit integer 01 to 12 Numbers Month Day delimiter 8th byte at the head of the line Slash 2Fh Day Day Hour delimiter 9th and 10th bytes at the head of the line 11th byte at the head of the line 2 digit integer 01 to 31 Numbers Space 20h 12th and 13th bytes at the Date Hour 2 digit integer 00 to 23 Numbers head of the line i PEA 14th byte at the head of the Hour Minute delimiter it Colon 3Ah i 15th and 16th bytes at the EROT Minute 2 digit integer 00 to 59 Numbers head of the line 17th byte at the head of the Minute Second delimiter ine Y Colon 3Ah i 18th and 19th bytes at the ae Second 2 digit integer 00 to 59 Numbers head of the line 20th byte at the head of the Second Milli
219. ailure T n log Figure 1 6 Obtaining logs for access errors 5 Directions from the information system can be realized Processing registered in the MES interface module can be started from information system applications This enables to realize production directions from the information system Not only can data be sent to a database but it can also be received from a database This enables to download data such as production information from information system databases SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION lt MES interface module gt p lt Information system gt 1 Instructs job execution INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 2 Starts registered processing Job execution 3 Sends data Yn rA 9 E O 2 f lt Information system gt 1 Instructs job execution 2 Starts registered S processing fe Job execution e Ww Oo O 3 Sends data g Hos Figure 1 7 Realization of directions from the information system 5 m rA W S20 re QO i 528 lt tr 682 O Pim ann 1 1 Features 1 6 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC IA series 6 Supporting diverse databases When designing a new system a wide range of database types can be selected Even when connecting to the existing system the system can be transferred without changing the existing database 7 Access independent of the database table configurati
220. air cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other e Make sure to place the twisted pair cable in a duct 2 Cable In the environment where the cable is susceptible to noise use the shielded twisted pair cable STP cable 3 10 Mbps communication e Connect the 10 Mbps compatible equipment with the MES interface module and transmit the data to the equipment at a transmission speed of 10 Mbps 2 9 2 3 Connection System Equipment 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 2 4 Operating Environment 2 4 1 Configuration computer OVERVIEW This section explains the operating environment for the configuration computer N Table 2 4 Operating environment for configuration computer Computer PC AT compatible personal computer can operate the following operating systems CPU Required See Table 2 5 Performance required for personal computer and operating systems Zz Q 4 a a Le Zz fe SYSTEM memory Hard disk available capacity 64 MB or more Disc drive CD ROM disc drive Display Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels or higher Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version 2 3 Microsoft Windows xP Professional Operating System English version 1 3 4 j3 SPECIFICATIONS Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Operating Sys
221. am execution function is executable with the specified account P After creating an account used for Failed to log on to the application i OBBDh the program execution function be server sure to log in once at least A user with an empty password cannot be specified Set a password for the specified user OBBEh The application server has failed to Execution error Program acquire user identifying information Check if the program specified with OBBFh execution function The profile of the specified user was the program execution function is not found in the application server executable with the specified The application server has failed to account OBCOh S i add a privilege for program execution The application server has failed to OBC1h i load the user profile The application server has failed to p OBC2h y e Check if the program specified with add an access right for screen display hee the program execution function is The application server has failed to pa OBC3h executable with the specified start a program Pr u S account OBC4h Failed to retrieve a loaded user file The application server has failed to OBC5Sh f terminate exclusion control OBC6h Function incompatible with DB e Install the latest version of DB DB connection service i Connection Service version of Connection Service to a server OBC7h version error j f connection target is used computer of the connection target
222. anel icon Clicking Administrative Tools displays Administrative Tools dialog box DB Control Panel My Documents Q My Computer G My Network Places Agea pata Sous Masa ox Double clicking Data Sources ODBC displays UserDSN System DSN Fite DSN Drivere Tracing Connection Pooling About Name Sten Dts Sauces ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box Driver Select the System DSN tab then click the Add button An ODBC System data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A System data source is visible to all users on thie machine including NT services Cancel pp Help J To the next page 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC TE eries From the previous page Create New Data Source E 4 The Create New Data Source dialog box is a r gt e E ala displayed then select SQL Server i Minoso Fabo VP Driver dbf 1 j Ce 5 J 3 Le So K 5 The Create a New Data Source to SQL Server 26 B This wizard will help you create an ODBC data source that you can use to n nae cee dialog box is displayed then set the following a a e Data source name SAMPLEDS e How do you want to describe the data source Destin Server name SAMPLESRV Which SQL Server do you want to connect to n
223. ange XML format messages between the MES interface module and user applications in the XML processing function Tag for Wonderware Name for data unit in the data base Wonderware Historian Historian Abbreviation for Manufacturing Execution Systems Systems for controlling and monitoring the plant status in real time to optimize production MES activities The systems enable to speed up the responses to production plan and status changes that lead to efficient production processes and optimization of production activities ODBC Abbreviation for Open DataBase Connectivity Standard specifications for software to access databases Abbreviation for Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Protocol for synchronizing computer time via a TCP IP network SNTP server computer Computer that provides time information to the MES interface module This computer can be shared with a server computer Abbreviation for Structured Query Language 2a Data manipulation language and used for relational database operations URL Abbreviation for Uniform Resource Locator Notation method for indicating the locations of information resources on the Internet Converts character strings into characters can be used in URLs URL encode i i 3 This designates percent encoding defined by RFC3986 XML Abbreviation for eXtensible Markup Language Markup language for describing documentation data meanings and structures Item One setting group unit i
224. ange area of FB definition ST 0 K steps module Figure 7 31 Format PLC memory in GX Developer x Point Execution of the PLC memory formatting deletes the programmable controller CPU data Read the programmable controller CPU data into GX Developer before executing the PLC memory formatting 7 40 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting An array is a data format in which the specified number of data of the same data type are a arranged sequentially i The Array setting is set when writing multiple records extracted from a database to the 2 same tag component Either of the following can be selected for device assignment to each tag component e Assigning consecutive devices to each tag component series 2 e Handling all tag components as a block and assigning the same kind of devices in a pg series of blocks block Tags with array settings are used for MultiSelect bs Array setting Iv ul yi Length of array 2 series F block Figure 7 32 Array setting Z 3 1 Use array 5 When the Use array checkbox is checked the tag is arranged as arrays 2 2 Length of array Range 2 to 40000 Default 2 Set the number of arrays for the tag Fo o RE 3 Series Block 288 Select a method for the array setting HEO a Series Devices of respective tag components are ar
225. ant type Variable VARIABLE D When TAG is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE 1 to 64 OUTTAG Substitution tag When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Blank OUTELEMENT Substitute When TAG is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE 1 to 256 component When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Blank OUTPUT Substitute When TAG is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Blank variable When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Variable name Tag TAG Date string DATESTR 6 INICONSTTYPE Input 1 Numerical value NUMBER Constant type Character string STRING Variable VARIABLE None NONE When TAG is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE 1 to 64 IN1TAG Input 1 Tag l When other than the above is selected with INICONSTTYPE Blank E IN ELEMENT Input 1 When TAG is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE 1 to 256 Component When other than the above is selected with INICONSTTYPE Blank When TAG is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Blank Character string valid When DATESTR is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE as a date 9 INPUT1 Input 1 Variable When NUMBER is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Numerical value When STRING is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Any character string When VARIABLE is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Variable name When NONE is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Blank No operation NONE ADD OPERATION Operator E SUB TRUC T x MULTIPLY DEVIDE REMAINDER To the next page App 43 Appendix 3 Setting Information File
226. are met L gt Section 6 1 2 Job execution procedure z Q Is Manual resend selected z for the job Se be fe lt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering cas Were the SQL texts sent Sent to the database i 2 O L 5 c Automatically resending data after 5 lt gt 2 Factors for starting DB buffering recovery O Not sent a Is the Enable DB buffering Not checked box checked if When disabled the job execution is canceled without lt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering DB buffering 9 e WwW Checked K gt Section 6 1 10 Precautions BES nee n20 DB buffering is started 1 End Z z a5 1 When accumulated job data currently exist in the DB buffer z z l Job settings Auto resend area in DB buffer 2 25 Job 1 Auto Job 3_SQL TEXT Auto Job 2 Auto Sreo nosier Job 1_SQL TEXT Auto Job 3 Auto that trigger conditions Job 2_SQL TEXT Auto Job 4 Manual are met Manual resend area in DB buffer Job 5 Manual Job 6 Manual Job 6_SQL TEXT Manual Job 4_ SQL TEXT Manual Job 5_SQL TEXT Manual ez a e o Zz O O Z 5 Le Figure 6 13 When some data are currently stored in the DB buffer Point 8 Check the DB buffer status No of bufferings utilization and prevent the full Q status of the DB buffer aa Z9 K gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering aoe e Section 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering a E a
227. arget CPU e The system may operate within the device range of the incorrect PLC series setting SPECIFICATIONS c When accessing the Redundant CPU pay attention to the following points e When the MES interface module is mounted to the Redundant CPU it can access the CPU of host station only It cannot access the CPU of other station e When the MES interface module is mounted to other than the Redundant CPU it cannot access the Redundant CPU of other station SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting T 35 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Q series 7 8 Device Tag Setting Configure the settings for the tag function For the tag function refer to the following C7 Section 6 1 3 Tag function Configured tags are used in Job settings etc a Double clicking Device tag settings in the Edit items tree displays relevant items Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed setting edit screen area Make the setting referring to the following descriptions Q New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help OSM BR es OMe NewProject System setting
228. around the time of change may not have the serial No display attached 2 15 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 3 Confirming the serial number on the system monitor Product Information List To display the screen for checking the serial number and function version select Diagnostics System monitor gt Product inf list in GX Developer OVERVIEW N Serial Function Product number version number Product Information List FA Q amp a a Le Zz fe S SYSTEM QU71MES96 32pt 0000 None None None None Figure 2 10 Product Information List of GX Developer lt ee Production number display g Since the MES interface module does not support the production number display z is displayed Point 92 The serial No on the rated plate and on the front of the module may not match the 358 serial No displayed in the product information list of GX Developer ES The serial No on the rated plate and on the front of the module indicates O the management information of the product e The serial No displayed in the product information list of GX Developer indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when some functions are added INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION D
229. as for Jobs 1 to 64 Trigger buffer overflow count areas for Jobs 1 to 64 OO e e a Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 1 to 10 11520 11521 11522 11523 11524 11525 11526 11527 11528 11529 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 11 to 20 11530 11531 11535 11536 11537 11538 11539 21 22 24 27 28 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 21 to 30 11540 11541 11546 sz 33 a4 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 31 to 40 11550 11551 11556 a a3 as Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 41 to 50 11560 11561 11566 51 52 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 51 to 60 11570 11571 11578 11579 61 62 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 61 to 64 11580 11581 Name SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 5 Buffer Memory List 3 23 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 3 6 Buffer Memory Details This section explains the buffer memory details Point 1 The values stored in buffer memory are cleared when the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset 2 When a value of 65536 or more is stored in the area composed of one word a count is stopped at FFFFh 65535 3 If a value of more than two words is stored in the ar
230. ation Module status Running None Connection result of previous job execution Operation status Error status Server service name Result DB Connected DB buffering status Maximum No of buFferings 0 Buffer utilization Oo Trigger buffering status Maximum No of bufferings 0 Module operation C Stop C Restart C Clear error Change job status Job List JOB1 JOB2 JOB3 JOB DB buffering operation Resend C Clear Execute CompactFlash card operation Format Figure 7 99 Remote operation dialog box 7 13 Online Remote operation T 123 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j fa fe o eA 9 E ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function The operation status of the MES interface function and the error status of the MES interface module can be checked The following explains the display of Module status The display of Module status is updated every 3 seconds Module status Operation status Running Error status None Figure 7 100 Module status 1 Operation status Table 7 86 Items displayed for Operation status Display Descript
231. ation that occur during job execution File contents CF Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation a A JOB_ JOBNAME JOBTYPE TRGBUFFERING LOGGING DEBUGMODE JOB1 Product management 1 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE TROUBLESHOOTING JOB2 Value management DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE 1 JOB3 Monitoring status ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE JOB4 Product management 2 DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE LA E E APPENDICES SQLBUFFERING _ JOINTCONDITION ACTIONNUM CANCELWRITE AUTORESEND 5 ENABLE 1 DISABLE OR J3 SCC DISABLE 2 MANUALRESEND DISABLE ra DISABLE DISABLE INDEX File format 2 L Item row L Label column setting area Job settings New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help 5 OSH SR es HB e eci ane New i IV Enable at module startup Startup logging c 4 cmd Trigger buffering I Test mode G o tings Trigger conditions Gi Server service settings E gt Combination The job starts when th conditions zg Job settings E changes from false to 6 E gt ms Trager ose sf I Program execution DB Buffering Before actions 7 T Enable DB buffering After actions Setting E J Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution No of fields in project maut D words total Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV F
232. ay block size setting is available Usually the block size need not be changed because the it is automatically adjusted to avoid duplication of components Change array block size when e Setting a desired number for the start device No of each block e Adding any component in the future JV array block size The following example explains the cases where array block size is manually set and is not set Example When Component D is to be added in the future e When 10 is set for array block size device numbers are not changed e When nothing is set for array block size device numbers in and after array No 2 are changed When the size is set Array block size 10 n 1 n 2 n 3 Component A DO D10 D20 Component B D1 to D2 D11 to D12 D21 to D22 Component c D3 to D8 D13 to D18 D23 to D28 Planned to gt Component D be added T 48 C tD D9 D19 D29 Component name Device Data type ey omponent D Component A DO Single word Component B D1 Double word When the size is not set Component C D3 String 12 characters D9 Single word a n 1 n 2 n 3 Component A DO T 0 Een D10toD11 D19 to D20 Component B D1toD2 p11 to D12 D21 to D22 D12toD17 D21 to D26 Component Cj D3toD8 _ 513 to D18 D23 to D28 Component D D9 D19 D29 Figure 7 39 An example of array block size 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8
233. ble Up to 16 characters Single precision integer Signed decimal notation Double precision integer Example 521 98 Floating point data Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the Character string following lt 3 Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants FUNCTIONS a fa fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U etc DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 77 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 7 11 Job Setting Actions Set actions of Job settings Up to 10 actions can be set for one job There are two types of actions Communication action for communicating with a database and Operation action for operating tag component values Adding an action Select Communication action or Operation action in the combo box next to the button and click the button The Communication action or Operation action dialog box is displayed Make the setting referring to the following lt Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action e Section 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action Modifying an action e Select an action to be modified in Action list and click the Edit button The
234. bles connected to the module never pull on the cable section When using a cable with a connector disconnect it with holding the connector connected to the module When the cable is pulled while connected to the module this may cause malfunctions or module cable damage A 3 Wiring Precautions CAUTION Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Start up and Maintenance Precautions WARNING Do not touch any terminal during power distribution Doing so may cause malfunctions Always switch OFF the external supply power used by the system in all phases before cleaning or retightening terminal screws Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Loose screws may cause a drop of the module short circuit or malfunctions Tightening screws excessively may damage the screws and or the module resulting in a drop of the module short circuit or malfunctions CAUTION Do not disassemble or transform the module Doing so may cause a failure malfunctions personal injuries and or a fire Always shut OFF
235. box for selecting the component to be installed is displayed Select the component to be installed with the radio button then click the Install button If the left message appears click the Cancel button and after uninstalling MX MESInterface install this product If the left message appears install this product on a computer to which the basic software OS compatible with the product is installed lt Section 2 4 Operating Environment If the left message appears execute EnvMEL Setup exe in the CD ROM for this product After executing Setup exe install this product If the product is not installed correctly at the time restart the computer When using Windows Vista After completion of the Environment of MELSOFT installation the Program Compatibility Assistant shown on the left may appear Click This program installed correctly and close the window Do not select Reinstall using recommended settings because the installer installs an incorrect module 5 1 Installation 5 3 MELSEC TE eries OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION ol ja 25 5 EJ Sz eZ 23 FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL D SINSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Install From the previous page There is a possibility For improper installation if you
236. card initialization error CF card drive data retrieve error System error Unable to initialize the CompactFlash card Unable to read out the drive information of the CompactFlash card Check if the CompactFlash card was inserted properly Replace the CompactFlash card e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0494h CF card format error Failed to format the CompactFlash card e Check if the CompactFlash card was inserted properly e Check the CompactFlash card for any error Perform check disk on the personal computer 0495h 10 9 CF card check error 10 2 Error Code List Failed to check the CompactFlash card 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module e Check the CompactFlash card for any error Perform check disk on the personal computer To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0496h MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name CF card response error Description The access to the CompactFlash card timed out while waiting for a response from the card CompactFlash card failure Replace the CompactFlash card with another 04D0h Battery error The battery voltage dropped or the battery connector was disconnected e Replace the battery Check the battery connection 0501h
237. ce module Item Description Output log format Date Error code SID Session ID MIFWS Connected Source IP Target data source Connection ID Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 MIFWS Connected 192 168 3 3 DataSource ID b Disconnection Table 8 14 Disconnection from the MES interface module Output log format Date Error code SID Session ID MIFWS Disconnected Source IP Target data source Connection ID Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 MIFWS Disconnected 192 168 3 3 DataSource ID 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 24 8 8 1 Access log OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION e e z O O Mn Z Z Q G m a 38 tr lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL a6 Q series 3 Connection disconnection to a database For details on Database error number and Database error message in the output log format in the case of failure refer to the manual for each database Depending on the Error code however Database Message and subsequent data cannot be output According to the error code confirm the error details and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 2 2 Access log of DB Connection Service a Connection Table 8 15 Connection to a database Item
238. ce records are deleted from the database they cannot be restored Make sure that correct target record and timing are set for the delete action E a HOO wee Zwo sz 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 10 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action 6 FUNCTIONS 6 1 7 Arithmetic processing function Operation action a6 Q series The arithmetic processing function performs operations for tag component values In this function up to 20 dyadic operations can be processed per operation action By storing an operation result in the temporary variable area complicated operations are also executable For the arithmetic processing function setting refer to the following C7 Section 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action An operand is selectable from tag component constant and temporary variable Temporary variable N lt 1 Tag component x Tag component Constant Constant Tag component The result can be assigned to a tag Temporary variable Four operations and remainder can be specified component or by corresponding operators temporary variable Executed in order P nai 4 Figure 6 9 Arithmetic processing function Operation action 6 1 8 Program execution function Tag component Up to 20 dyadic operations Constant gt can be performed for one operation action The program execution function is used for executing programs in the applicati
239. ce the control CPU is set as the first Is it the first item item deletion or setting change is not A allowed for it Only the CPU name can Unable to change or delete an item in 2 i be changed o Access target CPU settings a As the error dialog box appears identify the location stop using it for another Is the selected item used in Device tag item and then delete the item settings An item used for another item is unable to be deleted is Q zZ 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 1 0 34 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series 4 Device tag settings gt Section 7 8 Device Tag Setting Symptom Unable to change or delete an item in Device tag settings Unable to set or change Device tag name Unable to select High speed sampling Table 10 13 Device tag settings Checked item Is the selected item used in Job settings Is the selected item used in DB buffering settings of System setting Is the selected item used in Access error notification setting of Server service settings Is the same name used for Server service name or another Device tag name Is High speed sampling selected in another Device tag settings Corrective action As the error dialog box appears identify the location stop using it for another item and then delete the item
240. cending Descending order order FUNCTIONS j er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 97 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series Data base before sorting ORDER_NO PRODUCT_CODE DELIVERY_DATE 200 707 2007 01 31 201 2007 01 10 202 2007 01 29 203 2007 01 31 204 2007 01 10 205 2007 01 29 206 2007 01 10 207 2007 01 29 208 662 2007 01 31 Sorting conditions in Select sort settings Select sort settings D eel rene aero oe Order 1 ER ATE ASC 2 ORDER_NO DESC Delete row Selected records sorting results ORDER_NO PRODUCT_CODE DELIVERY_DATE 2007 01 10 2007 01 10 2007 01 10 2007 01 29 2007 01 29 2007 01 29 2007 01 31 2007 01 31 1 First selected records are sorted in ascending order of DELIVERY_DATE 2 Then records of the same DELIVERY_DATE are sorted in descending order of ORDER_NO Figure 7 81 Operation example of Select sort settings 7 98 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 7 Exception process setting A click on the Exception process setting button displays the Exception process setting dialog box C
241. cesaeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees App 67 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 For programmable controller system x To configure a system meeting the requirements of the EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporating the Mitsubishi programmable controller EMC and Low Voltage Directives compliant into other machinery or equipment refer to Chapter 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES of the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The CE mark indicating compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives is printed on the rating plate of the programmable controller For the product For the compliance of this product with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives refer to Section 9 1 3 Cables in Chapter 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES of the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection A 15 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL This manual is organized by objective for using the QJ71MES96 MES interface module and MX MESInterface Version1 SW1DNC MESIF E Use this manual with referring to the following 1 Features and software configuration L gt Chapter 1 OVERVIEW Section 1 1 covers the features Section 1 2 covers the MX MESInterface software configuration 2 System configuration applicable systems connection system equipment and operating environment K gt Chapter 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Section 2 1 covers the system configuration Section 2 2 c
242. ch trigger conditions of respective jobs are met Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database Figure 6 6 In the case of load concentration 6 QF a 2 a Zz c When loads are reduced Trigger interval gt Processing time for action irz F r z i OOF e The information in the trigger buffer are read out sequentially causing actions S Ow to be executed HEO e Since the trigger buffer information that was used for action execution is cleared free space is reproduced enabling new trigger buffering a 25 ZE MES interface module 25 lt When loads are reduced D re Trigger buffer Job 1 2 ZS i Action i J execution 6 Job 3 3 Action execution After completing the action of Job 1 1 executes actions of Job 1 2 and 3 3 in this order based on the trigger buffer 5 information Z Le Time Time The numbers 1 to 3 show the order in which trigger conditions of respective jobs are met a Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database le Figure 6 7 When loads are reduced Q LL t2 Hos Sly ire 226 SPo re Oy ei 526 lt tr 202 gt F af ba ann 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 8 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series EJ Point 1 For job operations performed when Trigger buffering is disabled refer to the following L gt Section 6 1 10 1 Operation behavior of jobs 2 Whether a
243. check the execution result of the currently editing Job settings 4 Point In One shot execution of a job settings of Startup logging and DB Buffering are not executed With the edit screen of Job settings displayed perform either of the following e Click a One shot execution e Select Online One shot execution from the menu Selecting One shot execution updates the setting and perform one shot execution of the job ignoring the trigger conditions For Update settings refer to the following LC Section 7 13 2 3 Update settings x Point All of job operations running in the MES interface module are temporarily disabled during one shot execution Check the execution result shown in the View details dialog box which is displayed after the execution For the display of the View details dialog box refer to the following lt gt Section 7 12 5 2 b Detailed log 4 After the one shot execution Update settings is performed Cz Section 7 13 2 3 Update settings T 122 7 12 Online 7 12 6 Executing a job as a one shot task 7 13 Online Remote operation MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC KA series Perform the remote operation for the MES interface module Select Online Remote operation from the menu The Remote operation dialog box is displayed Operate it referring to the following descriptions Remote oper
244. completed Device data lt MES interface module gt Job operation Data Figure 7 54 Handshake operation When Handshake startup turns ON in the sequence program the MES interface module collects tag component values used for the job and executes the job Upon completion of the job execution the MES interface module turns ON Completion notification After confirming that Completion notification is ON turn OFF Handshake startup in the sequence program 4 When Handshake startup turns OFF the MES interface module turns OFF Completion notification causing the handshake operation to be completed 5 After confirming the completion of the handshake operation the next job is executed If an error occurs during job execution Completion notification does not turn ON To detect such an error enable Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution lt 3 Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series Point When accessing the Redundant CPU it is recommended to select Handshake operation for trigger condition ee When selecting other than Handshake operation data separation may occur at 3 system switching of the redundant system Zz b Handshake operation is selectable only in Trigger 1 When
245. cords are not logged Enable detailed logging 7 Disable writing to PLC device e Checked The detailed logging is enabled and thereby detailed records are logged e Not checked The detailed logging is disabled and thereby detailed records are not logged Checked Writing to programmable controller devices is disabled e Not checked Writing to programmable controller devices is enabled Disable writing to database 7 13 Online Remote operation 7 13 4 Changing the job status Checked Writing to the database is disabled e Not checked Writing to the database is enabled MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series The startup log can be checked from Online Working log Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 2 Enable detailed logging is selectable only when Test mode is selected in Job settings Section 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting When Enable detailed logging is checked Enable startup logging is also selected i The detailed log can be checked from Online Working log View details 2 lt gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 3 When marking a check in Disable writing to database the following is executed Execute Communication action set in a job and send rollback at the end When the following items exist an error will occur Server Service se
246. count Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer J To the next page 5 2 5 1 Installation INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION From the previous page MX MESInterface Select the component which wants to be installed MES interface Function configuration tool SWnDNC MESIF is a tool to configure MES interface modules This tool is executed by installing on a setting computer It is possible to be installed on the same computer as DB connection service and setting tool DB connection service and setting tool Install This package has already been installed There is a possibility for improper installation if you execute without uninstalling it OK Severe ix x The OS of this personal computer isn t being supported as a movement environment of this package Severe This package is not in proper operating environment Please install this package after executing EnvMEL Setup Exe from CD ROM P 7 Program Compatibility Assistant This program might not have installed correctly If this program didn t install correctly try reinstalling using settings that are compatible with this version of Windows m Program Setup Launcher L I Publisher InstallShield Software Corporation Location E EnvMEL SETUP EXE Reinstall using recommended settings gt This program installed correctly 6 What settings are applied J To the next page The dialog
247. ction One shot execution of a job Chapter 9 e Validating a job The job is executed when the trigger conditions are met Invalidating a job The job is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met are Makes the time of the MES interface module synchronized with the time of the SNTP Time synchronization i Section 6 3 server computer on the network or a programmable controller CPU No 1 CPU in the function Section 7 6 2 multiple CPU system 3 3 Function List OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 7 Z Q lt Q m O rt a Oo SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool function list Table 3 10 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool function list SLSEC KY series R N Reference Function Description section System Setting Configure the initial settings for the MES interface module Section 7 6 P Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module to the Network settings Section 7 6 1 network Time synchronization m Make the time setting for the MES interface module Section 7 6 2 setting Account setting Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface module Section 7 6 3 DB bufferin
248. cts battery errors Z F Zz 1 Does not detect battery errors Bae 4 Switch 3 status Response monitoring time setting 0 R a 4H 15 to 255 Second Response monitoring time HEO 5to6 System area 5H to 6H 7 Battery status a 0 R Zz 7x 0 Normal 1 Battery error Se 8 to 54 pe es Use prohibited System area gz 8H to 36H 26 A gene IP address 0 R 2 addres 37H to 38x Network 57 to 58 i subnetwork 0 R Section Cc ubnetworl ooo D 3 6 2 _ _ _ _ status area pA ANS a S 59 to 60 Default gateway 0 R 3Bu to 3Cx D 61 to 70 6 Use prohibited System area E 3Du to 461 2 71 to 72 IP address 0 R 47 to 48x a oro Secti n settings status Subnet mask 0 R een 9 49 to 4An 3 6 3 75to7e oe Default gateway 0 R z 4Bu to 4Cn m a 77 to 139 s zE Use prohibited System area o2z 4Dn to 8Bn S20 1 Shows whether or not reading writing is possible R Only reading is possible W Only writing is possible R W Both reading and writing are possible To the next page 528 Bee Wo AO Zz SS oo fi ba ann 3 5 Buffer Memory List 3 19 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 3 15 Buffer memory list Address Initial Reference A Application Decimal Hex value section 140 8Cx 141 Current error Section System area 8Dn area 3 6 4 142 to 145 8En to 911 1
249. cure RPC clients Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including secure RPC servers Recovery console Allow automatic administrative logon Recovery console Allow floppy copy and access to all drives and all folders Shutdown Allow system to be shut down without having to log on Shutdown Clear virtual memory pagefile System cryptography Force strong key protection for user keys stored on the computer System cryptography Use FIPS compliant algorithms for encryption hashing and signing System objects Require case insensitivity for non Windows subsystems System objects Strengthen default permissions of internal system objects e g Symbolic Links System settings Optional subsystems E System settings Use Certificate Rules on Windows Executables for Software Restriction Policies E User Account Control Admin Approval Mode for the Built in Administrator account or of the elevati E User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for standard users E User Account Control Detect application installations and prompt for elevation E User Account Control Only elevate executables that are signed and validated User Account Control Only elevate UlAccess applications that are installed in secure locations User Account Control Run all administrators in Admin Approval Mode User Account Control Switch to the secure desktop when prompting for elevation User Account Control Virtualize file and registry write failu
250. d Figure 1 3 Loads reduction of information system 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC A series 3 Buffering function for reliable data acquisition transmission a Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high no trigger will be missed Trigger buffering function When multiple sets of conditions for data transmission are met in a concentrated manner their data and trigger times can be buffered in the module s internal OVERVIEW memory After the loads are reduced data operations and transmission are executed using the buffered data ao Le 2S MES interface module nO When loads are concentrated Jobt 1 Trigger buffer Job1 1 Trigger conditions Job1 2 Trigger information Tag data time Action b Job3 3 Trigger information Tag data time execution z oO Trigger conditions iL O Executes action of Job 1 1 and o stores trigger information of Job 1 2 2 Trigger conditions and 3 3 in the trigger buffer met Time aft y After loads have been reduced Zw pG When loads are reduced S T 5 en o Action data execution fig gt Job3 3 Action execution After completing the action of Job 1 1 executes actions of Job 1 2 and 3 3 in this order based on the trigger buffer information Database INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Trigger bu
251. d enter n Example An error occurred in Line A n Execute recovery processing 2 mark To input enter INDEX 3 comma When inputting a enclose the entire item in double quotation marks However at the use of Excel double quotations do not need to be entered since they are added automatically when the data is saved in CSV format Example As the temperature was abnormal the machine stopped Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 10 Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions APPENDICES MELSEC TA eries 3 How to see the setting information file formats The following shows how to see the setting information file formats explained starting from the subsequent descriptions The figure below is for explanation and therefore differs from the actual pages APPENDICES Indicates a file name Appendix 2 5 DBBUF CSV 1 File format is Table App 14 File format z Item Description a File name DBBUF CSV Indicates the p Fre contents System sening DB buffering setings gt Section 7 64 Seting hems in DB buffering seting corresponding setting g E f Shows settings corresponding to the label columns and item rows in the file format and explanations for them File format INDEX 2 Label Table App 15 Label Label Description STATUS D
252. d to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows Vista SQL server and Visual Studio are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation Sun Sun Microsystems Java J2ME and J2SE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies VS FlexGrid Pro 8 0J Copyright C 2001 2003 ComponentOne LLC SH NA 080644ENG MES Interface Module MODEL QJ71MES96 U SY E MODEL 13JR95 SH NA 080644ENG I 1001 MEE afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO
253. de List e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem To the next page 10 16 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module MELSEC A series se XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ E QO O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0B91h MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name DB transaction status error Description The DB transaction status is invalid 0B92h DB transaction start status error The DB transaction start status is invalid 0B93h 0B94h to OB9Dh OB9Eh DB transaction end status error System error Database connection error OB9Fh Message reception error OBAOh Received message data error The DB transaction end status is invalid An Ethernet communication error has occurred Action e Check the status of the database e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct Check if the ODBC setting is correct OBAth to OBASh System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OBA6h Wait for DB access program execution co
254. device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurre
255. ding on the Error code however Database Message and subsequent data cannot be output According to the error code confirm the error details and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 2 2 Access log of DB Connection Service a SELECT Table 8 17 SELECT Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Success No of selected records Output succeeded log format Henie Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When Aen 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 SQL lt SELECT COL from TABLE gt Success 1 succeede Example gt enis 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20600023 SID 00000001 SQL lt SELECT COLL from TABLE gt Failed i Database Message 0x00000388 Oracle ODBC Ora ORA 00904 COLL invalid identifier b UPDATE Table 8 18 UPDATE Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Success No of updated records Output succeeded log format When failed Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When WETE 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 SQL lt UPDATE TABLE SET COL 1 gt Success 1 u Example Goh When failed 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20600023 SID 00000001 SQL lt UPDATE TABLE SET COL COL gt Failed i Database Message 0x000006ba Or
256. dix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV To the next page App 32 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Table App 38 Setting item Mi AG Q series ELS From the previous page Item Description Setting value Comparison When VALUE is selected with TYPE and Any number or character ariso COMPAREEVAL j VALUE is selected with COMPARETYPE string constant value When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Handshake When HANDSHAKE is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 HANDSHAKESTARTTAG startup Tag When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Handshak When HANDSHAKE i lected with TYPE 1 to 256 gpg ANOSHAKESTARTELE an one eni lig selected wi e MENT P When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Component Completion When HANDSHAKE is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 HANDSHAKEENDTAG arti notification Tag When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Completion When HANDSHAKE is selected with TYPE 1 to 256 HANDSHAKEENDELEM ie notification ENT When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Component 4 The setting value for the day of the week is expressed in decimal numbers For the setting value contents check with the method below 1 Convert a decimal number to a binary number 2 Each binary bit is the setti
257. dress 192 168 3 3 z O Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 z ig Default gateway g a nO no O z Figure 7 20 Network settings g 5 a N Table 7 22 Setting items in Network settings Item Description f Set the IP address of the MES interface module in decimal notation IP address required Default 192 168 3 3 oF Set the subnet mask in decimal notation lt i Subnet mask required All devices on the same network must use the same subnet mask 2 T lt Default 255 255 255 0 7 g a Set the default gateway in decimal notation Default gateway One default gateway can be registered for the MES interface module Default No setting EJ Point Before entering values in Network settings consult your network administrator the person who plans networking and manages IP addresses INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS im 6 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting 7 19 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting Make the time setting for the MES interface module The time used in the MES interface module is obtained from the SNTP server computer or programmable controller CPU CPU No 1 in the case of a multiple CPU system Point To synchronize the
258. duplication Example When Length of array is set to 4 with block setting Only the start device device in n 1 need be set Devices in and after n 2 are configured automatically Array setting Use array Length of array 4 C series G block AY AY Component List n Heol ef Component name CPUname Device Datatype Deviceln 1 Component_4 ControlCPU D0 Singe word D24 2 Component _B ControlCPU D1 D2 Double word D25 D26 3 Component_C ControlCPU D3 D7 String 10 D27 D31 n 1 n 2 n 3 n A 5 EE E Component_A DO D8 D16 D24 7 1 s gt Component_B D1 to D2 D9 to D10 D17 to D1825 to D26 10 i 7 m Component_C D3 to D7 D11 to D15 D19 to D23 D27 to D31 it fe T Block j l I array block size of tag components in project 3 No of statistical processings in project O No of device points intag 32 Figure 7 34 When block is selected E Point When device types are different block cannot be selected 7 42 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting Configure the settings for assigning programmable controller CPU devices to tags a Up to 256 components can be set for one tag i Note that the maximum number of components available for one project is 4096 2 Adding a component
259. e eames Section 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module Section 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings Figure 4 2 MES interface module start up procedure 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4 4 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS A e wW ao e a WW Q x a fa Zz LEF B RE E W eo nao INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 5 4 2 3 4 5 MELSEC IA series As necessary execute the self diagnostic test for checking the communication function and hardware of the MES interface module lt gt Section 4 6 Self diagnostics Test For a battery refer to the following gt Section 4 8 Battery lt gt Section 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery lt gt Section 4 10 Removing Battery for Storage If an account is forgotten and therefore connection to the MES interface module cannot be made eject the CompactFlash card from the MES interface module then follow the procedure in the figure above 3 and subsequent procedure For details on how to eject the CompactFlash card refer to the following gt Section 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card For details on how to insert eject the CompactFlash card and precautions for use
260. e View working log View details LC Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module b When Test mode is selected The following are performed in the test mode Operations other than the following are identical to the actual operations e Startup data are logged e Detailed data are logged e No data are written to the programmable controller CPU e No data are written to the database 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job it The job is activated when the trigger condition value is changed from false to true i Trigger conditions Combinati The job starts when the trigger conditions ceed anit changes from False to true Trigger 1 Disable z O z 5 z pE Trigger 2 Disable z nZ cas Figure 7 44 Trigger conditions Table 7 44 Setting items in Trigger conditions S m Item Description m Combination Selects conjunction of Trigger 1 and 2 2 Trigger 1 Selects Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Selects Trigger 2 af Zz B22 zZ W SE u A O20 a 28 ZE e4 sg 2 23 Yn rA O O rA R 3 2 4 8 bE EOg 25 226 ZrO re QO i 526 te Ww FAG Zz SS oo fi ba ann 7 10 Job Setting T 59 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNC
261. e O trigger condition setting ST Iez B22 zZ W FSE woo Nao 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card Format the CompactFlash card installed in the MES interface module CompactFlash card operation INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Execute Figure 7 107 CompactFlash card operation Q Check the Format box and click the Execute button FUNCTIONS Executing the formatting deletes all of the CompactFlash card data E Point When the CompactFlash card is formatted after the system operation the MES interface function settings are cleared Read out the MES interface function settings to MES Interface Function Configuration Tool before formatting the card Section 7 12 3 Reading the MES interface function settings j rar fa fe o eA o9 6 E ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 13 Online Remote operation T 131 7 13 7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Q series 7 14 Help The product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and the Connection to MELFANSweb screen can be displayed 1 Product information Select Help Product information from the menu Point The following operation also displays the product information of the MES interface Function Configuration Tool
262. e gt Constant 45 Trigger 1 Handshake operation x Wo Compfhent Handshake startup Process1 Start Completion notification _ Process1 Completion gt T 2 Label Table App 36 Label Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Trigger conditions 1 Trigger 1 2 Trigger 2 CONDITION1 1 to CONDITION64 2 i CONDITION64 2 t Indicates 1 Trigger 1 2 Trigger 2 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 App 31 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 37 Setting item MELSEC A series Item Description Setting value Disable NONE Time specification startup SCHEDULING a Fixed scan interval TIMER TYPE Condition type Value monitoring startup VALUE At module startup UNITSTART Handshake operation HANDSHAKE When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 1000 to 9999 YEAR Year When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 1to 12 MONTH Month l i When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 1 to 31 DAY Day i i When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE i 1 Ka WEEK Day of the week l l Gio 127 Decimal When other
263. e refer to the relevant section of each item a fa fe o eA o9 ra toe EZO Z5r 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 3 Screen Structure T 7 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 3 Deleting an item Selecting an item to be deleted and performing either of the following will delete the item e Click Delete item e Select Edit Delete item from the menu Point 1 When the selected item is currently used for another item it cannot be deleted As the error dialog box appears identify the location stop using it for another item and then delete the item 2 The top item listed under Access target CPU settings default name ControlCPU cannot be deleted 4 Replicating an item Selecting an item and choosing Edit Replicate item from the menu replicates the item 2 When the item is added properly it is automatically selected and the edit screen is switched to the one for the added item Point Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting type refer to the relevant section of each item 5 Moving an item An item can be moved by a drag and drop operation J Point 1 Items can be moved within each of Access target CPU settings Device tag settings Server service settings
264. e Click p Product information The Product information dialog box of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is displayed Product information MES interface Function configuration tool Yer 1 004 Copyright C 2005 2006 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation All Rights Reserved This product is licensed to Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co ProductID Warning This product is protected by the copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law Figure 7 108 Product information dialog box 2 Connection to MELFANSweb Select Help Connection to MELFANSweb from the menu The MELFANSweb page is displayed Online manuals and other information can be viewed T 132 7 14 Help MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 15 Precautions z This section provides precautions for using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool g ag lu gt O 1 When deleting an item Deleting an item such as Access target CPU settings or Device tag settings is not allowed when the selected item is used for another item such as Job settings As the error dialog box appears identify the location stop using it for another item and then delete the item oO fe irc MX
265. e Format CSV File Format Files of type Select CSV file SYSTEM CSV 7 4 7 Printing a setting information file To print setting details of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool use a CSV file that includes exported project settings setting information file For exporting CSV files refer to the following C gt Section 7 4 6 Exporting a CSV file Print the setting information file with a tool that is capable of printing text files T 16 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 6 Exporting a CSV file MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 5 Project Setting Set the information on the project project name comments g x W P 5 R ace gt 1 Click the project root in the Edit items tree 2 The project setting area is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen Set the following items z E Q New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit Yiew Online Help 3 ose 4 e AmE Bz SS NewProject A 2 QP system setting Project name NewProject H Access target CPU settings Device tag settings LAR Server service settings E Job settings no Zz O z Ta 5 Lu A N g Lu Zw FSE woo nao Figure 7 18 Project setting INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Table 7 20 Setting items in Project setting Item Description Project name Enter a project name Up to 32 characters Enter comments about the project as neces
266. e IP address belongs to the x 10 29 Invalid program execution request 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service MES interface module To the next page 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0x20700011 0x20700012 0x20700020 MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error description and cause System error ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed Failed to log on in program execution Corrective action Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set correct user name and password in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Check if the user account is invalid or not by the administrative tool of Windows e Check if the setting is forcing the user to enter password at next logon by the administrative tool of Windows Check if the user password is expired or not by the administrative tool of Windows 0x20700021 ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed Failed to load user profile during program execution No user profile for Windows may have been created With the user name and password set in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool log on Windows once and reexecute The load applied to the computer may have been too high
267. e MES interface module 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A series 7 Troubleshooting on the CompactFlash card Table 10 24 Troubleshooting on the CompactFlash card Symptom Settings were erased while the power was off Checked item Is there a problem with the type of CompactFlash card Corrective action e Replace with one of the CompactFlash cardsshown in the following section lt gt Section 2 3 1 CompactFlash card sold separately Was the power turned off or the control CPU reset during writing to the CompactFlash card Stop file access before turning off the power or resetting the control CPU L gt Section 4 7 2 1 Stopping file access Format the CompactFlash card again L7 Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card Is the CompactFlash card inserted Eject the CompactFlash card once and a correctly insert it again 3 Stop file access before turning off the g power or resetting the control CPU Cannot recognize the CompactFlash card Was the power turned off or the control L gt Section 4 7 2 1 Stopping file CPU reset during writing to the access CompactFlash card Format the CompactFlash card again L gt Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card 2 Z 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 46 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module se XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES
268. e added Oracle 11g i 1 05F or later o Microsoft SQL Server 2008 12012 or later Z Records can be deleted from databases 8 ae Delete was added to the options of the Communication Section 7 11 1 a action in the Jog settings 3 Items in the Edit items tree can be moved within each Be Section 7 3 4 setting area Functions that are not related to serial No or software version APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface App lt 2 Appendix 1 1 Addition of new functions APPENDICES MELSEC IA series Appendix 1 2 Operations of former versions This section describes the operations of the former MES interface module and MX MES Interface versions 1 DB buffering function When a job for which auto resend is selected cannot send SQL texts to the database the DB buffering is as described below a For an MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier Processing Q When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or failure of the database server computer or database software DB buffering is started after detection of a timeout 2 After start of DB buffering whether SQL texts can be sent to the database or not is checked at each job activation If the system has not been recovered from network disconnection or failure of the database server computer or database sof
269. e battery g x W Table 4 10 Battery life Battery lif Power on time 2 ot A ji Actual service value Guaranteed time after battery ratio 1 Guaranteed value 3 4 Reference value error A 26 000 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours O 0 z 2 96 years 5 years 62 days ee 30 37 142 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours fi 2 4 23 years 5 years 62 days gt 6 50 43 800 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours 3 5 years 5 years 62 days 70 43 800 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours 5 years 5 years 62 days o 43 800 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours O 100 r 5 years 5 years 62 days O i The power on time ratio denotes the ratio of power on time in a day 24 hours tu If the power is ON for 12 hours and OFF for 12 hours the power on time ratio is 50 x 2 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C which is calculated based on characteristic values of manufacturer supplied memories SRAM and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature range of 25 and 75 C operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C 3 The actual service value reference value represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at storage ambient temperature of 40 C This value is intended for reference only as it varies with characteristics of the memory 4 In either of the following status the guaranteed time after power off is 3 minutes The battery connector is disconnected The battery lead wire is broken
270. e functions of the items are listed 2 and the subsequent descriptions a gt C MX MESInterface Products manufactured Windows MES Interface Function DB Connection User created application Configuration Tool application SNTP server by other companies DB interface XML processing PAE a function function function Figure 3 5 Function summary 3 10 3 3 Function List 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 2 MES interface module function list Table 3 9 MES interface module function list aed Reference Function Description section Section 6 1 DB interface function Executes access to the database in units of jobs Section 7 10 Section 7 11 Collects device data of the programmable controller CPUs on the network in units of tags By allocating database fields to tag components the DB interface function enables the Section 6 1 3 Tag function following T Section 7 8 Database value reading writing Reading writing of programmable controller CPU device data specified with tag components Trigger monitoring Monitors values such as the time and tag values and when the trigger condition Section 6 1 4 SQL text transmission Communication action Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high jobs are executed without missing any trigger Automatically creates an SQL text and communicates with the dat
271. e module Error name System error Switch setting error Description A switch setting error was detected in the hardware test Action e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the intelligent function module switch setting Conduct the hardware test again 0181h ROM check sum error A ROM error was detected in the hardware test 0182h RAM test error A RAM error was detected in the hardware test Conduct the hardware test again 0190h Timeout error 0191h Communication error 0192h Comparison error 0193h In frame position error An error occurred in the self loopback test Hardware error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0200h to 0203h 0210h 0300h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0301h 0400h to 0402h Setting file read error System error No CompactFlash card has been installed Failed to read out the setting file The setting file is corrupted Install a CompactFlash card Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0480h 0481h 0490h to 0493h CF
272. e module after requesting the server computer for value writing to or reading from the database or for a program execution When a timeout occurs the connection with the MES interface module is disconnected and job execution is canceled EJ Point Set a value to DB access timeout so that the relation with a value set in Connection timeout in MES Interface Configuration Tool is as follows MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL e e Connection timeout value lt DB access timeout value z O oO Mn Zz Z Q i m a 38 ae lu og QZ ZE W Ww nn 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 16 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC KEY series 3 Limit IP addresses permit to connect a Specify whether or not to set the IP addresses permitted to connect By checking the Limit IP addresses permit to connect box connection is only permitted from the MES interface module with the set IP address At least one IP address setting is required for this and up to 64 IP addresses can be set When not checking the box connection is permitted from any MES interface module b When selecting Limit IP addresses permit to connect set the IP addresses with connection permission 1 Adding an IP address with connection permission Q Set the following items then click the Ada button Table 8 4 Setting items when Limit IP addresses permit to connect
273. e module date and time will be added automatically Section 7 11 1 4 c When Insert is selected for Action type 5 Memo type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used For Microsoft Access 2007 h About variables Variables can be used as component values for each action or as condition values of Select Update Delete conditions The following table lists data types of variables and those of assignable fields If the type of a variable does not match the data type of its substitution target field an error occurs resulting in cancellation of job execution Up to 64 variables can be set for one job 4 Point 1 A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held 2 The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value of zero 3 If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component when a substitution tag is the tag component Type conversion to tag componet error is displayed Check the type of the source and type of the tag component lt 3 Section 7 15 4 Type mismatch Table 7 68 Data types of variables and those of assignable fields Data type of assignable field Oracle 8i SQL Server Values variable names that PAA sa al can be entered in Component Oracle 9i 2000 2005 Access 2000 Wonderware Oracle 10g 2008 Access 2003 2007 Historian Oracle 11g MSDE 2000 Yes No type Byte type are Integer type
274. e name Up to 16 characters Server type Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed 9 lt L Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection z 2 IP address va es oq Service is installed z z Port No Set a port number of the server computer z 9 Range 1024 to 65535 Default 5112 2z Set a user name used to access the server computer User name Up to 30 characters Password Confirm Set a password used to access the server computer password Up to 30 characters Data source name Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed Up to 30 characters Database type Select the type of the database server Access error notification setting Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status Connection timeout In case a connection error occurs on the network between the MES interface module and the server computer set a timeout time during which the MES interface module will detect the error Range 1 to 180 seconds Default 10 seconds 7 9 Server Service Setting 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting T 51 FUNCTIONS j er fa fe o eA o9 ra coe EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 1 3 4 MELSEC IA series Server service name Up to 16 characters
275. e numbers 1 to 3 correspond to those shown in the above Job settings Auto resend area in DB buffer o Zz O O Z 5 Le Job 1 Auto Job 3_ SQL TEXT Auto 1 Job 6_SQL TEXT Manual 8 Job 2 Auto Job 1_ SQL TEXT Auto Job 4 SQL TEXT Manual u Z Job 3 Auto Job 2_SQL TEXT Auto Job 5_SQL TEXT Manual 5 Lu A done Manual Manual resend area in DB buffer Job 10_SQL TEXT Manual ZE Job 5 Manual E E ee Job 11_SQL TEXT Manual Q22 Job 6 Manual _Job 6_SQL TEXT Manual ae Job 4_SQL TEXT Manual Job 5_SQL TEXT Manual Job 10 Manual 2 x Job 11 Manual ae Hee 3 62 Zuo Figure 6 15 Manually resending data es mo ti AnNa 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 18 6 1 9 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Kel series EJ Point If any of the jobs for which manual resend is selected exists in the DB buffer it remains there after recovery until manual resend is executed 6 Clearing the DB buffer The DB buffer is cleared by the following e After writing the MES interface function setting to the MES interface module performing Update settings powering OFF and then ON or resetting the programmable controller CPU L z Section 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings e Clear request from MES interface function configuration tool Remote operation Section 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering e Clear request from
276. e operation status of the MES interface function MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC KA series 7 13 3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution Connection with the server computer set in Server service settings which is made at the fi P f gt time of the previous job execution can be checked i The following explains the display of Connection result of previous job execution Connection result of previous job execution z O Server service name Result a zd DB Connected 5 O m2 DZ J cas ip v fe z O m Figure 7 102 Connection result of previous job execution m N Table 7 88 Items displayed for Result of Connection result of previous job execution Display Description 9 e W Normally connected to the server computer at the time of the BES Connected OOF previous job execution BS Not connected to the database server computer This is displayed y g a Disconnected when normal connection could not be established at the previous job execution and thereby the line is disconnected Point INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION e The display of the connection result is not changed until the next job is executed to communicate the database server computer e The result of the one shot communication with the database server computer is not reflected FUNCTIONS j m 5 a im Z n w al Q O d z O 65 O oL
277. e server Database computer ma o_o DB Connection Service MES interface function When an access is made When SQL text execution is failed cor SQL failure log Figure 8 1 ODBCconnection function Receives SQL text from the MES interface function on the MES interface module 2 Accesses the database via ODBC interface and executes the SQL text Sends the SQL text execution results to the MES interface module 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 2 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION e e z O O Mn Z Z Q i m a 38 ae lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Kel series 2 Program execution function The program execution function executes a program on the application server computer upon request from the MES interface module The following shows operation on the application server computer Application server Program computer DB Connection Service When an access is made Access log Figure 8 2 Program execution function Receives program execution requests from the MES interface function o
278. e to true when the condition is met starts a job The following setting options are available as conditions for start Disable Does not start the job by a trigger condition e Time specification startup Starts the job at the specified time Specified time period startup Starts the job at the specified intervals Unit Seconds Value monitoring startup Compares the actual tag component value with the condition value tag component value or constant value at every sampling times and starts the job when the condition is met e Handshake operation Starts the job on request from the programmable controller CPU Completion of job execution can be reported to the programmable controller CPU At module startup Starts the job only once when the MES interface module starts up Two kinds of conditions can be used in combination for starting a job For the trigger monitoring function setting refer to the following Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions T ag Component Value monitoring startup Trigger se monitoring conditions met Job startup Handshake operation Job Time specification startup Specified time eriod startup 1st of every month 9 00 00 3600 seconds Figure 6 4 Trigger monitoring function 6 5 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series Point 1 The job can be sta
279. ea composed of two words a count is stopped at FFFFFFFFh 4294967295 3 6 1 Module status area The ON OFF status of the MES interface module LED setting status of the intelligent function module switches and battery status are stored Refer to the following for details LCF Section 4 3 Parts Names Section 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 3 6 2 Network connection status area The status of network connection to which the MES interface module is currently connected is stored For network connection refer to the following C Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting 3 6 3 Network settings status area This network settings status of the MES interface module is stored For network settings refer to the following C gt Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting 3 24 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 1 Module status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 3 6 4 Current error area 1 Error code Buffer memory address 140 a An error code which indicates the error contents is stored i For error codes refer to the following amp C7 Section 10 2 Error Code List 2 Time Buffer memory address 142 to 145 The time when the error occurred is stored in BCD code aie b15 to b8 b7 to bO 3 Year 00x to 99x The last Buffer memory address 142 Month 011 to 12H two digits of the year 143 Hour 00H to 23x Day 01H to 31H 144 Second 00H to 59x Minu
280. eady been opened Change the server port No with DB Connection The service is stopped Service Setting Tool 10 Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative explaining a detailed description 11 of the problem 101 The computer ran out of memory while reading the Terminate any unnecessary applications setting file Add more memory to the personal computer e Reinstall the DB Connection Service to the 102 The setting file path is too long directory whose path name is shorter 103 The setting file name indicates the directory f f Reinstall the DB Connection Service 104 The setting file could not be opened To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 1 0 22 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel series From the previous page Table 10 5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector 10 23 Error code Error description and cause Corrective action Terminate other applications and make the 105 Description of the setting file is not correct setting again with DB Connection Service Setting Tool 106 Parameter specification of the setting file is not correct 107 The version of the setting file is not correct 108 The server port No setting is not correct 109 The server port No setting is out of range 110 The DB access timeout time sett
281. ed Bit ON One or more data accumulated 0 Not accumulated Other than the above 4 Other than 0 Utilization of DB buffer area Unit Stored as an integer value Digits after decimal point are truncated T 30 7 6 System Setting 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 DB buffering capacity Range 16MB to 512MB Default 64MB a Set the capacity used for DB buffering out of the entire CompactFlash card capacity within the following range Maximum capacity CompactFlash card capacity 32M bytes Note that a sufficient free space is needed for the CompactFlash card OVERVIEW b A half of the DB buffering capacity is used as the auto resend area and another half as the manual resend area CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 31 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Q series 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting Set a connection channel to the access target CPU The set CPU name is used in Device tag settings Q Double clicking Access target CPU settings in the Edit items tree displays relevant items
282. ed as a standard to Windows 2000 Server Windows Server 2003 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS 1 64 bit versions of Windows xP Professional cannot be used 2 When using Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2000 Professional ServicePack2 or later is required 3 Installing MX MESInterface requires the Administrator s authority 4 The following functions cannot be used If any of the following functions is used this product may not operate normally MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Application startup in Windows compatibility mode User simple switching e Remote desktop Large Fonts Detailed setting in the Display Properties 5 There are some restrictions when using this database lt 3 Section 2 6 2 Precautions for using database DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 4 Operating Environment 2 12 2 4 2 Server computer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA series 6 Check the version for the corresponding MES interface module and MX MESInterface 37 Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface 7 For Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 at least 15GB of free space is required 8 For Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 an authority of USER or higher must be used 9 To use a relational database a license based on the number of MES interfaces is usually required Varies depending on the relational database type and license
283. ed records indicated as 0 in the access log of DB Connection Service Was the relevant device value manipulated in the programmable controller CPU e Check if Select Update Delete conditions are met Do not manipulate the device value in the programmable controller CPU at the time of writing from the MES interface module Is the number of databases set for the database server computer sufficient 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom Correct the set number of databases or change the number of Server service settings items to the set number of databases 3 Section 7 9 Server Service Setting One database connection must be used for one item of Server service settings To the next page 10 42 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module es XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ E O O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom Job will not start up 10 43 Checked item Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log L gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Corrective action e If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List Did the Trigger conditions change from false to true completely Correct
284. eeeaeneeaeneeeeee For tag components constants or variables refer to the following lt gt 4 f About tag components 4 g About constants e 4 h About variables eeeeeeeesoseeeoeeeeoeoeeoeceeseeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoe ee ee 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 6 Select sort settings When Select or MultiSelect is selected in Action type set conditions for sorting the records to be selected multi selected z If multiple sort conditions are set the database will process the conditions in order starting from the top In Select sort settings settings of up to eight lines are allowed for each communication action 2 5 a Select sort settings D 6 Field name a 2 O z Z n Figure 7 80 Select sort settings a Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name for records to be selected E For characters that can be used for field names and table names refer to the Zu following L gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names etc TA b Order Set the order of sorting the selected records Table 7 70 Setting items for Order Item Description Sorts the records so that the specified fields are arranged in ascending INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Ascending order order 3 Sorts the records so that the specified fields are arranged in des
285. eeeeeceeeeeeetieeeeeeeiieeeeeetaeeeerenaa 4 15 AG Battery ara A actus aaenedeshacedesvas AE EE AAAS AEEA OOE A TA 4 20 A Battery spocheoN Saa a E E EE EE E EEEE Aai 4 20 4 8 2 MOUNTING or baten oes a a teed vedi evade die opens tenella 4 20 4 3 3 gt Battery replacementcieicecsccesstteg devs sangacdevesen dates sath EEO A EREE ccoeartnd MYT AA 4 21 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery 2 0 cece cece eee etne eee eeeetneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeetiaeeeeetenateeenaes 4 24 4 10 Removing Battery for Storage eee eee tnee etre entree eee e ee eee tae eee ee eaaeee eee naeeeeeeniaeeeeeenieeeeeee 4 25 A 10 CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 5 1to5 9 Delt maalata a teeta ctecevity sk dota tents di Peau sae eh Mlain tr akeni tnt amet tanes dee etre ett Sten 5 1 9 2 Uninstallation 2 ski eae iis Sai ee eee ie a ei ae 5 7 CHAPTER6 FUNCTIONS 6 1to 6 25 6 1 _ DB lntenace FUnCuon esse ce freh oes T ad Pesus lea acedaatedaceaten nace adesascnad een toed See cedar eetaaasee nese 6 1 6 1 1 DB interface function Operation c cccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeecaeceeeceeeeeeesceaaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseesecsacsaeaeeeeeees 6 1 6 1 2 Job execution procedure ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeecaececeeeeeesedeeceaanaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeececaneaeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 6 2 62123 gt TAJIN etea sahtee nega A O E A E AE A Aa E E a 6 4 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function aessseessssssessnnnessrnnesstnnnaennnnasdinnnneaatananaadannaasnnaaadd
286. eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeenaeeeeteaes 7 77 Tei SOD SStING ACHONS zich maraa San ywa auth toad sanatesees inetd taeves aa T a 7 78 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication Action 0 cee eee eeeeteneeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeetnaeeeeesenaaes 7 82 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation ACtiON eee eee eee eetee eee eeeeee eee ee eaaeeeeeetaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeaes 7 108 TAZ ONIN ters decevidee aged el petit noha eee tested a ean aR eve ead aie god nied 7 112 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module e cece ee eteee cette eteteee eee teeeeeeetteeeeeetneeeeeenea 7 112 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings 0 eceeeeeeceeee eee eeneee eee teeeeeeeeeneeeeeetneeeeeeeea 7 113 7 12 3 Reading the MES interface function settings 0 ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeteeeeeetneeeeeeeea 7 115 7 12 4 Verifying the MES interface function settings ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeseaas 7 115 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 0 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaas 7 116 7 12 6 Executing a job as a one shot task eee ecceeeeeeeeeeree teeter tees eee teeeeeeteeeeeeetneeeeeetneeeeeeeea 7 122 7 13 Online Remote Operation ccccccccecceeeeeeececeececeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaaeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecececaeeaeeeeeeeeeesenensaeees 7 123 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function eeeessseseeeeeeeerrsse
287. eeeeeeteeesenes App 5 Appendix 2 1 ASCII code table enai nar a l EaR a aad dap pa riada iia ea adi ideari App 5 Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc App 6 Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc cccceeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeees App 7 Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names eCtc ccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteees App 7 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 8 Appendix 3 1 Setting information files list ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeenieaeeeeeees App 8 Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions cccceeeeeeeeeeesetteeeeeees App 9 Appendix 3 3 SYSTEM CSV riii aie neds eee i iieaoe a aaan dedan aaaea a aA aaraa a a App 12 Appendix 3 4 ACCOUNT CSV ideaa aea eea a Ea aa a e ener a a aei leaden erento App 14 Appendix 3 5 DST CSV a a el el aa aa aa aaa a a ee aaa eee iia ies ea AEAEE aa aana it App 16 Appendies 6 DBB UR OOV tat rae a E gb sh al tas Tala E eE App 18 Appendix 3 7 CPULCOV eran eet TEA te agate et a eee Te AA Mice a eaten Sze ed ie ts App 19 Append S g TAG CSV vite Mattie vet pnees iid aaa led tack hal ete setetlah poke a a aa aa e waked E a App 22 Appendix 3 9 COMPONENT CSV c cccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeee
288. eeeees 7 112 Trigger buffering c cceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees A 21 PUNCUON assets ete eis eee E 6 7 SOWING ee e E A 7 56 SlatUS fantasti E A T T 7 131 Trigger condition eaeeeeeeeeeeerreceerresrens A 21 7 59 At module startup cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 66 Disables ain Taire dee a a aR 7 61 Handshake operation c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 66 Specified time period startup ee 7 63 Time specification startup 0 0eees 7 62 Value monitoring startup 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 63 Trigger monitoring function 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 5 U Update action sr ain a e a aR 7 86 Update Settings eceieceeeeeeteteeeeeetttieeeerees 7 126 WIRE arenaer A plat Aar A 20 9 4 V Vara bles i Pen a aaa A 22 7 94 7 110 AE EE cases ish E A A E 7 115 Ww WORN OG 2 3 erei EAN 7 116 WV CCG snes tik Sn EAE E AT 7 113 X XML processing 0 ceeceeeeeeeeeeees A 20 6 23 9 1 Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas locatio
289. eeeseeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeeseneaeeeeeeeaaaees 2 1 2 1 2 System configuration for installation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeaeeeeseeaeees 2 2 2 1 3 System configuration for initial setup 2 eee ee eeeeeee eee eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeetenaaeeeeeeeaaeees 2 3 2 1 4 System configuration for Operation siese siss earner ieren erintene KENEAN KERANNA ARAKEA ERTAK RNT 2 4 2 2 Applicable SyStemnss ssc 140 asset rode ave Acs aa e a st dade a daaa Satan tesa nn Aaaa aaa aeaa dards tiated aA Taa EE 2 5 2 3 Connection System Equipment ccecccececcecceceeeeeeeeeee cee eaaeaeeceeeeeeeeseseacaaaaacaeeeseeeeeeeeetesnsncaeeseees 2 8 2 4 Operating ENVirOnMent aerer dies foe haeseces hs Late cob hae dee eee ed aah es 2 10 2 4 1 Configuration COMPUTER moriria eaat ieai iia Ne adebiievh andendvbnantven 2 10 24 22 Server COMPULEM eead aaae A aaae aa E e aae cata ade prada AE e edana raae aaae indiaas 2 12 2 4 3 Computer for developing XML processing applications ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetceeeeeeeeees 2 13 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial NUMDEL cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeesaneeeeeeaaas 2 14 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration ccc cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeneeeeeneaes 2 17 2 6 1 Precautions for using Redundant CPU sssssssessssserssseerrssstirttssttnrnssttntnssttnnnnastttnnssttennenant 2 17
290. een Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 8 13 BAA Sareen StU U eases a aAA aed eis ava eng AE E A EER EEE TEATA 8 13 BAZ Monu CONTIQUIFATION ees eer EE E E EE Guten E EEE Ea R Eaa 8 14 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool ec cceceeeeeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 8 15 3 6 Importing EXpOrting FeS entei ea E E AEE EE E 8 20 8 7 Help E AEE OA EEE TE aaa ed ne vias eat A a eae ah el da ee ceeds 8 22 8 8 Output Log Speciwicatlons ece oei a aa a a oats ands ee ae aa aa a 8 23 8 8 1 AcCeSs l0g fcie dilenin eh Le eee EN EEA ee edie ad ed 8 24 8 8 2 gt SQL TallurelOgicxe isa eric elles Rin ee e ad baie ee eee 8 28 CHAPTERS XML MESSAGE FORMAT 9 1to9 6 9 1 XML Message Format Definition accer a a a a a a 9 2 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method ccececeeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeseecececiceeaeeeeeeeeeess 9 4 9 2 1 XML message format sending Method cece settee eee eete eee ee eaeeeeeeteeeeeetaeeeeeeneeeeee 9 4 9 2 2 Sample program suisse eer Sane eee Hee Ld peed a ee aden Madde evden 9 5 CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 1 to 10 46 VOM 1 Enron GOdeS tina ic ice sce oe ean elt ete a cette rane Mean Za hte A EE 10 2 10 1 1 Finding an error COdC steel nce k id ata etna sdard tes a T a a 10 2 10 12 Error typis cinere ake ela nan da icin dee ed a a ae 10 3 iis System Monti unninn a He
291. elect Update or Delete is selected for Action type The number of records to be multi selected is greater than the number of arrays set in Array setting of the tag when MultiSelect is selected for Action type Multi select setting button When MultiSelect is selected detailed settings can be configured by clicking this Generated SQL text Displays SQL text that is generated in the currently editing Communication action No of fields in project Displays the total number of fields in the project Tag component data length in job Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job t button Selecting a row and clicking the t button reverses the order between the selected row and the one immediately above it The t button cannot be clicked on the first row l button Delete row button Selecting a row and clicking the ES button reverses the order between the selected row and the one immediately below it The l button cannot be clicked on the last row Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row Insert a whole tag button All of the tag set in Device tag settings are inserted into Tag and Component Select a row into which data are inserted and choose a tag in a list box next to the Insert a whole tag button Clicking the Insert a whole tag but
292. en the message showing the completion of the 2 ug Ow woo uninstallShield will remove the software MES interface removal is displayed click the OK_ button noO function configuration tool MXx MESInterface from your computer Please wait while each of the following components is removed ol Shared program files Standard program files Folder items Program folders Program directories Program registry entries ja 25 5 EJ Sz eZ 23 Uninstall completed Some elements could not be removed You should manually remove items related to the application Details l O zZz R DB connection service and Setting tool MESInterface DBConnector has been removed from your system It is recommended that you restart your machine to remove files that were in use during uninstall al Q O e 5 When the above screen is displayed restart the personal computer lt 5 Xz When reinstalling after uninstallation be sure to restart the personal computer Eo3 i pon If not the DB Connection Service and Setting tool may not operate normally after reinstallation wo l End Zz Om 528 lt tr WO FAIS Zz OSE alm ann 5 2 Uninstallation 5 9 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series CHAPTER 6 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the MES interface functions of the MES interface module The MES interface functions are set using MES Interface Function Confi
293. ensation time 3 minutes Battery replacement Y Power OFF the programmable controller y Remove the MES interface module from the base unit Open the MES interface module cover MES interface module connector Remove the battery in use from the holder connector Insert a new battery into the holder in the right orientation and connect the lead connector to the connector Y Close the MES interface module cover A Yy Mount the MES interface module to the base unit MES interface module Power ON the programmable controller Monitor buffer memory address 7 and check the ON OFF status OFF Battery failure of the MES interface End module Figure 4 20 Battery replacement procedure 4 23 4 8 Battery 4 8 3 Battery replacement 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery This section explains operation without mounting a battery to the MES interface module OVERVIEW 1 Shutdown operation required when the programmable controller is powered OFF while the MES interface module is operating without battery If the file protection battery is not mounted to the MES interface module make sure to perform shutdown operation when the programmable controller is powered OFF When the programmable controller is powered OFF without mounting the
294. enteeeeeeeeeaaes 8 5 Daylight saving Summer time eee A 22 FUNGHON esect ceeaeesi a nia becies a dean oie 6 25 SOWING ean ee ea 7 21 DB access timM Out cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 8 16 DB bargiera A R AE an A 20 Clear processing esseseeeeeeeeees 7 29 7 130 FUNCION e er ae ea eee Tanai 6 12 Manual resend processing 0 7 28 7 130 Operation online eee eeeeeeeeeees 7 129 7 130 Setting stewed eet 7 27 1 76 Delete action ccccccccccecceeeeeeseseeeetneeeeeeeeees 7 91 Deleting an iteM ee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeeeenaees 7 8 Detailed l g sriain eandis 7 118 Device tag Tag A 21 6 4 7 36 Disabling the job ccceeeeeeeeeee 7 57 7 128 9 1 E Enabling the job ccceeeeeeeeee 7 57 7 128 9 1 Error code sereno a S 10 7 DB Connection Service eener 10 22 MES interface module sssseeseeeeeeeeeseeeresen 10 7 XML response messages 10 32 Emo lOG init eee ae east et 7 116 Event logen a ee 7 117 Exception process setting Applicable records overflow ceee 7 103 Exception processing setting Multiple applicable records cccccee 7 101 No applicable record 2 sseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 99 F Finding an error code 10 2 Formatting the CompactFlash card 0 06 7 131 FUNCHHON listina a 3 10 DB Connection Service ccceeeeeeteeeees 3 13 MES
295. er 2 Actions NewJob V Enable at module startup P Startup logging V Trigger buffering Test mode The job starts when the trigger conditions changes from False to true Disable v Type Summary Add fCommunication action v Program execution a o titl DB Buffering Before actions Enable DB buffering Setting After actions Setting o Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution No of fields in project 0 Substitute value Component No of fields in job 0 Tag component data length in job O words total Figure 7 43 Job settings Table 7 43 Setting items in Job settings Item Description Job name Enter a job name Up to 16 characters Enable at module startup Set whether to enable the job at startup of the MES interface module or not Trigger buffering Set whether to enable the trigger buffering or not Startup logging Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not Test mode Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not Trigger conditions Actions Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job lt 3 Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions Configure the action settings gt Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions Program execution Configure the settings for the program execution function Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution DB Buffering Set wh
296. er AND or OR job Period 1 to 32767 seconds Time Year month day day of the week hour minute Trigge i ERI i Value monitoring 1 Compares tag component value and tag sacle pz conditions are Condition type component value Compares tag component value and constant value Module startup Handshake Allowable number of i f Maximum 10 actions job d settings Section 7 11 Type Select update insert multiselect delete operation Maximum 8192 fields project ore DB tag link settings Maximum 256 rows communication action No of communication i ook Cae Select Update Delete conditions Maximum 8 rows communication action fields ti ee Eaa Section 7 11 1 a Select sort settings Maximum 8 rows communication action No of records data bods Up to 40000 records MultiSelect communication action selectable for j EAS Up to 45000 words job communication action No of operations possible for operation Maximum 20 dyadic operations operation action action Section 7 11 2 Operators for operation Addition subtraction multiplication division remainder character action string combination Maximum 2 programs job Program Allowable number of PEI F S One program before execution of initial action one program after Section 7 10 3 execution settings execution of final action 3 1 Performance Specifications To the next page DB interface 3 SPECIFICATIONS Item Device tag No
297. er from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU 2 Installing the CompactFlash card during power on 3 About a CompactFlash card format e wW ao e a WW Q x a fa Zz LEF B 283 E W eo nao a For the CompactFlash card format use the formatting function of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool C Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card b Do not format the CompactFlash card with Windows If doing so by mistake restore the card according to the CompactFlash card manual INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 4 About a CompactFlash card file User original files cannot be stored to the CompactFlash card installed to the MES interface module If the user original files are stored in the card the characters in directories or files may be corrupted or deleted FUNCTIONS ol Service life of CompactFlash card A CompactFlash card has a service life restriction on the number of writes For details refer to the specifications of each product Generally the service life of a CompactFlash card is dependant on its free space Therefore set an appropriate value to the user settable DB buffering capacity so that a sufficient free space will be ensured on the CompactFlash card Cz Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 14 4 7 1 Precautions
298. er of updated inserted or deleted records 0 in the access log of DB Connection Service Corrective action Check if Select Update Delete conditions are met Check if there is any missing field into which a value is to be inserted e Check if the uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated Check if the value to be stored exceeds the number of characters defined for the field Database values will not be stored in programmable controller devices Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log 3 Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions lt 3 Section 10 2 Error Code List When trigger conditions of a job with Startup logging setting are met is the startup logged in Event log of Working log Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module If no startup data is logged refer to the following lt 37 Job will not start up In Change job status of Remote operation is Disable writing to PLC device set Has an error occurred in the access log of DB Connection Service Enable writing to programmable controller devices lt gt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions lt gt Section 10 2 Error Code List Is No of select
299. ers Select one from a list of the access target CPU names set in Access Component CPU name target CPU settings Head device Set device name Data type Select the data type of sampling data setting input Character string Set a character string length when String is selected for Data type length 1 to 32 characters Perform statistical ae y Set whether to perform statistical processing or not processing Component name Displays a component name CPU name Displays a CPU name Device Displays a device range used Data type Displays a data type Statistical type When Perform statistical processing is set displays the type of statistical processing Component List Device n n Arrray No When Array setting is set displays the device range of array No n For a display example refer to the following lt 7 Section 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting Displays the array No that is currently displayed in Device n of Component List If this is clicked the device range of the first array is displayed in Device n of Component List H button When the device range of the first array is already displayed this button cannot be clicked If this is clicked the device range of the previous array is displayed in Device n of Component List button When the device range of the first array is already displayed this button cannot be clicked
300. eshooting about the DB interface function Symptom In the tag component where statistical processing is set the average maximum or minimum value to be calculated is reset Checked item Is there any setting that enables data writing to the tag component where statistical processing is set Corrective action e Disable the write setting e Writing data to the tag component where statistical processing is set will reset the statistical values The database is not updated 10 41 Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log lt gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List When trigger conditions of a job with Startup logging setting are met is the startup logged in Event log of Working log lt gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module If no startup data is logged refer to the following lt gt Job will not start up If the startup log is identified in the above case is there an error in Error log of Working log L gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions gt Section 10 2 Error Code List In Change job status of Remote operation is Disable writing to database
301. ess 1000 to 1003 a The information on whether Device tag settings have been made or not is stored b The bit corresponding to the preset tag setting No is turned ON 0 Not set 1 Set Buffer memory address 1000 1001 1002 1003 2 Sampling information Buffer memory address 1004 to 1007 a The tag sampling result is stored b The bit corresponding to the tag setting No which executed sampling is turned ON 0 Not collected 1 Collected Buffer memory address 1004 1005 1006 1007 3 28 3 6 Buffer Memory Details b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 16 15 31 14 30 13 29 12 28 1 27 10 26 9 25 8 24 7 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 8 Tag setting information area b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
302. et mask Subnet mask Decimal GATEWAY Default gateway Default gateway Decimal or Blank DNSTYPE Fixed value SPECIFY DNS1 Fixed value Blank DNS2 Fixed value Blank HTTPTYPE Fixed value DEFAULT HTTPPORT Fixed value Blank HTTPNAT Fixed value NO FTPTYPE Fixed value DEFAULT FTPPORT Fixed value Blank FTPNAT Fixed value NO SYSTEMNAME Fixed value QJU71MES96 DIAGNOSIS Fixed value NO INTERVAL Fixed value Blank DESTINATION Fixed value Blank EDEVICE Fixed value Blank STARTUP Fixed value YES Time Synchronize with PLC CPU time PLC SNTP synchronization setting Synchronize with SNTP SNTP SNTP server When PLC is selected with SNTP Blank SNTPADDRESS l i l address When SNTP is selected with SNTP SNTP server address Decimal When PLC is selected with SNTP Blank 6 TIMEZONE SNTP time zone i When SNTP is selected with SNTP Time zone character strings DB BUFSIZE DB buffering capacity 16 to 512 App 13 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 3 SYSTEM CSV APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 4 ACCOUNT CSV W 1 File format 1 File forma k aa Table App 12 File format Ze Item Description File name ACCOUNT CSV File contents System setting Account setting gt Section 7 6 3 Setting items in Acc
303. ether to utilize the DB buffering function or not lt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors job cancellation that occur during job execution lt gt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL M ELS 26 Q series Table 7 43 Setting items in Job settings Continued Item Description No of fields in project Displays the total number of fields in the project No of fields in job Displays the total number of fields used in Job settings Tag component data length in job Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job 1 Job name Up to 16 characters Enter a job name For characters that can be used for job names refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc 2 Enable at module startup a Set whether to enable the job at startup of the MES interface module or not If the Enable at module startup box is not checked the job is disabled at startup of the module Even if trigger conditions are met the job is not executed b While the MES interface module is operating this setting can be changed by the following e Instruction of
304. etting value during ROM operation FFD6h FFD7h FFD9h to FFDEh FFDFh System error Incorrect access target error The setting of the access target CPU is incorrect e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Correct Access target CPU settings FFEOh FFE1h FFEDh to FFEFh System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem FFFOh Station or Network No error The station No or network No is out of range or the setting is incorrect e Check the station No and network No in Access target CPU settings FFF1h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem FFF2h Memory cassette error No memory cassette or inappropriate one is attached to the accessed programmable controller CPU e Check the memory cassette of the access target CPU FFF3h Write protect error The block No of the specified extension file register has been allocated to the write protect area of the memory cassette e Check the block No of the extension file register device type e Check the write protect DIP switch on the memory cassette of the access target CPU FFF4h Block error The block No of the specified extension file register is invalid Check the block No of the
305. evice data Figure 1 1 Information linkage using the MES interface module 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE eries 1 1 Features This section explains the features of MX MESInterface OVERVIEW 1 Connection with the information system is enabled by simple settings without program Access to information system databases can be realized simply by making the Zz necessary settings with the setting tool O There is no need to write programs for accessing databases so the engineering costs a for system construction can be reduced and the work period can be shortened Ei cas MX MESInterface MES interface function configuration tool 75 New MES interface function configuration tool 2 Project Edit View Online Help 5 DEHER g System setting Jobname Newb wd sf logging Access target CPU settings Trigger buffering I Test made 5 Communication action WwW Jot oO palen Actiontype Update Database De1 x Table name CompletionReport 2 DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions a TeafType Component Combine __Fieldname Condition TagiType Component 1 Completed EE Process Completed a 5 ag eT nara 2 Rejected lt lt Processi Rejected a m lt lt Date Server time lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt xe Delete row lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt
306. execute without closing all the running applications Including resident programs Ok Welcome to the SWnDNC MESIF Setup program This program will install SWnDNC MESIF on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then clase any programs you have tunning Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law User Information Type your name below You must also type the name of the company you work for Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co lt Back Cancel l To the next page 5 1 Installation MELS EG Q series The left screen appears Check that all applications have been closed then click the OK button If any applications are running close them all 4 Setup starts The left screen appears Check the description then click the Next gt button Enter a user name and company name then click the Next gt button 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION From the previous page Registration Confirmation You have provided the following registration informa
307. extension file register device type FFF5h FFF8h FFFAh FFFBh FFFCh System error Size error CPU error The device size exceeded the device range An invalid station was specified Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Correct the device number entered in Device tag settings e Check the settings of the network module on the access route e Check the station number setting in Access target CPU settings FFFDh Device type error The device type is incorrect e Correct the device type entered in Device tag settings FFFEh Device No error The device number is incorrect e Correct the device number entered in Device tag settings FFFFh 10 21 System error 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC LE series 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service The DB Connection Service outputs errors to the Windows Event Log access log and SQL failure log For Windows Vista DB Connection Service Client also outputs errors to Windows Event Log se XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 Event log of Windows a Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector 1 zZ E
308. f fields in project 16 Tag component data length in job 16 words total INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Figure 7 72 Setting example of Insert Database DB1 Table name ERRORLOG Date Process_No Work_No Parameter 2 F O 5 2005 07 01 15 12 00 1 536 8 T 3 Inserted Inserted Inserted Inserted o Tag component if z Fa Constant Module time Constant 1 Process1 Work_No Process1 Parameter ES Ain 2005 07 01 15 12 00 1 536 8 36 ZLO Figure 7 73 Operation example of Insert DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 87 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC TE eries 4 When the database is Wonderware Historian the following is inserted as one record to the database by executing Communication action e Module date and time at execution e Tag for Wonderware Historian set in Field name e The value of tag component or constant set in Component When multiple fields are set the number of records corresponding to the number of fields set is inserted Communication action Action type insert z Database Historian x Table name Histor DB tag link settings mne name Tagitype Component 8 1l nalogtag ERE Machine Analogt J 2 AnalogTag2 lt lt Machine Analog2 3 AnalogTag3 24 Machine2 Analogi lt lt
309. f the MES interface module and the MX MESInterface For general specifications of the MES interface module refer to the following manual C gt 77 QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 1 Performance Specifications This section explains the MES interface module and the MX MESInterface performance specifications 1 Transmission and interface specifications Table 3 1 Transmission and interface specifications Item Specifications Interface 10BASE T 100BASE TX Data transmission Sa 10 Mbps 100 Mbps rate Transmission method Base band No of cascaded stages Max segment length 2 Ethernet Maximum 4 stages Maximum 2 stages 100 m Supported function Supply power capacity Card size No of installable cards CompactFlash card Number of occupied I O points Supply power voltage The auto negotiation function is available automatically distinguishes 10BASE T from 100BASE TX 3 3V 5 Maximum 150 mA TYPE card 1 32 points slot I O assignment Intelli 32 points Clock The clock data is obtained from a programmable controller CPU in multiple CPU system CPU No 1 or the SNTP server computer lt gt Section 6 3 Time Synchronization Function 5VDC internal current consumption 0 65A External dimensions 98 3 86 H x 27 4 1 08 W x 90 3 54 D mm inch Weight 0 16 kg The MES interface module distinguishes 10BASE
310. face function settings project to the MES interface module Section 7 12 1 Section 7 12 2 Read Verify Read the MES interface function settings project from the MES interface module The MES interface function settings in the MES interface module are compared with those in the currently editing project Section 7 12 3 Section 7 12 4 Remote operation Display or change the operation status of the MES interface module or format a CompactFlash card Section 7 13 Working log The working log of the MES interface module can be checked Section 7 12 5 One shot execution of a job Execute a job as a one shot task Section 7 12 6 3 12 Help The product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and the Connect to MELFANSweb screen can be displayed 3 3 Function List Section 7 14 3 SPECIFICATIONS a6 Q series 4 DB Connection Service function list Table 3 11 DB Connection Service function list g ge Reference Function Description section ODBC connection function Connects the MES interface module and the ODBC interface for database r Executes a program on the application server computer upon request from the MES Program execution function interface module Specifies the IP address of the MES interface module that can connect to the DB IP filter function Connection Service to ensure the security of the server co
311. failure log file is too long The SQL failure log file could not be opened The log could not be written to the SQL failure log file Failed to delete an old SQL failure log file Shorten the path to the SQL failure log file with DB Connection Service Setting Tool e If no directory exists for storing the SQL failure log file create it e When the attribution of the SQL failure log file is set to read only cancel the setting e If read write is disabled for the SQL failure log file enable it in the security setting When the SQL failure log file name represents a directory rename or delete the directory e When the SQL failure log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault e When the disk space is full ensure a free disk space e When the SQL failure log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault e When the attribution of the oldest SQL failure log file is set to read only cancel the setting If read write is disabled for the oldest SQL failure log file enable it in the security setting e When the oldest SQL failure log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault 507 Failed to rename the SQL failure log file DBCnctClient e When the attribution of the new and old SQL failure log files is set to
312. ffer Job 1 2 Sending Time Time e The numbers 1 to 3 show the order in which trigger conditions of respective jobs are met Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database Figure 1 4 Data buffering in the case of load concentration FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 1 1 Features 1 4 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC LEY series b Data to be send to the database are protected even if a communication error 1 1 Features occurs DB buffering function When an error occurs during communications with a database the SQL texts failed to send can be stored in a CompactFlash card After recovery the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database Manual operation is also possible CompactFlash card Figure 1 5 Buffering of send data SQL text during a communication error 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Eenes EN 4 Log data are available in the event of an access error After connection with a database when there is a communication error a log of the error contents can be recorded to the database side Analyzing the log can protect data and analyze the error OVERVIEW me fe Database 5 Fao WL 25 Do n a Q z iS TE SQL m f
313. file is set to read only cancel the setting If read write is disabled for the oldest access log file enable it in the security setting When the oldest access log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault 407 Failed to rename the access log file e When the attribution of the new and old access log files is set to read only cancel the setting If read write is disabled for the new and old access log files enable it in the security setting When the new and old access log files have been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 10 24 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service CA J XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 501 Error description and cause The computer ran out of memory when initializing the SQL failure log file 502 The computer ran out of resources when initializing the SQL failure log file MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Corrective action Terminate any unnecessary applications Add more memory to the personal computer 503 504 505 506 The full path name of the SQL
314. g average Moving maximum or Moving minimum is specified for a tag component a job using the tag component is not able to start its execution until sampling for the specified number of times is completed The job will be canceled 2 No of samples 2 to 20 Specify the number of samples when Moving average Moving maximum or Moving minimum is selected INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Moving average when No of samples is 4 Device value Sampling interval no 5 6 8 9 5 DIPA 12 2 i 10 11 sf 7 gt a fa la 1st Tag component value W 4 k gt 2nd Moving average Coe gt 3rd ES3 Z5E ZS ZrO 0 Time seconds lt Change in tag component values gt 1st 2nd E 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 fog pee ee a OZO 4 4 Z a D sz Figure 7 36 Moving average OBIE oO W W ann 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 47 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 7 n Array No re He ofS e Figure 7 37 n Array No When Array setting is set the device range of array No n is displayed in Device n of Component List To change the Device n display use the following methods e Enter a value in the box e Change the value with the M or button 8 Array block size 10 points Figure 7 38 array block size When block is selected in Array setting arr
315. g component Process 1 Correction power as The tag component value Process 1 Correction power obtained from the following Operation action is Process 1 Voltage x 100 50 x Current a z O i Operation action m N g Component Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Component l Corrcetionyol lt lt Process Voltage us Number 100 2 Variable CorrcetionVol lt lt Variable Corrcetionvol Number 50 3 Process CorrcetionPo lt lt Variable CorrcetionYol as Process Current lt lt lt lt ar lt lt canara lt lt Sag 286 lt bes lt lt nao lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Delete row Tag component data length in job 3 words total Figure 7 89 Setting example of Operation action INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS a fa fe o eA o9 ra toe EZO 260 36 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T7 111 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 7 12 Online Online operations can be performed to the MES interface module connected to the network 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module Set the target MES interface module Specify the IP address user name and password that were set in System setting C
316. g file name with adding a number is created If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files the file is deleted from the oldest one X MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION e e z O O mf Zz Z Q i a a 38 ae lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 18 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC IA series Example When Output destination is set to dbConnector log and Access capacity is set to 1MB x 3 files vA gt Capacity over Z na Z F oN N LM Sy dbConnector log ia dbConnector log Q N Ro Mmo 6 dbConnector log 001 N Y dbConnector log 001 Files within the specified x number of files 9 KS o dbConnector log 002 N NY dbConnector log 002 Q ee X Figure 8 9 File capacity per access log and number of files Q When dbConnector log exceeds 1M byte it is renamed as dbConnector log 001 A new dbConnector log is created and logging resumes 2 dbConnector log 001 is renamed as dbConnector log 002 The total number of files exceeds 3 if dbConnector log 002 is renamed therefore dbConnector log 002 is deleted 5 Output SQL failed log Default Output a Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log b When selecting Output SQL failed log set the following items Table 8 7 Setting items when Output SQL failed log
317. g setting Configure the settings for the DB buffering function Section 7 6 4 Access Target CPU setting Set a connection channel to the access target CPU Section 7 7 Device tag settings Configure the settings for the tag function Section 7 8 Configure this setting when writing multiple records extracted from a database to the Array setting Section 7 8 2 same tag component Component setting Configure the settings for assigning programmable controller CPU devices to tags Section 7 8 3 Server Service setting Configure the settings for access to a server computer Section 7 9 Job settings Configure the settings for the DB interface function Section 7 10 Trigger conditions Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job Section 7 10 2 Trigger buffering Set whether to utilize the Trigger buffering function or not Section 7 10 1 Communication action Configure the settings for communications with a database Section 7 11 1 Operation action Configure the settings for operation of tag component values Section 7 11 2 Program execution DB buffering Configure the settings for the program execution function Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not Section 7 10 3 Section 7 10 4 Online Perform online operations to the MES interface module connected to the network Section 7 12 Communication setting Write Set the target MES interface module Write the MES inter
318. g status Data type of tag ie Description component OFF Not accumulated ON One or more data accumulated Bit 0 Not accumulated Other than the above 1 One or more data accumulated INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 2 No of DB bufferings a Select a tag component into which whether data are currently accumulated in the DB buffer or not is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set FUNCTIONS 7 al b Data are stored as follows depending on the data type 8 w zZz O O Table 7 28 Values stored in No of DB bufferings if T za Data type of tag a E 2 a Description O component MERA Bit OFF Not accumulated ie i ON One or more data accumulated 0 Not accumulated Other than the above 1 or greater Number of buffering data that are accumulated 5 fee wee Zo2 gt F oo fi ba ann 7 6 System Setting T7 27 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 28 MELSEC Le series 3 Resend DB buffer request a Select a tag component used to request for resend processing of the DB buffer Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set b The following explains the operation of the resend processing using Resend DB buffer request
319. ge from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Integer type multiplication of integer type Exceeding the above range Floating point type Divisible Integer type Not divisible Floating point type When zero divide is executed the job execution is canceled At this time zero devide error is displayed in the error log Floating point type in all cases Division of integer type 7 15 Precautions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series c Operation between character string type values 1 oO a operator Combines character strings Example ABCDEFG HIJ ABCDEFGHIJ Other operators When both of the operands can be converted to numerical values the operation is performed using the numerical values Both or either of them cannot be converted to numerical values the job execution is canceled At this time Operation error is displayed in the error log Example 312 x 4 1248 31AH x 4 gt Cancellation of job execution Operation between a character string type value and a numerical type value Same as the case of the operation between character string type values 7 15 Precautions T7 135 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j fa fe o eA 9 E ra E z E EZO Z5r 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND S
320. gnals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 2 I O signals details 3 SPECIFICATIONS Signal name MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 3 13 Input signals details Description Information linkage 1 Turns ON when the MES interface function operation is enabled This indicates that MES interface function processing is executable 2 Turns OFF when the MES interface function is in stop The MES interface function processing stops in the following cases 1 The period after the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset until the MES interface function starts 2 When the MES interface function processing stops with Remote operation of MES Interface X5 status Function Configuration Tool lt gt Section 7 13 Online Remote operation 3 When a module stop error occurs in the MES interface module lt Section 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 4 During updating settings gt Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function 5 While file access is stopped _ gt Section 4 7 CompactFlash Card 1 Turns ON when Synchronize with SNTP is selected in Time synchronization setting and after succeeding the time query and storing the time into the buffer memory 2 Reads time data from the SNTP time query results Buffer memory address 11501 to 11507 while XB is ON
321. gt Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc When the device value is a termination character NULL code 00h The character data following it are ignored The character string is regarded as terminated 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 45 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er fa le o 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z Le DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 5 Character string length 1 to 32 characters a Set a character string length when String is selected for Data type b When String is selected data are stored as follows 1 When the value length is shorter than the character string length NULL codes 00h are stored after the stored values Example ABCD is stored in the device of the tag component whose character length is 8 A B C D 41hl42h 43h 44h 00h 00h 00h 00h When the value length is longer than the character string length The values whose quantity is equal to the character string length are stored Example ABCD is attempted to be stored in the device of the tag component whose character length is 2 AB is stored 6 Perform statistica
322. guration Tool gt Chapter 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function The DB interface function executes access to the database in units of jobs 6 1 1 DB interface function operation The operation of the DB interface function is shown below Programmable MES interface module controller CPU Device Trigger monitoring 2 Trigger buffering 3 Database server computer Action 4 Communication action 1 Update Operation action 2 gt Communication action 3 Insert Component Executed in order t Communication action 10 Select Program execution 5 DB buffering 6 Execute file Application server computer Figure 6 1 DB interface function operation 1 Collects tag data lt gt Section 6 1 3 Tag function 2 Activates a job 3 Section 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function 3 Stores data and trigger times temporarily in the module s internal memory when loads are concentrated L gt Section 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function 4 Accesses the database and performs arithmetic processing LF Section 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action Section 6 1 7 Arithmetic processing function Operation action 5 Executes programs lt gt Section 6 1 8 Program execution fu
323. h its settings treated as disabled no settings Table 7 13 Import target CSV files 9 s g i Saving in Import target CSV file Settings to be imported 3 folder a ey System setting z Network setting T a System setting Time synchronization setting ACCOUNT CSV System setting Account setting Required DST CSV System setting time synchronization setting Optional Daylight saving setting o CPU CSV Access target CPU setting Required Z y TAG CSV Device Tag setting Required SA COMPONENT CSV Device Tag setting Component setting Required E 3 4i nao Select Project Import CSV Files from the menu The Open dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the Open button Item Description Look in INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Look in B csv Sovstem FUNCTIONS File name SYSTEM Files of type CSV file SYSTEM CS Figure 7 15 Open dialog box Table 7 14 Setting items in the Open dialog box a a fe o eA o 8 ra coe EZO 260 36 ZrO z O E O Z Le Select the location where the CSV file is stored File name Specify SYSTEM CSV Files shown in the above and in the same folder as the specified file SYSTEM CSV are the import target CSV files For files to be imported refer to the following lt gt Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format
324. haracter string Unit time Date Module time Date i Server time Date Server time Date String Date String Variable Variable name 2 Display format of the operator Table 7 63 Display format of the operator Item Description FUNCTIONS Addition 7 Subtraction 9 x Multiplication x y z Division if z Remainder u3 ZLO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 81 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action Configure the settings for communications with a database Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the Communication action dialog box Make the setting referring to the following descriptions Clicking the _OK_ button after setting adds or modifies the action For the operation for adding or modifying an action refer to the following Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions Communication action Actiontype M y Database NewServer B Table name DB tag link settings Field name Tag Type Component EA ee Delete row z Insert a whole tag Generated SQL text INSERT INTO VALUES Cancel No of fields in project 16 Tag component data length in job 16 words total Figure 7 67 Communication action dialog box Table 7 64 Se
325. hen Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution has been selected a value is assigned to the specified tag component o Zz O O Z 5 Le lt gt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 22 6 1 10 Precautions 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series 6 2 XML Processing Function The XML processing function is a function by which execution of XML format message requests from user applications can be processed The XML processing function allows the following instructions for job execution e One shot execution of a job e Validating a job The job is executed when the trigger conditions are met e Invalidating a job The job is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met For the XML message format refer to the following K gt Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT Application server computer Figure 6 20 XML processing function 6 23 6 2 XML Processing Function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series 6 3 Time Synchronization Function z The time synchronization function adjusts the time of the MES interface module to be g synchronized with the time of the SNTP server computer or a programmable controller ui CPU No 1 CPU in the multiple CPU system on the network Time information is utilized
326. her station specification No specification C Other Station Single network C Other Station Co existence network Network communication route a Co existence network communication route gt 3 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV APPENDICES 2 Label Table App 21 Label MELSEC A series Label Description crus Set Access target CPU settings items No 1 Setting required Only CPUNAME can be set Other setting items are disabled CPU2 to CPU64 Set Access target CPU settings items No 2 to 64 Enter only the labels desired to be set Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set 3 Setting item Table App 22 Setting item Item Description Setting value CPUNAME CPU name 2 Up to 16 characters QCPU Q mode QCPU QCPU A mode QCPUA SERIES PLC ene QnACPU QNACPU ACPU ACPU No specification NO When QCPU is CPU No 1 m Multiple CPU selected with CPU No 2 2 MULTI CPU enn SERIES CPU No 3 BI P CPU No 4 4 When other than the above is selected F Blank with SERIES mm 3 Oherstation No specification NO OTHER STATION gsi Other station Single network SINGLE specification Other station Different network DIFFERENT When SINGLE or CC IE Cont NET10 DIFFERENT is NET 10 H selected with CC Link CCLINK 6l NET1 Network OTHER STATION Ethernet E
327. ication action in Select Update Delete conditions gt a cas Point 1 Exception processing is executed when e Records to be selected updated multi selected deleted do not exist 2 c gt 7 a Exception processing No applicable record e Multiple records exist for select update delete C gt 7 b Exception processing Multiple applicable records a e The number of records to be multi selected is greater than the number of arrays set in Array setting of the tag C 7 c Exception processing Applicable records overflow 2 Be careful not to create significant number of selected updated records due to H the select update delete conditions 8a 2 Failure to do so may affect performances of the data base or the system See 3 When Update or Delete is selected for Action type and multiple records Bae are found to be updated or deleted all of them will be updated or deleted If the Select Update Delete conditions area is blank all records of the specified table will be selected updated or deleted INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Select Update Delete conditions Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component FUNCTIONS Delete row Figure 7 79 Select Update Delete conditions a Combine Select a method by which conditions set in respective lines are combined Select AND or OR If AND and OR are combined the database will process AND first and then OR a a fe
328. ices devices set for refreshing in the device tag Example Register D256 to D511 in tag 1 MES interface QCPU No 1 Motion CPU CPU No 2 module CPU shared memory 0000 i mani OOFF Component D256 D256 Component l Component D511 Dei u Figure App 9 Acquisition example of the Motion CPU device data Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly APPENDICES M als 26 fel ceries Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R Appendix 7 1 Overview of warning messages XML MESSAGE FORMAT In Windows Vista a User Account Control feature has been added Because of this a warning message is displayed when the following is attempted as an administrator e Installation uninstallation of MX MESInterface e Start of DB Connection Service Setting Tool TROUBLESHOOTING User Account Control Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before C 1 setup exe o Unidentified Publisher iS fa Gi Cancel a lt I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before v Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer INDEX Figure App 10 User Account Control warning message Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R App 58 Appendix 7
329. ie n AIEEE Ea A E EEEE E EEE EE RERE 3 30 3 6 9 Access target CPU setting status Ara eee een eee eeeenteeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeseeiaeeeeeeeaas 3 33 3 6 10 Information linkage function AFCA eee cette eect cette eee eeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaaeeeseeenaeeeeseeiaeeeeeeaaes 3 34 CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 1to 4 25 A cHand ling Precautions iiss asks essed a a AT E A A T 4 1 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation e seeesssseessrrreeeernresrrennesenenuestnnnandettnnsatennddstenaeetnnnancennannanen 4 2 AS Pans INAMOS 5 ccs sacece isoa a E ES A EA eS AAE e A aaa S A Qe aa ai Te aeai 4 6 G7 AN r EA A A ere A E A O 4 8 LAA WINO ana a a oes cena tice aa ae tse eats a a as cee eae A A a 4 8 4 42 Wiring precautions caesia niria iA NaN EAA AANE daa aAA ENa Aa kaa ai AAA AAAA PEREA ANAE aaa EAA 4 8 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings eeessseseesssesirsseeerreterrssttirrsstttrnssstnnssstennsssennsnnen nn 4 9 A6 SOH GIAGNOSICS TeSt eraai E O E A AGA 4 12 4 6 1 Self loopback test 2 ccnce ieee lesen lesen ier ata Jaeeesed Uhaedetein niceeseus aie 4 12 4 6 2 gt Hardware testuose aae aa e AE TA A AE E AAAA 4 13 4T CompactFlashiGard cis sect eidiveteentsdeetiaice tees gh e a e a a Sallie iat E a 4 14 4 7 1 Precautions for using a CompactFlash card seeeeessseeressseerrssserrrsssrtrrststtirrsssttnrnssteennssttenn 4 14 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash Card ecccceesceeee
330. ield that remains blank Table 7 47 Setting items in Time specification startup Item Description Year 4 digits 1000 to 9999 Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 Minute 0 to 59 2 Day Specify a day of the week Check the checkbox of the day to be specified If no box is checked it means every day Example The following shows that the job is to be activated at 17 30 on Monday through Friday LGHYyS HUI os LY U UG Trigger 1 Time specification startup bai Year Month Day Day M Mon M Tue M Wen lv Thu Fri Sat Sun Figure 7 46 Time specification startup setting example 1 Example The following shows that the job is to be activated at 9 00 on the 1st day of every month Trigger 1 Time specification startup v Year Month Day WOHYySS HUN Tas ww us se Ot Minute 1 3 Day Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat Sun Figure 7 47 Time specification startup setting example 2 Point If Startup logging is selected each job startup can be confirmed with the time to the second in the startup log The startup log can be checked from Online View working log C gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 5 Specified time period startup ee y z a The condition is al
331. igits T 92 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Constant type g About constants M eLSEC KEY ceries Constants can be used as component values for each action or as condition values of Select Update Delete conditions The following table lists constant types and the data types of assignable fields If the type of a constant does not match the data type of its substitution target field an error occurs resulting in cancellation of job execution Table 7 67 Constant types and the data types of assignable fields Values that can be entered in Component Oracle 8i Oracle 9i Oracle 10g Oracle 11g Data type of assignable field SQL Server 2000 2005 2008 MSDE 2000 Access 2000 Access 2003 2007 Wonderware Historian a Yes No type Up to 16 characters 9 4 Ak Discrete Tag Signed decimal notation Analog Number Example 521 98 NUMBER smallint Long Integertype ag Integer Signed exponential notation tinyint Single type Analog Example 5 2198E03 float Double type Tag Real real AutoNumber type Currency type Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character GAR char Tette String strings refer to the following VARCHAR varchar YP String Tag lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for text Memo typ character string constants etc e When using the date and t
332. ignals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 17 3 4 2 I O signals details OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 7 Z Q lt Q u O rt a 2 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 3 13 Input signals details Device oe Signal name Description No 1 Turns ON when an error occurs in communications with the access target CPU x16 Access target CPU 2 When this device is ON the error code is stored into the Access target CPU setting status area error Buffer memory address 4000 to 4071 3 Turns OFF when the Error clear request Y10 is turned ON 1 Turns ON when an error not corresponding to X11 X12 or X16 occurs 2 When this device is ON the error code is stored into the Error log area Buffer memory X1C Another error address 150 to 247 3 Turns OFF when the Error clear request Y10 is turned ON Only in case of a module continuation error Watchdog timer X1F Baar Turns ON when a watchdog timer error occurs 2 Output signals details Table 3 14 Output signals details Device TS Signal name Description No y2 File access stop 1 Turns ON when file access is stopped request 2 For ON OFF timing refer to the description of X2 1 By turning ON during a
333. iguration Tool 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 3 Toolbar configuration Section 7 14 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree The Edit items tree shows overall project settings in a tree it This section explains the operations using the Edit items tree i O Gh New MES interface function config Project Edit view Online Help Deh Bee sAm 6 Project root Shi z ier Sy Access target CPU settings B 4S Device tag settings a NewTag Sy Server service settings B NewServer C Job settings gt Setting type n YE NewJob z o i Figure 7 11 Edit items tree 2 1 Selecting an item O p Si When double clicking the project root or each setting type some items are lt u Zz displayed zng Ror nao Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed setting edit screen area 2 Adding an item Selecting an item or a setting type to be added and performing either of the following will add the item INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Click Add item e Select Edit Add item from the menu When the item is added properly it is automatically selected and the edit screen is switched to the one for the added item FUNCTIONS Es Point Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting typ
334. ile Format App 28 Appendix 3 11 JOB CSV APPENDICES 2 Label Table App 33 Label MELSEC IA series Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 JOB1 to JOB64 3 Setting item Table App 34 Setting item Item Description Setting value JOBNAME Job name Up to 16 characters Enable at module When enabled ENABLE JOBTYPE startup setting When disabled DISABLE When enabled ENABLE TRGBUFFRING Trigger buffering When disabled DISABLE When enabled ENABLE LOGGING Startup logging i When disabled DISABLE When enabled ENABLE K DEBUGMODE Test mode When disabled DISABLE When disabled DISABLE Manually resending data at recovery MANUALRESEND SQLBUFFERING DB buffering A Automatically resending data at AUTORESEND recovery When the condition is 0 or 1 Blank EJ LOINTCONDITION Combination When there are 2 AND AND conditions OR OR ACTIONNUM Job action count 1 to 10 Notify errors job When enabled ENABLE cancellation that EJ CANcELWRITE ee occur during job l execution When disabled DISABLE CANCELTAG Tag 1 to 64 CANCELELEMENT _ Component 1 to 256 CANCELVALUE Substitute value Optional App 29 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 11 JOB CSV APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV 1 File format Table App 35 File format Item Description
335. ile name Setting contents section A System setting Network settings SYSTEM CSV ee Appendix 3 3 System setting Time synchronization setting ACCOUNT CSvV 1 System setting Account setting Appendix 3 4 DST CSV System setting Time synchronization setting Appendix 3 5 DBBUF CSV System setting DB buffering settings Appendix 3 6 CPU csv 1 Access target CPU settings Appendix 3 7 TAG csv 1 Device tag settings Appendix 3 8 COMPONENT CSV 1 Device tag settings Component setting Appendix 3 9 SERVER CSV Server service settings Appendix 3 10 Job settings JOB CSV Appendix 3 11 Job settings DB buffering settings CONDITION CSV Job settings Trigger conditions Appendix 3 12 ACTION CSV Job settings Action Appendix 3 13 ACFIELD CSV Communication action DB tag link settings Appendix 3 14 ACCONDITION CSV ACEXCEPTION CSV ACOPERATION CSV Communication action Select Update Delete conditions Communication action Exception processing Operation action Appendix 3 15 Appendix 3 16 Appendix 3 17 REMOTE CSV ORDERBY CSV Job settings Program execution Communication action Select sort settings Appendix 3 18 Appendix 3 19 MULTISELECT CSV Communication action Multi select setting Saved information setting file can be imported lt gt Section 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file Appendix 3
336. ime of the x database server Server time datetime Date 2 f DATE Date Time type sa When using the date and time of the MES smalldatetime interface module Module time Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Specify the date and time of the MES interface module in the following format dhar Date Year 4 digits YYYY CHAR vatehar Text type String Tag String Year 2 digits YY VARCHAR text Memo type Month 2 digits MM Day 2 digits DD Hour 2 digits hh Minute 2 digits mm Second 2 digits ss Example YYYY MM DD hh mm ss gt 2005 07 01 15 12 00 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action T7 93 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j mn 5 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 zo DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 1 Signed integer notation only 2 Clock precision Module time In units of seconds Server time Depends on the database server 3 Not available for Select Update Delete conditions 4 When the data is written to tag for Wonderware Historian th
337. in units of 0 1 seconds or 1 to 32767 in units of seconds When the database is Microsoft Access 2000 2003 2007 refer to the following gt Section 2 6 2 Precautions for using database No of samples can be set up to 20 The following shows the method for roughly calculating the buffering duration from the buffering capacity Buffering duration No of executable bufferings Execution frequency times hour h No of executable bufferings Usage capacity SQL text length Overhead 4 bytes cases SQL text length Total field character length 6 x No of fields Total data length 20 bytes Calculation example Accessing to 256 fields with 1 job and 1 action and performing every 30 seconds when capacity 64 M bytes field name 16 characters data length 32 characters SQL text length 16 x 256 6 x 256 32 x 256 13844 bytes No of executable bufferings 64 x 1024 x 1024 13844 4 4846 cases Buffering duration 4846 60 30 x 60 40 h 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 oO Z Q lt Q m O rt a 2 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 MELSEC IA series EJ Point Performance of the MES interface module and the system using
338. ing is not correct 111 The DB access timeout time setting is out of range 412 There are too many connection permitted IP address settings 113 Description of the connection permitted IP address setting is not correct 414 The mask bit length setting of the connection permitted IP address is not correct 415 The mask bit length setting of the connection permitted IP address is out of range 116 The access log setting is not correct 417 The setting of the access log file name is not correct Me The log tig name lee leng Configure the settings again with DB Connection 419 The maximum file size setting for the access log is Service Setting Tool not correct 420 The maximum file size setting for the access log is out of range 121 The maximum number of access log files is not set correctly 122 The maximum number of access log files is out of range 123 The SQL failure log setting is not correct ia The setting of the SQL failure log file name is not correct 125 The SQL failure log file name is too long 126 The maximun file size setting for the SQL failure log is not correct 427 The maximum file size setting for the SQL failure log is out of range 428 The maximum number of SQL failure log files is not set correctly 429 The maximum number of SQL failure log files is out of range 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code MELSEC
339. ing shows the results in the case where the Enhance sampling efficiency box is checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 68 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is checked No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 Select 0 2s 0 3s 0 9s 321s 13 5s Update il m 0 2s 0 2s 0 5s 1 4s 5 2s z oO E b When Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked The following shows the results in the case where the Enhance sampling efficiency box is not checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 69 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked i No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 5 Select 028 o3s 09 32s 135s a Update 0 2s 0 3s 1 0s 3 5s 15 0s Insert INDEX Appendix 4 Processing Time App 54 Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier APPENDICES Mi als a6 Fl cries Appendix 5 External Dimensions This section shows the external dimension diagrams of the MES interface module QU71MES96 I CF CARD 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ko Q mMm 4 ioe oO QUTIMES96 B ki oO lt 90 3 54 QJ71MES96 U Unit mm inch Figure App 5 External dimensions The bending radius near the connector R1 yardstick should be at least four times longer than the a cable s outside diameter when the t
340. ing value SERVERNAME Sever service name Up to 16 characters Database server DB SERVERTYPE Server type ees Application server APP IPADDRESS IP address IP address Decimal PORT Port number 1024 to 65535 6l USERNAME User name Up to 30 characters PASSWORD Password Up to 30 characters When DB is selected with Character string Data source SERVERTYPE Ei SOURCENAME name When APP is selected with Blank SERVERTYPE Oracle 8i ORACLE8I Oracle 9i ORACLE9I Oracle 10g ORACLE10G Oracle 11g When DB i SQL Server SQLSRV2000 en DB iis 2000 2005 2008 selocted with MSDE2000 MSDE2000 EJ DBTYPE Database type SERVERTYPE Access 2000 ACCESS2000 Access 2003 ACCESS2003 2007 Wonderware INSQL Historian When APP is selected with Blank SERVERTYPE Access error When enabled ENABLE ERRORWRITE tae notification setting When disabled DISABLE DEVICETAG Tag 1 to 64 ELEMENT Component 1 to 256 TIMEOUT Connection timeout 1 to 180 Unit second App 27 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 10 SERVER CSV APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 11 JOB CSV 1 File format XML MESSAGE FORMAT Table App 32 File format Item Description File name JOB CSV e Job settings lt gt gt Section 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting Job settings DB Buffering lt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering e Job settings Notify errors job cancell
341. inimum 2 to 20 4 For characters can be used for component names refer to the following lt Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc 2 Ifthe same component name already exists in the same item Tag the existing name is overwritten Also if the same component name is set multiple times in the same item Tag the setting of the label with the higher number is overwritten 3 Specify Access target CPU settings No that is set in the CPU CSV label Specifying Access target CPU settings No that is not set in CPU CSV causes an error 4 Setting a device that does not exist causes an error Setting a device that does not match the data type causes an error If the total of device points is set greater than 96 at High speed sampling selection this causes an error App 25 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 9 COMPONENT CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 10 SERVER CSV Ww z 1 File format Bic 2s aa Table App 29 File format Ze Item Description File name SERVER CSV File contents Server service settings gt Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting 2 6 y y y y y 3 SERVER _ SERVERNAME SERVERTYPE IPADDRESS PORT USERNAME g Application APP 192 168 3 10 5112 _ USERNAME Oracle9i B 192 168 3 11 5113 _ USERNAME2 1 Oracle10g bB 192 168 312 5114 USERNAME3
342. ink IE controller network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Network communication route Co existence network communication route Set the network type network No head I O address and station No used for access The setting items vary depending on the specified network type Point To access a CPU on another station routing parameters must be set in addition to this setting For the routing parameters refer to the following K gt Manual for the network module used 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 6 Precautions on Access target CPU settings a The MES interface module prepares for communication with the access target CPU when executing Update settings powering ON the system from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU Therefore if a large number of access target CPUs are set several minutes are required for the preparation Confirm that Update settings is completed or the MES interface module is ready X0 is ON before making access from the personal computer to the MES interface module OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b Be sure to set a correct series for PLC series If PLC series is incorrectly set either of the following will occur At startup of the MES interface module an error may occur in a programmable controller CPU or a module on the route to the access t
343. ion Running Displayed when the MES interface function is running Displayed when the MES interface function is stopped Stop Even if trigger conditions are met no job will be executed during stop of the function Displayed during operation of Update settings turning the power OFF and ON or resetting the programmable controller CPU Initializing fo ah Even if trigger conditions are met no job will be executed during initialization Displayed when the operation status of the MES interface function is Stopping changing to the Stop status Displayed when MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is acquiring the status data from the MES interface module Displayed when MES Interface Function Configuration Tool has failed in connection for acquiring the status data from the MES interface module Getting status Acquirement failed 2 Error status Table 7 87 Items displayed for Error status Display Meaning None Displayed when the MES interface module is operating normally Displayed when a module continuation error has occurred in the MES Continuation error interface module lt L gt Section 10 1 2 Error types Displayed when a module stop error has occurred in the MES interface Stop error module Section 10 1 2 Error types T 124 7 13 Online Remote operation 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL M
344. ion Special relay SM1518 Standby system to control system swiching status flag Timer T100 Retry timer Point Retry timer T100 should be set much longer than DB access timeout of DB Connection Service 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 2 Program example The following is a program example in which a job is executed when an execution request X100 from the outside turns ON ii 5 5 5 gt s gt When system switching occurs during Handshake operation the processing i to retry is incorporated 2 re SE MO Sets In process flag at processing request Z MO M200 M1 E RS MO Resets In process flag Z at normal completion o ge SM1518 5 m SE M1 cas Processing at system switching RST M100 MO M200 7I omo iy M200 For XML processing 2 ie X5 MO MI M100 M200 E EEEE lt K Send data generation iL wend data generalon y 5 5 RST M201 Job restart processing SET M100 M100 M200 a e o Receive data processing h s T pie a Processing for normal F rE job execution 9A 5 RST M100 EQ RoE M201 Bae ____Etror handling Processing for failed Rat My job execution 9 lt L Ze RST M100 25 48 MO M1 K300 z9 T100 Retry timer 30 seconds Q2 T100 M200 RST M201 SET M100 Job restart processing Yn RST M1 8 5 RST M200 Resets Completion e notification 2 j Figure 7 59
345. ion this manual provides the following explanations Point Explains the matters to be especially noted the functions and others related to the description on that page Remark Soo ooo coco ooo Provides the reference destination related to the description on that page and the convenient information A 17 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the QJ71MES96 MES interface module and MX MESInterface Version1 SW1DNC MESIF E Generic term abbreviation Description Generic term for the AINCPU AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJHCPU A2CCPU A2CJCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2ACPU aces A2ACPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 A3NCPU A3ACPU A3UCPU and A4UCPU CC Link Abbreviation for CC Link system Ethernet Generic term for 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 and 10BASE2 network systems Ethernet module Generic term for the E71 QE71 and Q series E71 E71 Generic term for the AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N B5 and A1SJ71E71N B2 Generic product name for the model names of the SWnD5C GPPW E GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW EA SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n Version 4 or later A designates a multiple license product V designates a version upgraded product MELSECNET H Abbreviation for MELSECNET H network system supporting
346. ion Access target CPU PLC series CC Link o o o C24 O O x O Accessible x Inaccessible 3 6 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series b Different network MES interface module Network 2 to 7 C24 multidrop Z N S Network 1 Relay Relay Network 8 Relay Access target CPU station station station Ny i rie Co exlstence network communication route Network communication route ners Seana Network indicates CC IE Cont NET 10 H or Ethernet The relay stations are assumed as the QCPU Figure 3 3 Different network Table 3 6 Different network eee Access target CPU PLC series Network communication Co existence network route QCPU A mode route QCPU Q mode QnACPU ACPU CC IE Cont NET 10 H CC Link O o o Ethernet C24 O x x Accessible x Inaccessible MES interface module Network 2 to 7 Relay Relay station Network 8 Access target CPU Network 1 station C24 multidrop 4 i CC Link gt Network Co exlstence network communication route communication i i route 1 Network indicates CC IE Cont NET 10 H or Ethernet The relay stations are assumed as the QCPU ee Sa Figure 3 4 Different network Table 3 7 Different network Access target CPU PLC series QCPU Q mode QnACP
347. ion action Operation Operation action 7 80 7 11 Job Setting Actions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 2 Summary Details of the existing actions are displayed Ss a In the case of Communication action f Table 7 60 Display for Communication action Item Description Database Table name DB Tag link setting No 1 DB Tag link setting No n gt Display format Select DB Tag link setting Field name Tag component constant value z 3 Update Insert DB Tag link setting Field name Tag component constant value pE Delete DB Tag link setting is not displayed ao b In the case of Operation action Table 7 61 Display for Operation action D Item Description 6 Operation action No 1 Operation action No n 2 e With substitution setting 2 Operation action Display format 2 Substitution tag component constant value Operation tag component constant value Operator Operation tag component constant value e Without substitution setting o Operation action ee Substitution tag component constant value Operation tag component constant value zZ 8 lt W Da O 1 Display format of the tag component constant value Table 7 62 Display format of the tag component constant value Item Description Tag component Device tag name component name Number Numerical value INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION String C
348. ion for installation 2 2 OVERVIEW N FA Q 4 a a Le Zz fe SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEG A series 2 1 3 System configuration for initial setup This section shows system configurations for initial setup of the MES interface module using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool MES interface module Twisted pair cable Crossing cable Ethernet Configuration computer or MES interface module Twisted pair cable Straight cable Remark Sooo ooo econ The following explains the network settings of the configuration computer when connecting it to the MES interface module on a 1 1 basis Set the same network address as the one of the MES interface module in the network settings for the configuration computer Set the values to be identical m a a Re a r Set different values Default value of Host Host MES interface module Network section Section Configuration computer Network section section IP ADDRESS 192 168 3 3 e IP ADDRESS _192 168 3 1 fp Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Figure 2 5 Network settings for configuration computer Make the network settings of the configuration comp
349. ion is not obtainable from the SNTP server computer refer to the following K Section 7 6 2 3 When time information is not obtainable from the SNTP server computer 6 25 6 3 Time Synchronization Function 6 3 2 Daylight saving time function MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSE TE eries CHAPTER 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL This chapter explains the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 7 1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool The MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is used to configure various settings required for the MES interface function in the MES interface module In addition to the configuration the MES interface function offers features such as the operation status check working log check or stop restart operation 7 2 Starting the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Q Select Microsoft Windows Start All Programs MELSOFT Application MESInterface MES interface function configuration tool The MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is activated Up to five MES Interface Function Configuration Tools can be started 7 1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool T 1 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er fa fe o eA o9 ra toe EZO 25 36 sro z O E O Z U DB CONNE
350. iring records 5 Tag Type Component fi 2 a E nO JV Notify the number of acquired records Ta Component ae V Clear the unused tag components by zero 2 O Cancel lt Figure 7 86 Multi select setting dialog box g a Specify the maximum number of acquiring records If the Specify the maximum number of acquiring records checkbox is checked records of up to the specified number are acquired E The records are acquired in the sorting order set in Select sort settings Zu igi DDO When selecting this set a tag for which a value is specified g ae 8 1 Tab Type na Select a tag for which a value is specified Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable 2 Component Select or directly enter a component or a constant value to be specified Table 7 74 Values available for Component Item Values available for Component INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Number Within the range of 1 to 40000 Device tag Single or double precision type tag component Point An error occurs if the specified tag component value is 0 or less For error codes refer to the following L gt Section 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module FUNCTIONS er fa fe o eA 9 ra toe EZO 260 36 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 105 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION
351. is canceled when the error cause is the following a e Failure in device data writing due to network disconnection within the programmable controller system e Failure in device data writing or an operation error e Failure in access to database except for jobs for which DB buffering is enabled Section 6 1 9 DB buffering function 5 e When statistic processing of Moving average Moving maximum or Moving E minimum is specified for a tag component sampling for the specified number ee of times is not complete e Failure in program execution b If a job execution is canceled the operation processed before the error Z occurrence returns to the status before the job execution 5 The following explains access to device data in the programmable controller CPU and to the database 1 Device data in the programmable controller CPU of Since all of data are written to the device data area in the programmable Bae controller CPU at a time upon completion of job execution any change due to See the error is not reflected in the device data of the programmable controller Bae CPU 2 Database a Rollback is executed assuming the time immediately before job activation as 23 a commit point k However when the database is Wonderware Historian rollback is not a5 executed When an error occurs data input before error occurrence is 23 reflected on the database ez eseeeeoeeveeveeseeeoeeeeseenoeeeeneeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeee ee c W
352. is reported to a tag component She b When Notify the access error status is selected choose a tag component into ge whose device the access error status data is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set c Data are stored as follows depending on the data type INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Table 7 42 Values for Notify the access error status Data type of tag a Description component Bit OFF Normal Not accessed ON Access error status 0 Normal Not accessed Other than the above 1 Access error status FUNCTIONS er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 9 Server Service Setting T 53 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 54 Point MELSEC IA series 8 Connection timeout Range 1 to 180 seconds Default 10 seconds In case a connection error occurs on the network between the MES interface module and the server computer set a timeout time during which the MES interface module will detect the error Usually this setting is not needed In any of the following cases adjust the connection timeout time if necessary a Reduce the connection timeout time to e Make the time elapsed from occurrence of a co
353. is selected Item Description Output destination Set the output destination of the log file SQL failed log capacity Set the file capacity per SQL failure log and number of files 1 Output destination Default sqlFailed log Set the output destination of the log file If no output destination is set the log is output to the install folder If a read only file is specified the log is not output and SQL failure log output error is output to Administrative Tools Event Viewer of Windows SQL failed log capacity Range 1 to 10 MB x 2 to 100 files Default 1 MB x 10 files Set the file capacity per SQL failure log and number of files If the log exceeds the capacity for one file a new log file which copies the original log file name with adding a number is created If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files the file is deleted from the oldest one Y 8 19 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC LA series 8 6 Importing Exporting Files Import export files gt Ww gt fe 1 Import Import a saved file Select File Import from the menu Z z The Open dialog box is displayed 23 Le Set the following items then click the Open button 2S Look jn MESIF B dbConnected ip fe z o i A N File name Open Files of type DB connectio
354. is selected with OTHER STATION Make the settings causes an error NET10 and ETHERNET cannot be set when NET 10 or ETHERNET is selected with NET1 Make the settings causes an error CCLINK and C24 cannot be set when CCLINK or C24 is selected with NET 1 Make the settings causes an error NET10 ETHERNET and C24 cannot be set when other than QCPU is selected with SERIES Make the settings causes an error Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV APPENDICES 26 Q series Appendix 3 8 TAG CSV Lu o 1 File format P am Table App 23 File format Ze Item Description File name TAG CSV File contents Device tag settings gt Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting 2 6 i a g A H jraci_fure A execu fio __ yo_Jenasur no p TAG2 Line B HIGHSPEED 1 ENABLE NO 1 TAG5 Line C TA a YES lenasle wo 3 i Q ja a g f v v amp ARRAY ARRAYSIZE ARRAYTYPE BLOCKSPECIFY BLOCKSIZE osage o T y p s o G S loisape enaere 3 ptock osasse File format L Item row Cannot be changed by the user ia L Label column Setting area Can be changed by the user 2 Device tag settings New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help Teepe Bm gt Device tag name NewTaa P Prohibit data writing Sampling settinas G vm 4
355. isplaying a reference Displaying a chapter title Reference in this manual and Index on the right of a page reference manual are shown ii clears the chapter of the page with C7 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSECTE arcs CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the MES interface module OVERVIEW 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 1 Overall system configuration This section shows the overall system configuration when using the MES interface module Oracle SAL Server etc manufactured by other companies SNTP server computer I Server computer SPECIFICATIONS Ethemet SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Q QnA ACPU I Functions provided by MX MESInterface Figure 2 1 Overall system configuration when using the MES interface module FUNCTIONS 1 The SNTP server computer and configuration computer can be shared with server computers This computer is necessary when using the SNTP server computer time for the MES interface module time Section 6 3 Time synchronization function J MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 1 Overall system configuration _ Displaying a section title The section in which the open page is included is clear The above is different from the actual page as it is provided for explanation only In addit
356. ist 5 Program execution reception processing results Table 8 24 Program execution reception processing results Item Description Output vnen Date Error code SID P E S e IP lt Co d line gt Success Ret lue a rror co rogramExec Sourc mmand lin uccess Return value ce succeeded k og forma ci When failed Date Error code SID ProgramExec Source IP lt Command line gt Failed When Example Jz 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 ProgramExec 192 168 3 3 lt hoge exe gt Success 0 succeede 00 27 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 8 1 Access log 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC LE series 8 8 2 SQL failure log When an SQL text is executed on a database if an error occurs the error contents are ii gt output to the SQL failure log i The following shows the SQL failure log contents 2 For details on Database error number and Database error message in the output log format refer to the manual for each database Depending on the Error code however Database Message and subsequent data cannot Z be output z According to the error code confirm the error details and take corrective actions z0 A r L gt Section 10 2 2 3 SQL failure log of DB Connection Service 2S Table 8 25 SQL failure log Item Description Output Og Ome Date Error code Target data source SQL text g Database Message Database error number Database error message
357. items in Time synchronization setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series c Daylight saving setting A click on the Setting button displays the Daylight saving setting dialog box z w Make settings for the following items and click the button ee gt O Daylight saving setting zZ fe Setting by week zd Month Day of week Time x Dg mar v sun v 02 00 5 Z ros Nov B x Sun x C Setting by date 2 O m f A N Figure 7 22 Daylight saving setting ae Zz n0 Table 7 24 Setting items in Daylight saving setting E ou OLO Item Description Enable daylight saving Enable or disable the daylight saving setting Specify the date and time of the start time at which the clock is set ahead and those of the end time at which the clock is set back for Month Week Setting by week Day of week and Time The default is set to starting at 02 00 on the second Sunday in March and ending at 02 00 on the first Sunday in November Specify the date and time of the start time at which the clock is set ahead and those of the end time at which the clock is set back for Month Day Setting by date and Time The default is set to starting on April 1 at 02 00 and ending on October 1 at 02 00 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j mn 5 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO DB C
358. ity of USER or higher must be used fo O 2 T E A EO ly ire 926 SPo re Oy ei 526 wee Zog SE akh ann 2 4 Operating Environment 2 10 2 4 1 Configuration computer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series Performance required for personal computer and operating systems Table 2 5 Performance required for personal computer and operating systems Operating system Performance required for personal computer CPU Windows 2000 Professional Windows xP Professional Pentium 300MHz or more 128 MB or more Windows xP Home Edition Windows 2000 Server Pentium 550MHz or more 256 MB or more Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Home Basic Windows Vista Home Premium Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Ultimate Windows Vista Enterprise 2 11 2 4 Operating Environment 2 4 1 Configuration computer Pentium 14GHz or more 1GB or more 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 2 4 2 Server computer This section explains the operating environment for the server computer OVERVIEW Table 2 6 Operating environment for server computer Item Description N Computer PC AT compatible personal computer can operate the following operating systems CPU Required See Table 2 7 Performance required for personal computer and operating systems memory z Hard disk available capacity 64 MB or more a 3 Disc drive CD ROM disc drive
359. job cancellation occurred during job execution 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module Terminate the job that is in execution or use another Server service settings item Section 7 9 Server Service Setting If a job uses the same Server service settings item that is currently used for another job the job is not executed until another job execution is completed If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions Section 10 2 Error Code List When the job uses a tag component for which Moving average Moving maximum or Moving minimum is specified check if sampling for the specified number of times is completed To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom The program specified by the program execution function is not executed Checked item Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log L7 Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module Corrective action e If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List Was the Windows account specified in Server service settings used to log on the application server computer once or more Use the account that has been used to log on once or more
360. job execution 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 3 6 1 2 Job execution procedure 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE series 6 1 3 Tag function The tag function collects device data of the programmable controller CPUs on the network a in units of tags i By allocating database fields to tag components the DB interface function enables the 2 following e Database value reading writing e Reading writing of programmable controller CPU device data specified with tag 3 O components g For the tag function setting refer to the following o gt Section 7 8 Device Tag Setting 26 Programmable MES interface module controller CPU CPU1 Device tag name Process1 Device Component name CPU name Device Data type 2 ooo OOO Hee e oe Eae omo he oa Parameter 9 D2001 9 5 Figure 6 3 Tag function Point ei eZ For the tags for which Enhance sampling efficiency is selected the tag data can Bae be read out at high speed when they are collected and when handshake operation SEE is performed Bee S Ze 2s 5R z2 23 ez o Zz O O Z 5 Le MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 4 6 1 3 Tag function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function The trigger monitoring function monitors values such as the time and tag values and when the trigger condition changes from fals
361. job execution in the XML processing function Section 6 2 XML Processing Function e Online Remote operation Change job status C gt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status 3 Trigger buffering a Set whether to enable the trigger buffering function or not For the trigger buffering function refer to the following Section 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function b Precautions when selecting Trigger buffering 1 Handshake operation is not selectable for trigger conditions 2 No tag component can be selected for Substitution tag of Operation action 3 No tag component can be selected for Substitution tag of Select in Communication action 4 Communication action MultiSelect cannot be selected 5 Up to 4096 words 1 can be set as the total tag component data length usable in one job The setting can be checked on the status bar of Job settings or in each action dialog box 1 The total data length of the tag components that are set in DB tag link settings or Select Update Delete conditions of Communication action or in Operation action If two or more identical tag components are set in the same job respective data lengths are counted O a deleted record cannot be restored 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting When Delete is used for Communication action and if it is executed the T 57 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO S
362. k up your computer rity Appearance and Check for updates hy Personalization Check this computer s security status 5 hange desktop background Aow 2 program through Windows nestonire ators o Firewall Adjust screen resolution z i E Network and Internet Clock Language and Region Connect to the Internet k Chenge taybossia ar oihar inpit i View network status and tasks pa L Set up file sharing h Ease of Access o Hardware and Sound e Er a Play CDs or other media automatically tienes visaa digi 3 Printer 7 X Mouse Additional Options E Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs Mobile PC Change battery settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings N LW Q ja Zz W Q Select User A nt Z elec ser Accountsj lt User Accounts Change your account picture Add or remove user accounts Change your Windows password Windows CardSpace Manage Information Cards that are used to log on to online services Q Z gt o SL lt a 4 Select Turn User Account Control on or off NEn earm gt User Accounts User Accounts 4 Search 2 7 E When User Account Control is enabled in Make changes to your user account Windows Vista the following screen appears Change your password ei co 7 M Santa Pama anes Click the Continue button Change your account name Change your account type Manage another account Tum User Account Control on or off
363. l a aids eine 10 4 T0 2 Enron OOd E E SE cutee hes ieaeeteess eres hae eh et ad a ed ihe Bea he Pn etre he 10 7 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module eccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeceeeeeeeeeeeteetensennnanaeeees 10 7 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service ccccccececcecceceeeeeeeeeeeenecaeeeeeeeeeeseesennnncaneeeeeeeess 10 22 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response MESSAGES eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeentaeeeeeeetsaeeeeesenaes 10 32 10 3 Troubleshooting by SYMPtOM 0 eee eect a T EAEE REEE EE a EEE 10 33 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool sseeseesssssseeseeerresreerressrerrsssrerns 10 33 10 3 2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool eeecceeeeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 10 38 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface MOUIC eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeetaeeeeeeetiateeeeteaaes 10 39 APPENDICES App 1 to App 67 Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface cccceeetetetee App 1 Appendix 1 1 Addition of new functions cccccccceccceeeeeeceeeeeecaeceeeeeeeeeeecencneaaececeeeeeeeeesessecsiaeeeeeees App 1 Appendix 1 2 Operations of former Versions c ccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeeeseecsanecaeeeeeeeeeees App 3 Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables 00 ceccececececceceeee cette eeeeeecneaeeeeeee
364. l processing a Set whether to perform statistical processing or not Up to 64 components that have Perform statistical processing setting can be set in all projects The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of Device tag settings When the Perform statistical processing box is checked statistical processing is performed for tag component values Statistically processed values can be used by specifying the tag component values for which Perform statistical processing is selected in Job settings Note that this setting is not available when e Do not sample is selected in Sampling settings e The data type of the tag component is String e Array setting is set b When Perform statistical processing is selected set the following items Table 7 37 Setting items for Perform statistical processing Item Description Statistical type Select a type of the statistical processing Specify the number of samples 2 to 20 when Moving average No of samples ian ples g ge Moving maximum or Moving minimum is selected T 46 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 1 Statistical type Select a type of the statistical processing Table 7 38 Options of Statistical type ii Average An average value after starting sampling is stored Maximum The maximum
365. l software has been installed set the 0x20100011 Failed to start the service due to failure of the D E specified server port operational server port initialization Terminate the application that has opened the TONNE Service Not Start server port x20100 Another application has opened the server port Set another server port No with DB Connection Service Setting Tool Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20100013 System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Not Initialize a service for each client IP address SPN r as e Terminate any unnecessary applications 0x2020000171 Failed to initialize a service for each client due to Bi Add more memory to the personal computer insufficient memory Deny network connection request from IP s ddress Using DB Connection Service Setting Tool add address 0x20200002 the IP address to those with connection Rejected the connection request from the non at permission permitted IP address Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20200003 System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP OES e Terminate any unnecessary applications 0x20300001 address Failed to receive data due to insufficient memory Add more memory to the personal computer To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 10 26 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Ser
366. le Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled Tags for which Array setting is set e Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value Table 7 54 Values that can be entered as a substitute value Data type of tag 3 Values that can be entered as a substitute value component Bit ON OFF is selectable Up to 16 characters Single precision integer Signed decimal notation Double precision integer Example 521 98 Floating point data e Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the Character string following lt gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 3 Do not execute job when the value is faulty Program execution settings before action execution only When the Do not execute job when the value is faulty box is checked if the return value is faulty the job execution is canceled 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 5 Wait for execution completion Set whether or not to wait for execution completion of the program before executing the next processing When Check return value is selected Wait for execution completion is always selected z 9 z 5 O be cas 2 ie z O i ae Zz B2
367. lease consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OOE9h Link timeout The access target is disconnected from the link during the processing e Reconnect the access target on the access route OOEAh Special module BUSY The receive buffer of the access target is full or is not ready for reception Examine the hardware of the intelligent or special function module OOECh OOFOh Access target BUSY Link error The receive buffer of the access target is full or is not ready for reception An request was made to a link stop station Check the access target e Restore the link to connect the station on the access route OOF 1h Special module bus error The specified intelligent or special function module is not ready for processing OOF2h Special module timeout No response has been received from the specified intelligent or special function module 10 2 Error Code List e Examine the hardware of the intelligent or special function module To the next page 10 8 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module se XML MESSAGE on FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0100h to 0104h 0110h 0112h 0180h MELSEC LE series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interfac
368. lete Z Database Det Field name Tag Type 21 CEEE Generated SQL text n Ja ceai E Table name CompletionReport Select Update Delete conditions Condition Tag Type Number Number Combine Field name Field AND field2 Component Ail Exception process setting DELETE FROM CompletionReport WHERE field1 1 AND fiel No of fields in project 2 d Tag component data length in job 0 words total Figure 7 78 An example of Delete setting E Point When Delete is selected for Action type and multiple records are found to be deleted all of them will be deleted If the Select Update Delete conditions area is blank all records will be deleted from the specified table 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action T 91 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er fa fe o eA o9 ra toe EZO 260 36 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LE series f About tag components Tag components can be used as component values for each action or as condition values of Select Update Delete conditions The following table lists data types of tag components and those of as
369. lick the OK button in the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box End 8 9 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC el series 3 For Microsoft Access 2000 Microsoft Access 2003 and Microsoft Access 2007 The following shows a setting example using Microsoft Access 2003 with Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Set the following conditions Data source name SAMPLEDS Database name 2 C mes sampledb mdb 1 Data source name can be set as desired For Data source name in Server service settings use the name set with this setting 2 The database name is the name for accessing a Microsoft Access database Specify a database file path created with Microsoft Access Start m me ETE D Clicking Performance and Maintenance on the O O P psh res Control Panel displays the Performance and j Maintenance dialog box To display the Control Panel select Start Control Panel 2 Startup and shutdown sems on your hard disk to make programs run faster or pick a Control Panel icon j w Eh Power Clicking Administrative Tools displays Administrative Tools dialog box Other Places B Control Panel Local Securty Poley Shortcut My Documents 2kB F My Computer My Network Places Sr SR RET Double clicking Data Sources ODBC displays User DSN System DSN Fie DSN Dive
370. lock circuit on Sequence programs so that the whole system functions safely all the time Also be sure to read the manual carefully and ensure safety before performing any other controls such as operating status change Especially when controlling a programmable controller from a remote location via network problems on the programmable controller side may not be dealt with promptly due to failure of data communications Create an interlock circuit on a sequence program For the operation status of each station at a communication error refer to the manual for that station Incorrect output or malfunctions may cause an accident Install a safety circuit external to the programmable controller that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the programmable controller Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation When the programmable controller system security needs to be protected against illegal access from an external device via a network take measures at the user s discretion Design Precautions WARNING Do not write any data to the System area in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module As for signals output from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module never output ON a Use prohibited signal Doing these operations may cause malfunctions of the programmable controller system CAUTION Do n
371. lowing methods a Power ON the programmable controller from OFF or reset the programmable controller CPU b Select Online and click the View working log button L Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 5 Error log area 3 27 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z Q lt Q m O int a Oo SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 6 Sampling monitoring cycle area AG Q series The MES interface module monitors the device data sampling time and trigger conditions alternately The time cycle required for this repetition can be confirmed in this area When the sampling monitoring cycle is one second device tag sampling and trigger conditions are monitored based on the set values When it is longer than one second delay of up to sampling monitoring cycle minus 1 second may occur in the monitoring 1 Current cycle buffer memory address 800 to 801 The current sampling monitoring cycle value is stored Unit Second 2 Maximum cycle buffer memory address 802 to 803 The maximum sampling monitoring cycle value up to the present moment is stored Unit Second 3 6 7 Tag status area 1 Tag setting information Buffer memory addr
372. lt 37 Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Is the user name and password setting correct Correct the user name and password setting gt Section 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting Is the IP address duplicated Correct the IP address setting lt 3 Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Is there a firewall and or a proxy server in the connection route e Ask your network administrator about the firewall and proxy server settings Is the MES interface module connected to the network Network connection status X4 ON Is it in Online mode Is there any problem on the personal computer Have five MES Interface Function Configuration Tools already started The specified project file is incorrect or corrupted Connect the MES interface module to the network Change the mode to Online e Replace it with another computer e Terminate any of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tools and then start another Up to five MES Interface Function Configuration Tools can be started e Specify a correct project file Is there any inconsistency in the setting e Check the setting and correct it if any Did the number of settings exceed the upper limit e Check the number of settings 3 Section 7 4 4 Importing a project Unable to import a CSV file Is the CSV file description correct Is there any inconsistency in the setting e Correct
373. ly high Is data volume in the data base within the specified capacity of the personal computer Review data volume in the data base Check if the number of selected updated records are extreme when selecting or updating Is there any problem on the connection routes to all of the database server computers Set the Select Update Delete conditions that apply appropriate records only Check the connections with all of the database server computers When buffered SQL texts are to be sent to more than one destination unless the communication with all the database server computers is recovered resending is not started Are the DB Connection Services in all the database server computers operating normally Check each of the DB Connection Services in all the database server computers When buffered SQL texts are to be sent to more than one destination unless DB Connection Services in all the database server computers are operating resending is not started Data such as DB buffering status No of DB bufferings DB buffer full or DB buffer utilization will not be stored in the tag component which is selected in DB buffering settings of System setting L3 Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting Was the setting that enables data writing to the tag component made in Job settings Select another tag component or check the Job settings and disable data writing to the relevant tag compo
374. m Bh Security Settings b B Account Policies gt B Local Policies b B Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec gt El Public Key Policies Jows Firewall with Adv b B Software Restriction Policies UEUN b amp P Security Policies on Local Compute Software Restriction Policies BP Security Policies on Local Internet Protocol Security IPsec Administratio i Q Select Security Options Ble Action View Help es MXe H m BB Security Settings Name el Description gt s a Policies ij Audit Policy Audit Policy gt Policies Ki i d A User Rights Assignment User Rights Assignment b I Windows Firewall with Advanced Seci Sh vse mhte Ansion e gt B Public Key Policies ieai wo gt Bl Software Restriction Policies b amp P Security Policies on Local Compute l To the next page App 63 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES E Security Settings T Account Policies 4 T Local Policies b B Audit Policy b B User Rights Assigr B Security Options E Windows Firewall witi E Public Key Policies Software Restriction F P Security Policies or XEBH m From the previous page l Policy Network security LDAP client signing requirements Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including se
375. m Description File name ORDERBY CSV File contents Communication action Select sort setting lt gt Section 7 11 1 6 Select sort settings ITEM FIELDNAME SORTTYPE ORDERBY1 1 1 Completed ASC ORDERBY1 1 2 Rejected DESC ry M Item row File format __ Label column setting area Communication action Select sort settings Field name Order 2 Label Table App 58 Label Label Description Job setting No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 Select Update Delete conditions No 1 to 8 ORDERBY1 1 1 to ORDERBY64 10 8 ORDERBY64 10 20 t Indicates Select Update Delete conditions No 1 to 8 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 3 Setting item Table App 59 Setting item Item Description Setting value FIELDNAME Field name Any character string Ascending order ASC SORTTYPE Sorting method Descending order DESC App 47 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 19 ORDERBY CSV APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 20 MULTISELECT CSV 1 File format XML MESSAGE FORMAT Table App 60 File format Item Description File name MULTISELECT CSV File contents Communication action Multi select setting lt gt Section 7 11 1 8 Multi select setting 2 es es ITEM MAXREC MAXTYPE MAXTAG MAXELEMENT MAXVALUE MULTISELECT1 1 ENABLE TAG 2 3 MULTISELECT1 2 DISABLE
376. m is not allowed Only the CPU name can be modified me fe amp a CPU name NewCPU 3 feel irc hz pe PLC series QCPU Q Mode x i Multiple CPU specification No specification I Other station specification fo specification C Other Station Single network o C Other Station Co existence network z Network communication route 2 ce Gj C ge m n ar Zw Iez Co existence network communication route 6 2 Q E og Cc ES 3 z OR D nao Figure 7 28 Access target CPU settings INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Table 7 33 Setting items in Access target CPU settings Item Description CPU name Set the access target CPU name Up to 16 characters PLC series Select the PLC series of the access target CPU Select a CPU No when the access target CPU is used in the multiple CPU Multiple CPU specification system Other station specification Select whether or not to specify any other station Network communication route Co existence network communication route FUNCTIONS Set the network type network No head I O address and station No used for access when any other station is specified j 1 CPU name Up to 16 characters Set the access target CPU name The set CPU name is used in Device tag settings For characters that can be used for CPU names refer to the following m 5 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO gt Appendix 2 2 Characters avail
377. man body etc Not doing so can cause the module to fail or malfunction 3 Tighten the module fixing screws within the following range Table 4 1 Tightening torque Screw Tightening torque range Module fixing screw usually not required M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48 N m The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration 4 1 4 1 Handling Precautions 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation This section explains the schematic procedure up to operation for using the MES interface function 1 Starting the server computer Es Point Start the server computer and then the MES interface module K 2 Starting the MES interface module Procedure to operation ee Server computer SNTP server computer Database server computer 1 Application server computer 2 SNTP server computer 3 d Start the SNTP server Install the relational database Create a user program and design the table 4 Set ODBC for the database Create an account for user program oe Section 8 2 Setting ODBC to the S ecution Database 4 Install DB Connection Service and DB Install DB Connection Se
378. ming may be changed 2 Since the MES interface module obtains time data of CPU No 1 in the following timings transmission time delay may occur e When powering ON the programmable controller from OFF e When resetting the programmable controller CPU e Once a minute SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 3 When obtaining the clock data of CPU No 1 an error of up to scan time of CPU No 1 plus 1 second may be observed Point When using the time information which is obtained from the SNTP server computer in the programmable controller CPU lt Section 6 3 1 Using the SNTP time query result in the programmable controller CPU INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 23 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 24 MELSEC IA series 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface module At least one account setting is required and up to 16 accounts can be set Account setting QJ71MES96 Add estes Figure 7 23 Account setting 1 Adding an account D Clicking the Add button displays the Add Account dialog box Set the following items and click the _OK_ button Add
379. module continuation error ERR LED ON turns OFF the ERR LED and X10 X11 X16 and X1C During a module stop error ERR LED flashing turning this device ON does not turn OFF the Y10 Error clear request ERR LED 3 18 2 Clears the Current error area Buffer memory address 140 to 145 Clears the latest error code displayed on System monitor of GX Developer gt Section 10 1 3 System monitor 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 2 I O signals details 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 3 5 Buffer Memory List a The buffer memory list is shown below g x W Table 3 15 Buffer memory list Address aie Initial Reference Application i Decimal Hex value section 0 RUN LED status gt 0 R 6 0x 0 OFF 1 ON 1 ERR LED status 5 0 R ao 1h 0 OFF 1 ON 2 Flash Re Switch 1 status Mode setting cas 2 0000h Online 3 0 R 2h 0001h Hardware test 0002h Self loopback test Switch 2 status Default operation setting battery error detection setting z 1 Default operation setting Account setting b0 B O 0 Operates according to Account setting z Module status 1 Operates according to the default Section f n 3 area 2 Default operation setting Account setting b1 0 R 3 6 1 3x 0 Operates according to Network settings 1 Operates according to the default 3 Battery error detection setting b2 6 0 Dete
380. mpletion timed out No response has returned from DB when accessed the database or from the program being executed An Ethernet communication error has occurred e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct Check if the ODBC setting is correct e Check if the database is operating normally e Check if the program specified for program execution has been completed e In DB Connection Service Setting Tool increase the DB access timeout value e Check if the processing load of the server computer is excessively high Check if data volume in the data base is exceeding the specified capacity of the personal computer e Check if the number of selected updated records are extreme when selecting or updating OBA7h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OBA8h SELECT execution error Failed to execute SELECT OBA9h COMMIT execution error Failed to execute COMMIT OBAAh 10 17 ROLLBACK execution error 10 2 Error Code List Failed to execute ROLLBACK 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module e Check the sent SQL text and database contents e Check if the table and field settings are correct To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code OBABh MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for
381. mpling is completed for the tag whose number is set as the No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 Specify tag No Example Specify 5 No of stored tag Buffer memory address 1291 Update count The current tag No is stored Buffer memory address 1292 No of components Example 5 is stored The cumulative number of updates is stored 1 is stored Buffer memory address 1293 Current tag data value Tag data is stored Buffer memory address 1300 No of components _ is stored Figure 3 11 Current tag data value area 1 No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 Specify the tag number whose current value is displayed as the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 2 No of stored tag Buffer memory address 1291 The tag No displayed as the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 is stored 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 8 Current tag data value area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 3 Update count Buffer memory address 1292 a After the power is ON the cumulative number of updates for the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 is stored OVERVIEW b After specifying the tag number displayed as the No of requested tag Buffer memory address
382. mputer Section 8 1 Communication Outputs the communication contents between the MES interface module and DB Log output log Connection Service to the access log function If data cannot be updated inserted deleted normally due to no table etc at SQL text SQL failure log execution the error contents are output to the SQL failure log DB Connection Service Settin g Software changes the DB Connection Service settings Section 8 5 Tool 3 3 Function List 3 13 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z Q lt Q m O rt a 2 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 1 I O signal list The following lists the MES interface module I O signals to the programmable controller CPU The following I O signal assignment is based on the case where the start I O No of the MES interface module is 0000 installed to slot 0 of the main base unit If the MES interface module is mounted other than slot 0 see the list with changing the I O signals by those of the mounted slot Device X indicates an input signal from the MES interface module to the programmable controller CPU and device Y indicates an output signal from the programmable controller CPU to the
383. ms of DB Connection Service Setting Tool Item Description Service port required Set the port number where the DB Connection Service operates Set a DB access timeout Unit seconds for the case where no response ar DB access timeout is returned to the MES interface module after requesting the server Zu required computer for value writing to or reading from the database or for a program 3a 2 Z W execution ES g m Y A Limit IP addresses which ano Specify whether or not to set the IP addresses permitted to connect permit to connect Output access log Set whether or not to output the access log Output SQL failed log Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log 1 Service port required Range 1024 to 65535 Default 5112 4 7 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Set the port number where the DB Connection Service operates The set port number is used for communications with the MES interface module 1 Set the same value in Service port as the one set in Server service settings Port No of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 7 Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting 2 Specify the number of the port that is not being used by any database or another application Usually it need not be changed FUNCTIONS 2 DB access timeout required Range 1 to 3600 Default 30 Set a DB access timeout Unit seconds for the case where no response is returned to the MES interfac
384. n expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s
385. n be assigned to a database or to a tag component In the latter case operation is performed based on a value extracted from the database The following table shows the variable types and values that can be entered in the Component column Up to 64 variables can be set for one job EJ Point 1 A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held 2 The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value of zero 3 If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component when a substitution tag is the tag component Type conversion to tag component error is displayed Check the type of the source and type of the tag component C Section 7 15 4 Type mismatch T 110 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series Table 7 78 Variable types and values available for Component Variable type Values variable names that can be entered in Component Up to 16 characters Variable For the characters that can be used for variables refer to the following i ariable Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc z fe E 3 Setting example of Operation action 5 20 The following is a case in which correction power is calculated using a correction EE a fe voltage and it is assigned to a ta
386. n service setting files xm v Cancel Figure 8 10 Open dialog box o Table 8 8 Setting items in the Open dialog box Z y Item Description g 5 Look in Select the location where the file is stored E om File name Specify the name of the file to be imported wes n Select a type of the file to be imported Files of type naa DB connection service setting files Point When importing a file use the one that was stored by the export function Do not edit any export file INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe z O O Mn Z Z Q i a a 38 ae lu og 9z ZE W W nn 8 6 Importing Exporting Files 8 20 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series 2 Export Export the DB Connection Service Setting Tool to a file Select File Export from the menu The Save As dialog box is displayed Set the following items then click the Save button Save in CQ MESIF E dbConnected File name Save Save as type DB connection service setting files xm vf Cancel Figure 8 11 Save As dialog box Table 8 9 Setting items in the Save As dialog box Item Description Save in Select the location where the file is to be saved File name Specify the name of the file to be saved Select a type of the file to be saved Files of type typ DB connection service setti
387. nannaaatdaaaaaiani naaa 6 5 61 59 Trigger buffering funtion ron rrin a r EE evan delete 6 7 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action 1 0 0 eccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeteeaeees 6 10 6 1 7 Arithmetic processing function Operation action eeeseeeeeeeeeesrseseerrsssrrrrsssrerrrssrrrrrssreeens 6 11 6 1 8 Program execution UNCON eee eeeecccceeeeeeecaeeeeeeecaceeeneseaaeeeeeeecaaeeeneeeeceeeeseeaaaeeeteeeaaeenes 6 11 6 1 9 DB uffering TUNCHION siidinissaiierniirti er p 2 coveted iE A EN A deraa awed 6 12 e10 PRECAUTIONS oaren ani esaa RT a A E A A RARE OOR E AA 6 21 6 2 XML Processing FUNCUON meriiri erarnan E EEE EETA A AEAEE AEAEE 6 23 6 3 Time Synchronization FUNCTION cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeaeeees 6 24 6 3 1 Using the SNTP time query result in the programmable controller CPU sses 6 24 6 3 2 Daylight saving time FUNCTION eee ceeeeee eee eeeee A A T E 6 25 CHAPTER7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 1to 7 135 7 1 MES Interface Function Configuration TOol 0 cccccceeeeescereeeeeeeeneeeeeeecieeeeeetineeeeeeteeeeeetieeeeee 7 1 7 2 Starting the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 0 ccccccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeetieeeeees 7 1 FB SCKECM SIMU CHUNG iiini ate pocecitaadaccddindad E A A tebtad E addend banedecdeuuded ededia meee Metdaativetns 7 2 T 31 Screen structure seserinis irinae ii eeii AE EN
388. ncel 7 Figure 7 14 Import from project file dialog box al Q e Table 7 9 Setting items in the Import from project file dialog box W lt E Item Description te z ra fe Selection tree In the tree select the item to be imported Zz 5 z Existing registration Displays the number of settings for each setting type in the project into g 5 6 information which data are imported Import information Displays the number of the settings to be imported for each setting type Oy i 528 lt tr 202 gt F oo fi ba ann 7 4 Project File Handling T 11 7 4 4 Importing a project MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 1 Selecting an item to be imported In the tree select the item to be imported Table 7 10 Item to be imported Checked item Item to be imported Project root All items in the project Setting type All items under the setting type whose checkbox is checked Item Each item whose checkbox is checked When the setting type shown below is selected items under any other setting type are automatically selected if they are used for the selected one Note that if an item of the same name exists in the target project the item is not automatically selected The user must select items to be imported Table 7 11 Automatically selected item Setting type Automatically selected item Device tag settings Access target CPU settings Job settings Device tag
389. ncluded each setting type for editing Account Designates the right to use the MES interface module or server computer or an ID necessary for their use Unit for processing defined in a job There are Communication action for communicating with a database and Operation action for enon operating tag component values Communication action is a processing unit for sending one SQL text Select Update Insert MultiSelect or Delete Operation action is a processing unit of up to 20 dyadic operations System switching Function for the Redundant CPU to switch between control system and standby system of the redundant system Switching from control system to standby system and vice versa COMMIT Processing for finalizing the changes to a database CompactFlash card CF card A 20 Storage card regulated by the CF and CompactFlash Specification issued by the Compact Flash Association This memory card is necessary for the MES interface module to operate the MES interface function To the next page From the previous page Term Description Server service Generic term for the services can be offered by a server computer to which DB Connection Service is installed There are database server service and application server service The database server service is a service for accessing a database The application server service is a service for linking with a program Server computer There are
390. nction 6 Temporarily stores SQL texts in a CompactFlash card when a communication error occurs lt 7 Section 6 1 9 DB buffering function 6 1 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 1 DB interface function operation 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series 6 1 2 Job execution procedure The following shows the job execution procedure fi gt fe Is the MES interface function Stopped z working 3 No job is executed while the function is stopped E z Working Activate the MES interface function aS ees Section 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function e Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function 2 J O z O i l Disabled m Is the job enabled a The job is not executed when it is disabled Enabled Enable the job 3 Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status e Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT 9 Zug 7 Fom Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met ma wn L Section 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions When Handshake operation is selected for Trigger conditions tag component values are read out from the programmable controller CPU INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Is the Execute program before action box checked Not checked ez Checked The program in the application server computer is executed before execution
391. nd Network settings with their default Z U 1 Account setting bit 0 0 Operates according to Account setting z 1 Operates according to the default Z WwW 2 Network settings bit 1 g 7 0 Operates according to Network settings E23 FOr 1 Operates according to the default 5 6 Le re Oy ei 528 z lt W FAIS Zz OS E ali ann 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 4 10 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series EJ Point Use the default operation setting when changing the settings of the MES interface module connected to the configuration computer on a 1 1 basis b Battery error detection setting bit 2 Set whether to detect battery errors while the MES interface module is operating without battery lt 7 Section 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery 0 Detects battery errors 1 Does not detect battery errors 3 Response monitoring time setting Switch 3 Lower byte Set the timeout time Second from when the MES interface module sends a request to the access target CPU until receiving the reply A response time out error 0002h occurs if the access target CPU does not respond within the set time Setting range 15 to 255 Second Default value 15 seconds When setting the time between 0 and 14 or making no settings response monitoring time operates with 15 seconds b15 to b8 b7 to bO Upper byte Lower byte
392. ne View working log L gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 7 6 System Setting 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 4 Precautions on the time synchronization function a Synchronizing time with SNTP server computer OVERVIEW 1 When Synchronize with SNTP is selected an SNTP server computer is required Note that the SNTP server computer must have the time synchronization server function If time information cannot be obtained at the time of powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU the MES interface module operates in time synchronization with CPU No 1 until successful time information acquisition When the clock time of CPU No 1 is different from that of the SNTP server computer the clock time of the MES interface module is changed when time information is successfully obtained from the SNTP server computer Because of this tag sampling timing and job operation timing may be changed CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS b Synchronizing time with programmable controller CPU 1 Before using the MES interface module set the time of CPU No 1 Changing time setting during operation of the MES interface module changes its clock time at the timing of time data acquisition Because of this tag sampling timing and job operation ti
393. nent Was the device value of the relevant tag component manipulated in the programmable controller CPU Specify another device Or do not manipulate the relevant device value in the programmable controller CPU Failed to communicate with the server computer several times after module startup Was the programmable controller powered ON immediately after OFF e Turn OFF the programmable controller and after several minutes turn it ON Is there any problem on the server computer e Restart the server computer 5 Troubleshooting about the XML processing function Table 10 22 Troubleshooting about the XML processing function Symptom The XML processing function does not work Checked item Is Running displayed in the status indication area of Remote operation Corrective action When Stopped is displayed execute Restart from Remote operation Alternatively turn the power OFF and then ON or reset the programmable controller CPU 6 Troubleshooting about the time synchronization function Table 10 23 Troubleshooting about the time synchronization function Symptom Time is not synchronized with the SNTP server computer Checked item Is the SNTP server address setting correct Corrective action Correct the SNTP server address setting 3 Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating th
394. nformation for end users and Annex ll The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States Appendix 9 1 Disposal precautions TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX App 66 APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 9 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the follwoing when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products 1 Labelling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown in Figure App 11 on the batteries devices or their packaging 2 Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices Point The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enf
395. ng box is not allowed 5 Server service settings gt Section 7 9 Server Service Setting Symptom Unable to set or change Server service name Table 10 14 Server service settings Checked item Is the same name used for another Server service name or Device tag name Corrective action Because a unique name must be used for Server service name and Device tag name use a different name 10 35 Unable to change Server type A desired device tag name is not displayed in Access error notification setting Is the Server service name same as the existing one Is the tag set to data write disabled 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Correct the Server service name Set the tag to data write enabled Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A series 6 Job settings C Section 7 10 Job Setting e Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions Table 10 15 Job settings se XML MESSAGE an FORMAT Symptom Checked item Corrective action Do not use Select actions in the job p p where DB buffering is enabled Unable to set DB buffering settings Is there any Select action set for the job is e The DB buffering is not available for jobs performing Select actions 1 zZ E O O T ol m l D 2 O a4 Delete any unnecessary
396. ng is set Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution 2 Component left side j target Select a tag constant or variable which is computed 3 6 Operation tag i Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable Select or directly enter a component constant value or a variable that is to 4 7 Component right side be computed Select an operator 5 Operator Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Remainder Selecting a row and clicking the w button reverses the order between the 8 f button selected row and the one immediately above it The t button cannot be clicked on the first row Selecting a row and clicking the ES button reverses the order between the 9 al button selected row and the one immediately below it The l button cannot be clicked on the last row 10 button Selecting a row and clicking the button deletes the row 11 Tag component data length in job EJ Point Operation actions are executed in order from the top to the bottom Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 109 7 11 2 Setting items in Operation action OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j mn 5 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65
397. ng about network connection If many files are stored in the CompactFlash card it takes time to turn X1 ON e Delete unnecessary files from the CompactFlash card Table 10 19 Troubleshooting about network connection Symptom Unable to access the MES interface module 10 39 Checked item Is it in Online mode Corrective action Change the mode to Online Is the MES interface module connected to the network X4 ON Connect the MES interface module to the network Is there any disconnection in the connection route e Connect the cables properly Is the IP address duplicated Correct the IP address setting lt gt Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Is there a firewall and or a proxy server in the connection route e Ask your network administrator about the firewall and proxy server settings Is there any problem on the personal computer 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module e Replace it with another computer 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module and access target CPU Table 10 20 Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module and access target CPU Symptom Unable to access another station via Q series E71 An error occurs when accessing the Redundant CPU Checked item Is a remote password set for the G
398. ng contents for the day of the week b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Figure App 3 Setting contents for the day of the week 0 Not set 1 Set Example When the WEEK setting value is 85 85 Decimal number J Convert decimal number into binary number 1010101 Binary number 7 Check the corresponding bits b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Monday Wednesday Friday and Sunday are set Figure App 4 Setting example for day of the week App 33 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV APPENDICES 26 Q series Appendix 3 13 ACTION CSV Lu l 1 File format Bic 23 ana Table App 39 File format e Item Description File name ACTION CSV File contents Job settings Action lt gt Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions 2 O O z ITEM TYPE DB DBTABLE FILEDSNUM z ACTION1 1_ UPDATE CompletionReportt g ACTION2 1 MULTISELECT 2 _ CompletionReport2 i ACTION2 2_ INSERT 3 ERRORLOG ACTION3 1 OPERATION L Item row L Label column setting area Job settings Actions File format Type Summary a 1 Select DB1 RECIPEDATA RECIPE1 gt gt Process1 RECIPE1 RECIPE2 gt gt Process1 RECIPE2 RECIPE3 gt gt 2 Update DB1 CompletionReport Completed lt lt Process1 Completed Rejected lt lt Process Rejected Da 3 Insert DB1 ERRORLOG Date lt lt Date Server time Process_No lt lt 1 Work_No lt lt Process1 Work_No 4 MultiSelect D
399. ng files 8 21 8 6 Importing Exporting Files DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC LA series 8 7 Help The product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool and the Connect to MELFANSweb screen can be displayed 1 Product information Select Help Product information from the menu The Product information dialog box of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool is displayed Product information DB connection service setting tool ver 1 004 Copyright C 2005 2006 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation All Rights Reserved This product is licensed to Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co ProductID Warning This product is protected by the copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law Figure 8 12 Product information dialog box 2 Connect to MELFANSweb Select Help Connect to MELFANSweb from the menu The MELFANSweb page is displayed Online manuals and other information can be viewed 8 7 Help 8 22 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL e e z O O Mn Z Z Q i m a ll 38
400. ng is started gt 7 When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database Time for detecting DB access timeout is set to 30 seconds by default Section 8 5 2 DB access timeout required Range 1 to 3600 Default 30 Even if a trigger condition is met again during detection of DB access timeout the corresponding job is not executed Section 6 1 10 1 Operation behavior of jobs 4 Point If an error occurs when the sent SQL text is executed on the database by some reason such as its incorrectness or inconsistency with the database buffering is not performed and an SQL failure log is output on the database server computer lt L gt Section 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 9 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LA series 3 Processing for which the DB buffering is available Table 6 1 Processing for which the DB buffering is available Processing DB buffering Update Insert Delete action Available Select MultiSelect action N A Program execution 4 Setting the DB buffering E pg Bz bS Configure the settings for the DB buffering function 2 O lt 7 Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting F z i Set whether to enable or disable the DB buffering for D each job L gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering End o 2 lt vz Figure 6 11 DB buffering setting procedure 6a ZW o en naO INSTALLATION A
401. nnection error to the start of DB buffering shorter e Make the time elapsed from occurrence of a connection error to notification of an access error and job cancellation shorter b Increase the connection timeout time when e A connection timeout occurs in spite of normal network condition The relation of the values set for Connection timeout and DB access timeout time in DB Connection Service Setting Tool must be as follows e Connection timeout value lt DB access timeout value 7 9 Server Service Setting 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 10 Job Setting f z Configure the settings for the DB interface function x For the DB interface function refer to the following 2 f C gt Section 6 1 DB Interface Function Q Double clicking Job settings in the Edit items tree displays relevant items l Z 2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed 5 setting edit screen area fl irc Make the setting referring to the following descriptions Bz nO New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help OSHER g AmA z p pies setting nga Newlob Enable at module startup Startup logging o Access target CPU settings M Trigger buffering I Test mode Device tag settings Trigger conditions 2 Server service settings ombination
402. nterface module can be confirmed on the rating plate and GX Developer s system monitor OVERVIEW N 1 Confirming the serial number on the rating plate The rating plate is situated on the side face of the MES interface module MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL Zz Q 4 a a Le Zz fe SYSTEM Serial No first 5 digits MAC ADD SERIAL 2012 0000000000 B ga MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Figure 2 8 SERIAL on the rating plate on the side of the MES interface module Relevant regulation standards SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number 2 14 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Checking on the front of the module a6 Q series The serial No and function version on the rating plate are also indicated on the front of the module lower part QJ71MES96 RUN 10BASE T 100BASE TX QJ71MES96 120121102450001 OW armes o es TERA ae number Function version Figure 2 9 SERIAL on the rating plate on the front of the MES interface module Remark oo occ coor Serial No display on the front of the module was started from December in 2008 Note that however some of the modules manufactured
403. o Server SAMPLESRY z a 7 S Coes tt 9 5 J Q Select the With SQL Server authentication using a login ID and password entered by the user radio button then enter Login ID and Password ag Z z Client Configuration 8 2 2 m ears Seb t eaa OS Login ID PIRES A g a lt Back lt Setting Wonderware Historian gt Mark a check in Change the default value to and select Runtime 1 Change the default database to cael s1 T Attach database filename ct INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION e When you F Use ANSI quoted identifiers FZ Use ANSI nulls paddings and warnings p Use the falover SOL he primary SOL lt Back Cancel Help J To the next page FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe z O O Mn Z Z Q i a a ll 38 ae lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 8 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL From the previous page Test Results Microsoft SOL Server ODBC Driver Version 03 85 1117 te that the connection is normal TESTS COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY aS a6 Q series Inthe ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup dialog box click the Test Data Source button to check Click the OK button in the SQL Server ODBC Data Source Test dialog box Click the OK button in the ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup dialog box C
404. o eA 9 ra coe EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U b Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name that is used for comparison For characters that can be used for field and table names refer to the following lt gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names etc DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 95 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 96 c Condition MELSEC IA series Select a condition for comparison Table 7 69 Selection items for Condition The field value is equal to the condition value x The field value is not equal to the condition value gt The field value is equal to or greater than the condition value gt The field value is greater than the condition value lt The field value is smaller than the condition value lt The field value is equal to or smaller than the condition value d Tag Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison When Update is selected for Action type Variable can be also selected Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable e Component Select or directly enter a component constant value that is used as a condition for comparison If Variable is selected for Tag select or directly enter a variable 5 E E E E 8 eeeeeeveeeeoeeeaeeeeoeoeeoee
405. o button computer as DB connection service and engi then click the Install button When the installation is complete click the Exit button J End After installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and DB Connection Service Setting Tool the following icons are registered fm MESInterface gt f DB connection service setting tool AllPrograms fh MELSOFT Application F To MELFANSweb Homepage MES interface Function configuration tool og OFF fo Shut Down start P My Computer Figure 5 2 Icon registration 1 For Windows Vista DB Connection Service Cliant is installed and its icon DBCnctClient is shown in the list appeared by clicking Start All Programs Startup 5 6 5 1 Installation 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELSEC el series 5 2 Uninstallation This section explains how to uninstall MX MESInterface x W gt O 1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool The following screens are for Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System e Start r l Do PONE From the Control Panel select Add or Remove O B Pn Eres gt Programs ae To display the Control Panel select Start 2 ICK a catego e mie Control Panel 5 Appearance ant d Themes Oo Help and Support P j Network and Internet Connections G oo Z REMARKS 2
406. o01 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt REQUEST type validate jobname Pro01 gt c Invalidate An example disabling the job named Pro01 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt REQUEST type invalidate jobname Pro01 gt When one shot execution is performed in the job for which Handshake operation is specified as a trigger condition Completion notification is turned ON Turn OFF Completion notification in the sequence program 9 1 XML Message Format Definition 9 2 XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC IA series 2 Response message RESPONSE tag Table 9 3 Response message RESPONSE tag Item Description Omission Not possible Format lt RESPONSE status Job execution result code Error code gt The request message reception result is returned status accepted Succeeded failed Failed ASUS If an error occurs the error code is returned code Section 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response messages Contents None Sub component None a Succeeded lt xml version 1 0 gt lt RESPONSE status accepted gt b Failed lt xml version 1 0 gt lt RESPONSE status failed code 0x4117XXXX gt 9 1 XML Message Format Definition Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method This section explains the sending method and sample program of the XML message format 9 2 1 XML message format sending method MELS
407. ocessing function Section 10 3 3 6 Troubleshooting about the time synchronization function Ni a as ac ace ee iy Figure 10 1 Troubleshooting flowchart for operation of the MES interface module 10 1 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 1 Error Codes 10 1 1 This section explains how to find an error code Finding an error code MELSEC A series By an error code check the error details and take corrective actions lt 7 Section 10 2 Error Code List 1 Check an error of the MES interface module An error error code of the MES interface module can be checked by any of the following e System monitor of GX Developer C gt Section 10 1 3 System monitor e Current error area and Error log area in the buffer memory Section 3 6 4 Current error area L gt Section 3 6 5 Error log area e MES interface function configuration tool Working log Error log Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 2 Checking an error of the server computer An error can be checked by log data output to the server computer e Access log of DB Connection Service 3 Section 8 8 1 Access log e SQL failure log of DB Connection Service C gt Section 8 8 2 SQL failure log e Event log of Windows An error of DB Connection Service is output It can be checked by selecting Administrative Tools Event Viewer in Windows Point If more than one error are displayed in Erro
408. odule when executing Update settings turning OFF the power and then ON or resetting the programmable controller CPU For Update settings refer to the following C Section 7 13 2 3 Update settings 2 The System setting data are not updated by Update settings They are refreshed to the MES interface module when the power is turned OFF and then ON or when the programmable controller CPU is reset MX MESInterface O Writing is completed 1 To reflect system settings the hardware of the MES interface module must be reset Figure 7 92 Confirmation dialog box displayed after writing System setting changes 3 After writing the data executing Update settings turning the power OFF and then ON or resetting the programmable controller CPU clears all the DB buffer T 114 7 12 Online 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 12 3 Reading the MES interface function settings Read the MES interface function settings project from the MES interface module it 7 Perform either of the following Click 4 Read ih Read Select Online Read from the menu Z A dialog box asking for confirmation is BZ nO eneee displayed Clicking the OK_ button starts reading YD The project will be replaced with the active project Do you want to continue 7 Cancel Z 3 5
409. og For SQL failure log specifications refer to the following gt Section 8 8 2 SQL failure log CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe Zz e Eo oz ME Zo QS og aw an cl Q ie EF 1 zZ ia lu n 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 4 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Fl cries 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database When using DB Connection Service on the database server computer the ODBC setting for the database to be used must be set beforehand For ODBC setting refer to the following K Manuals and online help for the database software and basic software OS used 1 For Oracle 8i 9i 10g 11g The following shows a setting example using Oracle 9i with Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Set the following conditions e Data source name SAMPLEDS TNS service name 2 SAMPLETNS OracleHome OraHome92 1 Data source name can be set as desired For Data source name in Server service settings use the name set with this setting 2 The TNS service name is the name for accessing an Oracle database The name is entered when installing Oracle and creating a database instance This can be checked with Configuration and Migration Tools Net Manager Service naming of Oracle Clicking
410. ograms that need to be run with administrator privileges by a user in Administrators group are Go not executable Bes A PEA ute 2 To execute a program including any displays place the application server computer into the logon Sug status oz oi bi ann 7 10 Job Setting T 73 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 74 MELSEC IA series 4 Check return value a Set whether to check the return value or not b lt When the Check return value box is checked the return value End code of the executed program is checked If no return value is returned within the DB access timeout time set in DB Connection Service Setting Tool a timeout error is detected and the job execution is canceled For DB access timeout refer to the following L gt Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool When Check return value is selected set the following items 1 Normal return value Default 0 Set a normal return value 2 Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty When the Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty box is checked if the return value is not normal a value is assigned to the specified tag component Set a tag component to which a value is assigned when this is selected Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Note that the following tags are not selectab
411. oject file mup 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 1 Creating a new project 1 9 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS a fa le o 9 ra z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z Le DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi aL 26 fel ceries 7 4 3 Saving a project Save a project 1 Save the current project Perform either of the following Click f Save e Select Project Save from the menu 2 Saving a project under a new name Select Project Save As from the menu 2 The Save As dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the Save button Save in My Documents gt c E airy Music Em Pictures Save as type MES interface function project file mup x Cancel Figure 7 13 Save As dialog box Table 7 8 Setting items in the Save As dialog box Item Description Save in Select the location where the project is to be saved File name Specify the name of the project file to be saved Select a type of the project file to be saved MES interface function project file mup Files of type T 10 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 3 Saving a project MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL
412. ompactFlash card CompactFlash card slot gt Figure 4 16 CompactFlash card removal e Put the finger at the bottom of the LED cover that is on the front of the MES interface module and lift the LED cover to open e When ejecting the CompactFlash card from the MES interface module press the EJECT button to push the CompactFlash card out CD Sooo ooo ooo When having difficulty in replacing the CompactFlash card the following tweezers are available Product Plastic tweezers Model name NK 2539 d Figure 4 17 Replacing the CompactFlash card using Plastic tweezers LE E E EEEE EFEEEFEFEEFEFEFFEFEFFFFESEFEEEEFFESESEESEESE EE Attach the CompactFlash card slot cover and close the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module e Attach the CompactFlash card slot cover When the CompactFlash card is not installed attach the CompactFlash card slot cover e Lower the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module until it clicks 4 19 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 4 8 Battery This section explains the mounting and replacement of the battery g 4 8 1 Battery specifications This section shows the specifications of the MES interface module battery z fe Table 4 9 Battery specifications z Description ae Item DZ Q6BAT gt 6 Type Manganese di
413. omplete the setting referring to the following explanation After completing the setting click the button Exception process setting Exception processing No applicable record Tag mponent Substitute value Continue this job Finish this job Exception processing Multiple applicable records IV Select firster find records Send notification of this exception Component Substitute value Continue this job Finish this job Figure 7 82 Exception process setting dialog box In the case of Select a Exception processing No applicable record When Select Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action type set processing for the case where there is no record to be selected updated multi selected or deleted r Exception processing No applicable record Tag Component Substitute value Error_No lt 23 Continue this job Finish this job Figure 7 83 Setting example of Exception processing No applicable record 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 99 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LE series 1
414. on or Operation action dialog box INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO Z5r 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 89 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action T 90 7 11 Job Setting Actions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Communication action Action type MultiSelect DB tag link settings Database oB1 1 Work No 2 RECIPE_A 3 RECIPE_B 4 RECIPE_C 23 Delete row Generated SQL text __Fieldname gt gt Processt TagiType Component A YS Process F Work_No RECIPE_A RECIPE_B RECIPE_C gt gt Processi gt gt Process1 gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Process gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Process gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Process gt gt Processi a Insert a whole tag MELSECTE eries z Tablo neme RECIPEDATA Select Update Delete conditions Field name Condition RECIPE_C Prot Combine Tag Type cess2 Component RECIPE_C t Delete row Select sort settings Field name Delete row Exception process setting
415. on is possible Freely designed database tables can be used for access to databases When designing a new system not only the high flexibility of design but when connecting to the existing system the system can be constructed without changing the database tables 8 Time synchronization using SNTP is also possible The clocks for the MES interface module and the programmable controller CPU can be set through communications with an SNTP server computer This enables to synchronize the time for the entire system 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW a6 Q series 1 2 MX MESInterface Software Configuration This section explains the MX MESInterface software configuration Table 1 1 MX MESInterface software configuration Item Description Reference section Installs each execution software MES Interface Function Configuration Tool DB Installer Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool in each operating Chapter 5 environment Operates on a configuration computer and configures various settings required for the MES Interface Function MES interface function Chapter 7 Configuration Tool In addition to the configuration the application tool offers features such as the operation status check working log check or stop restart operation DB Connection Service Operates on the server computer and links databases with the MES interface module Chapter 8 DB Connection Service Operates on the server computer and changes the
416. on notification of the programmable 3 5 controller CPU turns ON 2 z lt 37 8 Handshake operation O Selectable x Not selectable 3 Disable a When Disable is selected for Trigger 1 or Trigger 2 Another trigger is regarded as a trigger condition FUNCTIONS j b When Disable is selected for both Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 The job is not activated by trigger conditions Point When Disable is selected the job can be activated by an instruction of job execution of the XML processing function Section 6 2 XML Processing Function im 6 a Ww Z 0 w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 61 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 62 MELSEC A series 4 Time specification startup a When the specified date time and day of the week match the actual date time and day of the week the condition changes from false to true resulting in job startup b When Time specification startup is selected the date time and day of the week must be set Trigger 1 Time specification startup v J Sanyos UN aG LY YUG Minute Hour Figure 7 45 Time specification startup 1 Year Month Day Hour and Minute Directly enter the date and time Matching with the actual date and time is not checked for any f
417. on server computer before execution of the first action and after execution of the last one in a job For the program execution function setting refer to the following lt gt Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution Programs that can be executed from Command line are applicable Since program execution is set on the server computer as described below more sophisticated data linkage can be realized 1 Before executing the first action of the job By executing programs before the first action of the job data required for the job can be produced on the database in advance 2 After executing the last action of the job By executing programs after the last action of the job data written to the database by the job can be utilized for programs on the server computer 6 11 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 7 Arithmetic processing function Operation action 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series 6 1 9 DB buffering function 1 DB buffering function a The DB buffering function temporarily stores SQL texts into a CompactFlash card i when they cannot be sent due to network disconnection or failure of the database Z server computer After recovery the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database Manual operation is also possible 3 2 ie 3 5 CompactFlash card ae Z W eZ q Recovered Bae
418. on source Example Type conversion of tag components and variables Because the operation result is out of the range for the integer type the variable Temp1 is the floating point type Operation action Substitution tag Compgnent Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Component 1 Variable Tempi lt a Number 2000000000 Number 1000000000 2 DataTag Datal lt lt Variable Temp1 3 lt lt A value is assigned after being converted to the type for the tag component For example when the tag component Data1 is double precision type data the type of the variable Temp1 is converted from floating point to double precision first and then the converted value is assigned Figure 7 110 Type conversion of tag components and variables If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component the job execution is canceled At this time Type conversion to tag component error is displayed in the error log b Operation of numerical values There are two kinds of numerical values Integer type and Floating point type e Integer type Represents the bit type single precision type and double precision type of tag components e Floating point type Represents the floating point type of tag components The following table lists operation items and types of the results Table 7 92 Operation items and types of the results Item Operation result Operation of floating point type Addition subtraction In the ran
419. onics A S DENMARK CS MTrade Slovensko s r o SLOVAKIA Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 pregara n 1 Vajanskeho 58 DK 4000 Roskilde SK 92101 Piestany MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Phone 45 0 46 75 76 66 Phone 421 0 33 7742 760 IEL OWET Fax 45 0 46 75 56 26 Fax 421 0 33 7735 144 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Beijer Electronics Eesti OU ESTONIA INEA d o o SLOVENIA Phone 81 3 622 160 60 P rnu mnt 160i Stegne 11 Fax 81 3 622 16075 a 1317 Le SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 372 0 6 51 81 40 Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION Inc USA Fay 372 0 6 5181 49 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Jaakonkatu 2 Box 426 Fax 1 847 478 22 53 FIN 01620 Vantaa SE 20124 Malm Phone 358 0 207 463 500 Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 358 0 207 463 501 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 UTECO A B E E GREECE Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND 5 Mavrogenous Str Im Schorli 5 GR 18542 Piraeus CH 8600 Diibendorf Phone 30 211 1206 900 Phone 41 0 44 802 28 80 Fax 30 211 1206 999 Fax 41 0 44 802 28 28 MELTRADE Ltd HUNGARY GTS TURKEY Fert utca 14 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok No 5 HU 1107 Budapest TR 34775 Yukari Dudullu Umraniye ISTANBUL Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Phone 90 0 216 526 39 90 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 Fax 90 0 216 526 3995 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA CSC Au
420. or the program execution function OBB9h OBBAh OBBBh OBBCh Specified program file duplicated Program execution function Wait for DB access program execution completion timed out Execution error Program execution function There are more than one execution file of the program that is specified for the program execution function No response has returned from the program being executed The application server has failed to acquire user identifying information Program startup parameters are incorrect 10 2 Error Code List Check if the program specified with the program execution function is executable with the specified account In DB Connection Service Setting Tool increase the DB access timeout value Terminate running programs before logoff For Windows Vista only Check if the program specified with the program execution function is executable with the specified account To the next page 10 18 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module es XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol m l ao 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 19 MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action e Check if the program specified with the progr
421. orcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC App 67 Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States Appendix 9 2 Exportation precautions INDEX A ACCESS l ga nnr a ee 8 4 8 18 8 24 Access target CPU iaesssssesisssessrnesrreriesrsennseeens 7 32 Accessible devices and ranges cccceeeeeeeees 3 5 ACCOUNT e Bien an alte A 20 7 24 Action 22055 seh onal eats Bes eed eae dae A 20 ACUONS otai iea iraa adel eee ek 7 78 Adding AN iteM rec okentiuni iaa 7 7 Applicable Systems eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 Arithmetic processing Operation action 6 11 7 108 Array DIOCK SIZC ossos nana iann a a 7 48 Array setting iei a ai aaa 7 41 B Battery Maumi ossei ar AE 4 20 Operation without mounting battery 4 24 Removing battery for storage 4 25 Replacement ccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeens 4 21 Specifications ccececcceceecceceeeeeeeeseeeseneeees 4 20 Buffer memory details ceseceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 24 Buffer memory liSt eceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesteeeeeeenaaes 3 19 C Character String aeaa a 7 46 Component Setting 0 0 0 ececeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeeeenees 7 43 Connection system equipment 0ceeee 2 8 Connection timeout ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 54 Constantei anh ea aA acctieiotlawteat acs 7 93 7 110 D Database Setting cccceeeeeeeeseeeeee
422. ored For Time synchronization setting refer to the following Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting 0 Synchronize with PLC CPU time 1 Synchronize with SNTP When selecting Synchronize with SNTP in Time synchronization setting This area is set when the time information was obtained from the SNTP server computer If the time information could not be obtained from the SNTP server computer this area is not set since the operation for when Synchronize with PLC CPU time is selected is performed Time is synchronized with the programmable controller CPU 2 SNTP time query result Buffer memory address 11501 to 11507 When Synchronize with SNTP is selected in Time synchronization setting the time information obtained from the SNTP server is stored When Daylight saving setting is enabled time corrected to daylight saving time is stored during the period of summer time Table 3 19 SNTP time query result Address Decimal 11501 SNTP time query result Year The four digit year data is stored Name Description Setting side SNTP time query result 11502 The month data 01 to 12 is stored Month 11503 SNTP time query result Day The day data 01 to 31 is stored 11504 SNTP time query result Hour The hour data 00 to 23 is stored SNTP time query result 11505 The minute data 00 to 59 is stored Set on system Minute side SNTP time query result
423. orn n e To the next page 9 5 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method 9 2 2 Sample program Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC A series From the previous page w 0 x D iE Ww aw 20 are Base64 encode static String encodeBase64 String inStr String refTable ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789 int rest inStr length 3 if rest 0 inStr new String new byte 0 0 0 substring rest TROUBLESHOOTING byte inBuf inStr getBytes StringBuffer outStr new StringBuffer for int i 0 i lt inBuf length i 3 int tempBuf inBuf i lt lt 16 inBuffi 1 lt lt 8 inBuffi 2 for intj 18 j gt 0 j 6 APPENDICES outStr append refTable charAt tempBuf gt gt j amp Ox3f if rest 0 outStr delete outStr length 3 rest outStr length outStr append substring rest return new String outStr INDEX 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method 9 6 9 2 2 Sample program 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC KE series CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING The following flowchart shows the troubleshooting procedure for errors that might occur during operation of the MES interface module Is the RUN LED ON Identify the error and take corrective actions ee Section 10 3 3 1 Troubleshooting about LED indication and I O signals Is the ERR LED ON or flashing
424. ot bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation During registering each setting do not power OFF the mounted module or reset the programmable controller CPU Otherwise data in the CompactFlash card will be undefined Therefore resetting and re registering data are required This may also cause a module failure or malfunctions Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller under the environment specified in the User s Manual Using this programmable controller in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the programmable controller in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Installation Precautions CAUTION Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module
425. ount setting Z 8 a v Y a ITEM USERNAME PASSWORD DWRITE TWRITE ADMINISTRATOR fe ACCOUNT1 QJ71MES96_ MITSUBISHI i ACCOUNT2_ USER1 USERUSER1 1 ACCOUNT12 USER2 USERUSER2 ACCOUNT USER3 USERUSER3 YES YES YES i Lu Q m Fa a INITIAL FILENAME amp TOP 1 TOP TOP File format TOP __ Item row Change disabled __ Label column setting area Can be changed by the user i Q z System setting Account setting Pere QJ71MES96 User name 1 to 20 characters Password 8 to 14 characters Confirm password 2 Label Label Description ACCOUNT1 to Set Account setting items No 1 to 16 ACCOUNT16 Enter only the labels desired to be set Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set Table App 13 Label Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 14 Appendix 3 4 ACCOUNT CSV APPENDICES MELSEC IA series 3 Setting item Table App 14 Setting item Item Description Setting value USERNAME User name 12 1 to 20 characters PASSWORD Password 8 to 14 characters DWRITE Fixed value YES TWRITE Fixed value YES ADMINISTRATOR Fixed value YES INITIAL Fixed value TOP FILENAME Fixed value Blank For characters can be used in user names and passwords refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constan
426. outing parameters to the CC Link IE controller network 0065h Routing parameter error No routing parameter has been set OTA TAA RAN MELSECNET H and or MELSECNET 10 module s 0066h Data send error Failed to send the data Check the CPU s on the access 0067h Data receive error Failed to receive the data i route 0080h Read size error The read size is not correct Ea e Correct the device type entered in 0081h Device type error The specified device type is invalid Device tag settings The specified device number is out of Correct the device number entered 0082h Device No error range in Device tag settings N The number of device points is 0083h Device point error e Check the CPU s on the access incorrect i route 0084h Write size error The write size is not correct 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0085h MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Link parameter error Description The link parameter is corrupted e Set a correct link parameter for the programmable controller CPU s on the access route 0087h to 0089h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 00D2h 00D4h 00D7h RUN time disable error S
427. overs the applicable systems Section 2 3 covers the connection system equipment Section 2 4 covers the operating environment 3 Performance specifications about the MES interface module K gt Chapter 3 SPECIFICATIONS Section 3 1 covers the performance specifications 4 Procedure up to MES interface Function module start up K gt Chapter 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Section 4 2 covers the schematic procedure up to the MES interface module operation 5 Installation and uninstallation methods for MX MESInterface L gt Chapter 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Chapter 5 covers MX MESinterface installation and uninstallation methods 6 MES interface module functions K gt Chapter 6 FUNCTIONS Chapter 6 covers the MES interface module functions 7 Setting method for MES Interface Function Configuration Tool K gt Chapter 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Chapter 7 covers the setting method of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool ee wm Setting method for DB Connection Service lt gt Chapter 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL Chapter 8 covers the functions and setting method for the DB Connection Service 9 XML message format K gt Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT Chapter 9 covers the XML message format 10 Methods for checking errors and the corrective actions Chapter 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Chapter 10 covers troubleshooting and lists the error codes A 16 D
428. ows a data source name is assigned to connection information for management The database can be accessed via ODBC by specifying the data source name in the MES interface function Database DB or relational database RDB Data management method that follows relational data model logic One data is expressed as a collection of multiple items Fields and the data collection is expressed as a table Data can be easily merged and selected using key data Table Device Data management format managed with relational databases It is a two dimensional table format composed of rows and columns Variety of memory data in the programmable controller There are devices handled in units of bits and devices handled in units of words Device tag Tag Data table that contains a set of information Component required to access the device data in the programmable controller CPUs on the network The MES interface module collects device data in units of tags at an interval defined in the tag Trigger condition Startup conditions for job operation Trigger buffering When trigger conditions conditions for data transmission of multiple jobs are met in a concentrated manner their data and trigger times are buffered in the module s internal memory so that actions data operation transmission can be executed later using the buffered data Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high jobs are executed without
429. oxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0 V Nominal current 1800 mAh Battery life when stored Actual life of 5 years room temperature 2 i O Battery life when used gt Section 4 8 3 Battery replacement E oO Lithium content 0 49 g k Application File protection a A CD Seo ooo coco ooo For the battery directive in EU member states refer to Appendix 9 eeeeaeeeseeeceaoeeeoeesceeneeceenoeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeceaeceaes eee eeeaeeeeee ee 4 8 2 Mounting of battery e wW ao e Q m Q a a fa zZ Irz oae RE E W eo nao The MES interface module is shipped with the battery connector disconnected Before using the MES interface module connect the battery connector 5 25 ZS 2 Open the cover on the bottom of the Zz 9 MES interface module 0S Connector z5 Check if the battery is correctly Battery mounted Connector fixing no Z After confirming the insertion direction 2 is correct insert the battery connector 2 into the connector pin on the case r MES interface module J g a End 8 Figure 4 18 Battery mounting procedure 8 Coe A Eos Point Ze e Firmly push the battery connector all the way in to the connector pin 228 e When operating without battery mounted refer to the following Section 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery Not following the procedure may cause the data corruption in the z CompactFlash card being accessed or a file system error
430. p lt Variable 4 1 ee 1 lt lt Figure 7 98 Action details in the case of Operation action L Table 7 85 Items displayed for Operation action Display Description 1 Upper row Displays the settings of Operation action 2 Lower row Displays values calculated in Operation action Point If a job is canceled information on how the cancellation has occurred is displayed in the detailed log In the case of job cancellation due to failed tag data acquisition however the detailed log information is not displayed 7 12 Online 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series c Updating the event log Clicking the Update button updates the event log ii 7 3 d Clearing the event log history licking th tt l th t log history Clicking the button clears the event log history z pg 23 2 O k o 5 ae Zz Foe nao INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 12 Online T T 121 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi als 26 fel ceries 7 12 6 Executing a job as a one shot task Execute a job as a one shot task Doing so allows the user to
431. perating on the MES interface module 2 Executes programs on the application server computer 1 Sends the program execution results to the MES interface module 1 In Windows Vista DB Connection Service Cliant user session executes programs DB Connection Service Cliant is automatically started at the time of user login 3 IP filter function gt Section 8 5 3 Limit IP addresses permit to connect The IP filter function can specify the IP address of the MES interface module that can connect to the DB Connection Service to ensure the security of the server computer Batch specification using the mask bit length specification is possible If the IP filter function is not used any MES interface module can connect to the DB Connection Service 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC A series 4 Log output function DB Connection Service outputs an access log and an SQL failure log OVERVIEW a Access log L gt Section 8 5 4 Output access log The communication contents between the MES interface module and DB Connection Service are output to the access log For access log specifications refer to the following gt Section 8 8 1 Access log b SQL failure log gt Section 8 5 5 Output SQL failed log If data cannot be updated inserted deleted normally due to no table etc at SQL text execution the error contents are output to the SQL failure l
432. ption of the problem SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed Select Job settings Communication action in SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and 0x20600025 SID Session ID GetNext Failed set update insert or delete conditions correctly SID Session ID Reset Failed e Check if the database has been filled with No record was updated inserted or deleted by the registered data SQL execution 0x20600026 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative explaining a detailed description 0x2060002A of the problem a e Check if it is connected to the network SID Session ID Transmitting Commit e Check if the gateway and or hub is operating 0x2060002B Success Response Failed i Check if the power of the module is not turned Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response ff off ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed 0x20700001 Failed in program execution due to insufficient memory e Terminate any unnecessary applications ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed e Add more memory to the personal computer 0x20700002 Failed in program execution due to insufficient resources e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20700003 System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0x20700010 ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed e Check if the sourc
433. r Tracing Connection Posing abo ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box System Data Sources Name ome Select the System DSN tab then click the Add button AA ODBC Syetan da source sivas Onea OA how O Oreo i the indicated data provider A System data source is visible to all users on this machine including NT services a E l To the next page 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 10 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND FUNCTIONS UNINSTALLATION FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MES INTERFACE e e z O O Mn Z Z Q i a a 38 ae lu og Oz ZE W W nn 8 11 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL From the previous page J Create New Data Source ODBC Microsoft Access Setup Data Source Name SAMPLEDS Description I Database Database Select Create Repair Compact m System Database None C Database Ee Select Database Database Name Directories sampledb mdb c mes Secs mes List Files of Type Read Only I Exclusive Access Databases m x J End 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database z Network MELSEC TE eries 4 The Create New Data Source dialog box is displayed then select Microsoft Access Driver mdb When using Mic
434. r log of Working log or by error dialog boxes take corrective actions in chronological order 10 1 Error Codes 1 0 2 10 1 1 Finding an error code a J XML MESSAGE en FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 3 MELSEC Le series 10 1 2 Error types Errors are divided into the following two types 1 Module stop error a The ERR LED flashes b When a module stop error occurs the MES interface function of the MES interface module is stopped Correct the error according to the error code and turn the power OFF and then ON or reset the programmable controller CPU c An error code is stored in the buffer memory area that is corresponding to the error location For how to find an error code refer to the following C gt Section 10 1 1 Finding an error code 2 Module continuation error a The ERR LED turns on b When a module continuation error occurs the MES interface module continues c operation of the MES interface function By correcting the error according to the error code the correction can be reflected in the operation Since the ERR LED stays ON turn it off by the following e Error clear request Y10 e Online Remote operation Clear error C gt Section 7 13 2 4 Clear error An error code is stored in the buffer memory area that is corresponding to the error location
435. r to Appendix 9 Transportation Precautions CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transportation regulations Refer to Appendix 8 for details of the relevant models CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other ca
436. rams b Select the program to be deleted c Click the Change Remove button When using Windows Vista Select the program to be deleted in Uninstall or change a program and cllick Uninstall Change When using Windows Vista If the screen on the left appears click the Continue button INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELSEC TE eries From the previous page Confirm the file to be deleted x Confirm File Deletion 7 7 ui To uninstall it click the button 3 YD Are you sure you want to completely remove MES interface function configuration tool Mx MESInterface and all of its components To not uninstall it click the No button Clicking the No button returns to the previous screen The component indicates the installed icons z 7 o and file Dr as Remove Shared File Ed If the left screen appears click the No to All The system indicates that the following shared file is no longer used by any b utton programs If any programs are still using this file and it is removed those Programs may not function Are you sure you want to remove the shared file 2 fe Leaving this file will not harm your system If you are not sure what to do it is 5 suggested that you choose to not remove this shared component O File name vsflex8l ocx a Located in CAWINDOWS System32 YesToall No No to All O Zu Bae PIETON 4 Wh
437. ranged consecutively Example When Length of array is set to 4 with series setting Only the start device device in n 1 need be set Devices in and after n 2 are configured automatically INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Array setting Use array Length of array 4 series block n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 ms List meje a om Component_A DO D1 D2 D3 __ Component name E CPU name Device _Data type Device n D100 D102 D104 D106 eas lass come a gt Component_B to D101 toD103_ toD105_ to D107 2 3 Component_c ControlCPU 2R1000 2R1003 String 8 ZR1012 ZR1015 4 j c ZR1000 ZR1004 ZR1008 ZR1012 5 ai omponent_S to ZR1003 to ZR1007 to ZR1011 to ZR1015 Z ire Figure 7 33 When series is selected 7 3 Point If any duplicate device is identified in the same tag an error dialog box will Q 2 E g appear tt 8 3 Check the device settings A Z ZrO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 8 Device Tag Setting T7 41 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series b Block Devices of all tag components are arranged as a block The size of the block can be changed in array block size For array block size refer to the following L gt Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting Usually the block size need not be changed because it is automatically adjusted to avoid device
438. ration dialog box oe Click the OK _ button in the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box End z O O Mn Z Z Q i a a ll 38 ae lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 6 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELS EG Q series 2 For Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Microsoft SQL Server 2008 MSDE 2000 and Wonderware Historian 9 0 The following shows a setting example using Microsoft SQL Server 2000 with Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Set the following conditions Data source name SAMPLEDS e Server name SAMPLESRV 1 Data source name can be set as desired For Data source name in Server service settings use the name set with this setting 2 The server name is the name for accessing a Microsoft SQL Server 2000 database This name is entered when installing Microsoft SQL Server 2000 This can be checked with the SQL Server service manager server aaa Clicking Performance and Maintenance on the Control Panel displays the Performance and B Startup and shutdown Tools Help 0 7 B Psh gt roes pe Maintenance dialog box Pick a task To display the Control Panel select Start B See basic ir nation about your computer Control Panel B Rearrange items on your hard disk to make programs run faster or pick a Control P
439. read only cancel the setting If read write is disabled for the new and old SQL failure log files enable it in the security setting e When the new and old SQL failure log files have been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault c Event log output error list of DB Connection Service Client source name Table 10 6 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service Client source name DBCnctClient Error code 50 51 52 53 Error description and cause Unable to start DB Connection Service Client Corrective action Terminate unnecessary applications Add more memory to the computer 10 25 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 2 Access log of DB Connection Service MELSEC A series Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error description and cause Corrective action Service Not Start 0x20100001 1 Failed to start the service due to insufficient memory Terminate any unnecessary applications Service Not Start Add more memory to the personal computer 0x20100002 Failed to start the service due to insufficient resources Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20100010 System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Service Not Start a If firewal
440. refer to the following lt gt Section 4 7 CompactFlash Card When the test has been completed abnormally check the following and execute the PING command again Network settings for the MES interface module or configuration computer Connection status of the MES interface module or configuration computer 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 4 3 Parts Names This section explains the parts names of the MES interface module gt lt 1 With the LED cover closed QU71MES96 aii Zz 1 a ee ne i U lt 2 n I 6 z O 5 l 4 B QJT1MES96 Figure 4 3 With the LED cover closed 4 3 e wW ao e a WW Q x a fa Zz LEF B RE E W eo nao 2 With the LED cover open i INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS QJ71MES96 MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION 8 Figure 4 4 With the LED cover open DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 3 Parts Names 4 6 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series Table 4 2 Parts names Name Description 1 Indicator LED Refer to 3 Indicator LED display contents 10BASE T 100BASE TX Used for connecting the MES interface module in 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection 2
441. referring to the following descriptions Working log Error log Information of errors and system Date Error code Summary 2006 07 31 14 30 47 0B8C Communication message reception timeout 2006 07 31 14 24 48 Start operation 2006 07 31 14 20 02 Start operation 2006 07 31 14 18 56 0883 Communication connection error 2006 07 31 14 18 46 OB8C Communication message reception timeout 2006 07 31 14 18 23 Start operation 2006 07 31 14 17 26 OB8C Communication message reception timeout 2006 07 31 14 17 03 Start operation 2006 07 31 14 16 13 Start operation r bi INNEIN TAME NDO Caramiumienhinn eanna tian aanas v Update Clear Event log Information of job execution Date Job name Summary 2006 07 31 14 35 42 JOB4 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 41 JOB1 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 34 JOB2 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 23 JOB4 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 23 JOBS Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 18 JOB2 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 09 JOB2 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 08 JOB1 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 08 JOB4 Startup 2006 07 31 14 34 58 JOBS Startup 2006 07 31 14 34 58 JOB2 Startup 2006 07 31 14 34 56 JOB3 Handshake end 2006 07 31 14 34 55 JOB3 Handshake start 2006 07 31 14 34 53 JOB4 Startup IOOOOB8 OH OO 210 ed Figure 7 95 Working log dialog box 1 Error log a Error log data of the MES interface module are displayed The following explains the display of the Error log Table 7 80 Displays in Error log
442. rerresererrssne 7 124 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function ssssssesseeerrnrreneseeerene 7 125 7 13 3 Checking the connection of the previous job CXeCUtION eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeteteeeeeettteeeeeetas 7 127 7 13 4 Changing the job Status ecicce 4 fiend nied adie eee ei cece ttt daeeeeet A a E 7 128 7 13 5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering eect eeteeeee eee eeneeeeeeetaeeeeeetneeeeeetaea 7 129 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering 0 0 2 ccc cece e cette ee EAEN AERE RE AENEA EE ENERE EAE 7 130 7 13 7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering ee eceeeeeeenneeeeeeetteeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaas 7 131 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash Card ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeecieeeeeesaaeeeeeeniieeeeeeeeaaas 7 131 TAA ol obepreree er er creer rere rr ecerrrererrr eer rercy or cer tree recrereec rr reer a errr ere re ern Seer or reece er pret e 7 132 Po PRECAUTIONS nania a a ar thaverseeacedieys 7 133 CHAPTER 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 8 1to 8 28 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 0 ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeseneeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeaaeeeseeaaees 8 1 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database cece cece ceeeeeeneeceeeeeenneeeedeeeneeeedeeaneeseeceenseesedeeneeeeeeseneeeteeseneees 8 5 8 3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool ec ceceeeee eee eeeeeecnneeeeeeeceeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeneeeeesenaaes 8 12 8 4 Scr
443. res to per user locations lt m Security Setting Negotiate signing No minimum No minimum Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Not Defined Disabled Enabled Enabled Posix Disabled Disabled Prompt for credentials Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled it l User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for ad U2almieaa Local Security Setting Explain User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode peee ty Prompt for credentials Prompt for consent Ce Cae End MELS Ea eries Select User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for consent O Select Elevate without prompting on the lt lt Local Security Setting gt gt tab and click the OK button Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages App 64 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC IA series Appendix 8 Transportation Precautions When transporting a battery containing lithium handling according to transportation regulations is required Appendix 8 1 Controlled model The lithium battery used in the MES interface module is classified as follows Table App 70 Lithium bat
444. rface module HUB MES interface module Jog n CONFIGURATION SYSTEM gt e JIL EUA Twisted pair cable Straight SPECIFICATIONS A Figure 4 6 Wiring CD oeeeeeerererrerereererereerereerereerereerereeees For the equipment required for 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection and system configuration examples refer to the following C z Section 2 1 4 System configuration for operation L gt Section 2 3 Connection System Equipment e wW ao e a m Q x a fa Zz LEF ae E W eo nao EEEE FEFEEEEFEEFEEFFFEEFEFEEEFESEEFESEEESESEENEE 4 4 2 Wiring precautions INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION To establish a reliable system and fully utilize the MES interface module functions make wiring so that noise effect can be reduced 1 Sufficient safety measures must be taken when constructing the 100BASE TX and 10BASE T networks Consult a specialist when connecting connection cable terminals installing main line cables etc FUNCTIONS 2 Use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection cable compliant with the following standards L gt Section 2 3 Connection System Equipment MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION 3 The bending radius near the connector should be at least four times longer than the cable s outside diameter 4 Connect the device on other end according to its specifications
445. ring T 102 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series c Exception processing Applicable records overflow When MultiSelect is set in Action type configure the processing for the case where the number of arrays set in Array setting is less than the number of a records selected by Select Update Delete conditions iy Exception processing Applicable records overflow IV Select firster find records IV Send notification of this exception Tag Component Substitute value z Warning_No lt lt 10 s z Continue this job Finish this job E no Figure 7 85 Exception processing Applicable records overflow 1 Select firster find records When the Select firster find records checkbox is checked if the number of M arrays set in Array setting is less than the number of records selected by 6 Select Update Delete conditions records equivalent to the number of arrays 5 are actually selected g When this checkbox is not checked the select processing is not performed R If the Select firster find records checkbox is not checked the following is s5 performed 8 2 When Notify the number of acquired records is set in Multi select setting 0 is See notified aS e When Clear the unused tag components by zero is set in Multi select setting 0 is assigned F 8 Multi select setting 26 O ee eee ee ee ee ee ee 3d 2
446. ring Ce 9z 8 m Regional and Scanners and it Speech Sync Center System Language Cameras jiti TabletPC Taskbar and Vere Settings Start Menu nee we RSS l To the next page Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R App 62 Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES EEE MMELSEC LY series From the previous page 4 Select Local Security Policy When User Account Control is enabled in Favorite Links Windows Vista the following screen appears Biana Computer Management 11 2 2006 9 54 PM E Pictures is Sources ODBC 11 2 2006 9 53 PM lick th all Event Viewer 11 2 2006 9 54 PM B Music BiiInternet Information Services IIS Manager 9 4 2007 11 45 AM C IC t e Continue button More A iSCSI Initiator 11 2 2006 9 54 PM Folders i Local Security Policy 11 2 2006 9 56 PM Pubtic Memory Diagnostics Tool 11 2 2006 9 53 PM am Print Management 11 2 2006 9 55 PM amp Reliability and Performance Monitor 11 2 2006 9 53 PM ai Services 11 2 2006 9 53 PM fl system Configuration 11 2 2006 9 53 PM If you started this action continue Task Scheduler 11 2 2006 9 54 PM E P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 11 2 2006 9 53 PM eanas ver cla ini Default Programs Ease of Access Cente Bee a O peas C eea 13 items User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Select Local Policies e9 0X2 H
447. ring Setting 2 0 0 cece ee eeeeeee eee teeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeneeaaees 7 27 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting erreian aea een a a a e ia 7 32 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseerreseerresstrrrssttnrnnsttnnnnstennnsseenn 7 33 T0 Device Tag Seng cerrar a a E ued lata dane etlen tibet E E 7 36 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting 2 0 ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeenas 7 37 7 8 2 Setting items in Array Setting eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeene eee eeeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeneats 7 41 7 8 3 Setting items in Component Setting 00 0 eee eee eenee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeseenaeeeeeeeaas 7 43 T9 SCIVER SEIVICE SOUING fii an hee ee a Oa Sk ee aa aa a O ES 7 50 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service Setting ec ee ceceeeeeeenee etree tenets eeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeetenaeeeeeeenaaes 7 51 TAO JOD SONG isk ss veces stes cee a e yg Ard cae cue dave von E e AAAA EAE LATA A Avtegees vie 7 55 FA0F1 Setting tems in JOD Setien a cad fuetee edd cde sek seeny coun Ghee beGeets cd ove Adina os 7 56 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions sieis aeia a E E EARE E Ta 7 59 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution eect ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeaes 7 72 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering erreren ane rar A TEA AEEA EA 7 76 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation eee ec eeeeeeeeeen
448. ring job execution Figure 6 18 When trigger condition is met again during execution of the job set to Value monitoring startup 2 When Trigger buffering is enabled for the job The trigger information is stored in the trigger buffer and after completion of the current job execution the job is executed based on the trigger information Condition value Tag component value Sampling interval I I Trigger information 2 4 3 Trigger buffer 4 Job Job Job Job Job startup startup startup startup startup Job execution 1 2 3 4 gt 5 gt Figure 6 19 When trigger condition is met again during execution of the job set to Value monitoring startup b When trigger conditions for multiple jobs are met concurrently Up to three jobs can start their executions concurrently in the order in Job settings e After completion of these jobs executions of the other jobs are started sequentially Note that if a job uses the same item in Server service settings that is currently used for another job the job is not executed until another job execution is completed c Monitoring interval timeout Depending on the number of set jobs or the trigger condition setting the monitoring interval timeout may occur 6 21 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 10 Precautions 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series 2 When an error occurs in job execution a The job execution
449. rom the menu Failed to format the CompactFlash card Check for an error code in System monitor of GX Developer Is the MES interface module operation stopped By the error code check the error details and take corrective actions Re execute formatting of the CompactFlash card Stop the MES interface module operation and then execute formatting Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card It takes time to write the settings to the MES interface module 10 37 Is the MES interface module operation in the Stop state 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Stop the MES interface module operation and then write the settings 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE series 10 3 2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of DB Connection Service Setting Tool L gt Chapter 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL Table 10 17 DB connection service setting tool Symptom Unable to start DB Connection Service Setting Tool Checked item Has another DB Connection Service Setting Tool been already started Corrective action Terminate the already started DB Connection Service Setting Tool Only one DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be activated Unable to reflect the setting Was a user ID having the administrator authority
450. rosoft Access 2007 Select Microsoft Access Driver mdb accdb The ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box is displayed Set the following and click the Database selection button e Data source name SAMPLEDS Q The Select Database dialog box is displayed Select the following and click the button Folder C mes Database Name sampledb mdb Click the OK button in the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box O Click the OK button in the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC A series 8 3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool Select Start All Programs MELSOFT Application MESInterface DB connection service setting tool of Microsoft Windows 2 When the following warning message appears in Windows Vista click on Allow A To disable the following warning message display refer to the following L gt Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows Vista R i User Account Control Ex Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before g D8CnctCont exe Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before vY Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer
451. rror programmable controller CPU side 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module is normal To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0A05h MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name System error Description Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OA06h Initial SNTP server time enquiry error The initial SNTP server time enquiry failed and thereby the module started the operation synchronizing the time with CPU No 1 OA07h SNTP server time enquiry error Failed in the SNTP server time enquiry e Check for any fault on the network connected to the specified SNTP server computer e Check if the clock time is synchronized between the specified SNTP server and the host server correctly e Check that the time of the specified SNTP server has not been manually changed OAO08h to OAODh OAOFh Setting read error CF access stopped error The CompactFlash card may be corrupted No CompactFlash card has been installed File access is stopped X2 is ON e Replace the CompactFlash card Install a CompactFlash card e Turn the power OFF and ON or reset the programmable controller CPU 0A11h 0A12h No CF card installed CF directory operation error No CompactFlash card ha
452. rted only when the device tags used for trigger conditions of all jobs have been sampled normally 1 1 When the first five digits of the serial No is 11011 or earlier the operation of the MES interface module is different lt 3 Appendix 1 2 2 Trigger monitoring function 2 If Value monitoring startup is selected the tag component value used for trigger monitoring and the one used in the started job may be collected at different timings 2 gt To collect these tag component values synchronously use Handshake E operation pe L gt Section 7 10 2 8 Handshake operation 2 ie z O J 5 o Zz B22 Zw H wo oO nao a 25 ZE 65 48 2 25 ez o Fd O O Z 5 Le MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 6 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function When multiple sets of trigger conditions conditions for data transmission are met ina concentrated manner their data and trigger times are buffered in the module s internal memory so that actions data operation transmission can be executed later using the buffered data Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high jobs are executed without missing any trigger To utilize the trigger buffering function enable Trigger buffering at each Job settings 1 Trigger b
453. rvice and DB Connection Service Setting Tool Connection Service Setting Tool CF Section 5 1 Installation Section 5 1 Installation Change the settings of DB Connection Change the settings of DB Connection Service Service ase Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB cS Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool Connection Service Setting Tool Operation Be sure to make the settings to use the DB interface function Section 6 1 DB Interface Function 2 Make the settings when using the program execution function gt Section 6 1 8 Program execution function 3 Start it when using the SNTP server computer time with time synchronization function lt L gt Section 6 3 Time Synchronization Function 4 Restart a personal computer after installing the relational database If not communication with the MES interface module may be impossible 5 Log on to the application server computer with the created account for user program execution once before using the program execution function When using the application server computer to which the program execution function is set log on with an account other than the created account for user program execution Figure 4 1 Server computer start up procedure 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4 2 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS A e wW ao e a WW Q x a fa Zz LEF B RE E W eo nao INSTALLATION AND UN
454. s Does the following file exit in the installing destination directory of DB connection service and Setting tool MESIF DBConnector exe Is the personal computer restarted after uninstalling DB connection service and Setting tool L gt Section 5 2 Uninstallation e Uninstall DB connection service and Setting tool and restart the personal computer before reinstallation Oracle s data source driver is not located although SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe was executed on 64 bit version Windows Has the 32 bit version of Oracle Client been installed lt 3 Section 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom e Install the 32 bit version of Oracle Client and then execute SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe again 10 38 10 3 2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool se XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ Q O T ol w l m 2 O a4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel series 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module This section shows the troubleshooting of problems that may arise during operation of the MES interface module 1 Troubleshooting about LED indication and I O signals Table 10 18 Troubleshooting about LED indication and I O signals Symptom The RUN LED does not turn on The ERR LED is on or flashing Checked item Is the module in preparation Corrective ac
455. s been installed The CompactFlash card may be corrupted 0A13h 0A14h Transferred setting file check error Setting file check error The setting file written to the module is invalid The CompactFlash card may be corrupted The setting file is invalid The CompactFlash card may be corrupted Install a CompactFlash card OA80h to OA83h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0A84h Illegal action setting error Some action set in the job has an illegal part Check the actions in Job settings e In Job List of Remote operation the job having any illegal action can be checked Such a job is not displayed OBOOh to OBOAh System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OBOBh OBOCh Setting read error The CompactFlash card may be corrupted e Replace the CompactFlash card OBODh DB connection service communication error An Ethernet communication error has occurred 10 2 Error Code List e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct Check if the ODBC setting is correct To the next page 10 12 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE on FORMAT 0 zZ E e O z wo W sal a O fd E APPENDICE
456. s between 192 168 0 64 to 127 Z 192 1 0 64 S l l lolololololol lol o lo lololo o ololo o o olo l lo o o o o o g 2 n 192 168 0 127 L lalolololololol lol lol lolololololo olo o olololalililaila la hh Figure 8 8 Specifying IP addresses in a batch 9 Iez 2 Deleting an IP address with connection permission Dae Eom Select the IP address to be deleted from Permitted IP addresses list then click oa O the Delete button 4 Output access log Default Output a Set whether or not to output the access log INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION b When selecting Output access log set the following items Table 8 6 Setting items when Output access log is selected Item Description Output destination Set the output destination of the log file Access log capacity Set the file capacity per access log and number of files 1 Output destination Default dbConnector log Set the output destination of the log file If no output destination is set the log is output to the install folder If a read only file is specified the log is not output and Access log output error FUNCTIONS is output to Administrative Tools Event Viewer of Windows Access log capacity Range 1 to 10 MB x 2 to 100 files Default 1 MB x 10 files Set the file capacity per access log and number of files If the log exceeds the capacity for one file a new log file which copies the original lo
457. s overwritten and therefore excluded from the restriction on the number of settings for each setting type INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS im 6 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 4 Project File Handling 7 15 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 7 4 6 Exporting a CSV file Export the current project settings to a CSV file Exported CSV files can be utilized for creating setting sheets or printing System setting Access target CPU settings Device tag settings Server service settings and Job settings can be exported Select Project Export CSV Files from the menu The Save As dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the Save button Save in E My Documents ary Music E My Pictures File name SYSTEM Save as type CSV file SYSTEM CSV Cancel Figure 7 17 Save As dialog box Table 7 19 Setting items in the Save As dialog box Item Description Save in Select the location where the CSV file is to be saved Specify SYSTEM CSV The respective setting files are exported into the same folder as the File name specified file SYSTEM CSV For the files to be exported refer to the following lt gt Appendix 3 Setting Information Fil
458. s set b The following explains the operation of the clear processing using Clear DB buffer request Table 7 30 Operation of the clear processing using Clear DB buffer request Data type of tag component Bit Description The clear processing of the DB buffer is performed when the specified tag component is ON Turns OFF after completion of the clear processing 2 Clear DB buffer request Tag component value DB buffer clear processing Execute clear Other than the above The DB buffer is cleared when 1 is written to the specified tag component 0 is written after completion of the clear processing Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the clear processing is completed Even if the value changes however the clear processing is not interrupted 2 To make another DB buffer clear request after completion of clear processing wait for a sampling interval of the specified tag component or more and then turn it ON or write 1 7 6 System Setting T 29 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS im 6 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 5 DB b
459. sampling is selected the choice is fixed to the first item in Access target CPU settings Control CPU Head device a Set a device type and an actual device number b Indexing digit specification and word device specification by bit specification are not allowed c For accessible devices refer to the following Section 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges d When block is selected in Array setting different kinds of devices cannot be set e Set device points as follows The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of Device tag settings e 96 points when High speed sampling is selected e 40000 points when Array setting is set Data type Select the data type of sampling data device data Table 7 36 Options of Data type aon Selectable Item Description g device Single word Handles data as single word data 16 bit Integer type Word Double word Handles data as double word data 32 bit Integer type Word Real number Handles data as floating point data Word Bit Handles data as bit data in units of bits 0 1 Bit String Handles data as character strings Word When Data type is String device values are processed as follows When the device value neither an ASCII code nor shifted JIS code It is replaced with period 2Eh When the device value is model dependent characters The character code may be converted during action execution lt
460. sary Up to 2048 characters Comment FUNCTIONS 1 Project name Up to 32 characters Enter a project name For characters that can be used for project names refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc The set project name is displayed at the project root a a fe o eA o9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U 2 Comment Up to 2048 characters Enter comments about the project as necessary For characters that can be used for comments refer to the following Z i j HOO L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable E names etc 202 ORE a i ann 7 5 Project Setting T 17 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 6 System Setting MELSEC IA series Configure the initial settings for the MES interface module Q Click System setting in the Edit items tree The system setting area is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen Make the setting referring to the following descriptions Ga New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit Yiew Online Help bea Eg NewProject Q System setting Access target CPU settings Device tag settings G Server service settings GB Job settings Network settings Account setting IP address QJ71ME596 Subnet mask Defa
461. se consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OB48h Error in conversion from character string to number Character strings could not be converted to numerical values e Change the setting so that type conversion will be available in any case 0B49h System error 10 2 Error Code List e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem To the next page 10 14 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ E Q O T ol w l m 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 15 Error code 0B4Ah MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Error in conversion from character string to number Description Character strings could not be converted to numerical values Action Change the setting so that type conversion will be available in any case 0B4Bh System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0B4Ch Error in conversion from character string to number Character strings could not be converted to numerical values Change the setting so that type conversion will be available in any case 0B4Dh 0B4Eh System error Error in conver
462. second delimiter ee Y Period 2Eh i 21th and 23th bytes at the aes Millisecond i 3 digit integer 000 to 999 Numbers head of the line 24th byte at the head of the Millisecond Error code delimiter Y Space 20h line Error code Error code Message delimiter Message 25th and 34th bytes at the head of the line 35th byte at the head of the line 36th byte at the head of the line or later Alphanumeric character of 0x 8 digit hexadecimal Space 20h According to the specifications of each log Line feed End of line For error codes refer to the following lt Section 10 2 Error Code List 8 8 Output Log Specifications CR LF ODh 0Ah 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC LE series 8 8 1 Access log The communication contents of the MES interface module and DB Connection Service are output to the access log The following explains the access log contents 1 Service start end a Start Table 8 11 Service start Item Description Output log format Date Error code Service Start Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 Service Start b End Table 8 12 Service end Item Description Output log format Date Error code Service Stop Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 Service Stop 2 Connection disconnection from the MES interface module a Connection Table 8 13 Connection from the MES interfa
463. ses in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date Manual number Revision SH NA 080644ENG A First edition Jan 2007 SH NA 080644ENG B GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS Chapter 1 Sections 2 2 2 4 2 2 5
464. set Has an error occurred in the access log of DB Connection Service Enable writing to the database L gt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L7 Section 10 2 Error Code List Are the relevant records or table locked on the database when inserting updating or deleteing data In Connection result of previous job execution of Remote operation is Connected displayed under Result L gt Section 7 13 3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution e Unlock them on the database and execute it If they are locked the execution is delayed until they are unlocked If Disconnected is displayed correct the setting of Server service settings L7 Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting Check the network connection route to the database server computer Is the Database type setting in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool correct lt Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module Set the database being used To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC KA series From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom Values will not be stored in the database Checked item Is the numb
465. setting file The COY Writing the seting with I 0650h Setting file error eee eo Interface Function Configuration setting file is corrupted Tool A nonexistent module was specified 0659h Network communication for Head I O in Network Correct the Head I O address in route error communication route of Access Access target CPU settings target CPU settings 2i e Please consult your local Mitsubishi O6ABh System error representative explaining a detailed O6ADA description of the problem NEIS e Retry writing the setting with MES Failed to read out the setting file The i 0830h A Interface Function Configuration setting file is corrupted Tool No CompactFlash card has been Install a CompactFlash card a installed e Retry writing the setting with MES 0831h Setting file error a F Failed to read out the setting file The Interface Function Configuration setting file is corrupted Tool wees e Retry writing the setting with MES Failed to read out the setting file The i 0832h ieee Interface Function Configuration setting file is corrupted Tool on e Please consult your local Mitsubishi OBBON System error representative explaining a detailed 08Bih description of the problem OA00h Initialization error A01h Start The CompactFlash card b Oe a S RATE RR Replace the CompactFlash card 0A02h Stop error corrupted OA03h Reset error e Check if the network on the 0A04h Tag related error Tag related e
466. setting in Job settings are displayed lt gt Section 7 10 1 5 Test mode Selecting a job of or icon and clicking the MELSEC Ke series View details button displays the View details dialog box The following explains the display of the View details dialog box View details Action list Program execution result before action Type Database Table Insert mestbl Program execution destination Return value Update mestbl Select mestbl MultiSelect DB mestbl Operation Action details Program execution destination Program execution result after action Return value mo Type MultiSelect Database DB Table name mestbl 10 Request record No Execution result Success Applicable record No 9 2 Acquired record No SQL text Field name Substitute value Tag Type 1 coll 222 0 gt gt TAGI 2 col2 50 0 gt gt TAGI 3 col5 2007 09 01 00 gt TAGI Component A colt g col2 colS SELECT coll col2 cols FROM mestbl WHERE col2 50 Figure 7 96 View details dialog box Table 7 83 Items in the View details dialog box Item Description Action list Displays a list of executed job actions Selecting an action displays its action details Program execution result before action Displays a program execution result before execution of the first action Program execution resul
467. settings Server service settings 2 Import precautions There is a limit on the number of settings for each setting type in a project Check Existing registration information and Import information and select items of each setting type to be imported so that each limit is not exceeded Table 7 12 Number of settings available for each setting type Setting type Allowable number of settings Access target CPU settings 64 Device tag settings 64 Server service settings 32 Job settings 64 2 Ifan item of the same name exists it is overwritten and therefore excluded from the restriction on the number of settings for each setting type T 12 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 4 Importing a project MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file Import an existing CSV file it Any setting can be selected from a CSV file edited on a personal computer and it can be fi imported into the setting of the current project 2 System setting Access target CPU settings and Device tag settings can be imported Q Save the import target CSV files shown in Table 7 13 in the same folder z The files which are shown as Required in the Saving in folder column of Table z 7 13 must be saved in the same folder If any one of them is missing an error is ze detected A When the file shown as Optional is not included in the folder it is imported wit
468. settings is erroneous or invalid e Refer to the accessible device list and reenter a correct device name 0626h Multiple CPU setting error Invalid multiple CPU settings was configured in Access target CPU settings 0627h Network communication route error The network No head I O or station No of the network route which was specified in Access target CPU settings is out of range Correct Access target CPU settings 0628h Tag sampling interval setting error The sampling interval set in Device tag settings is invalid Correct Device tag settings 0629h 062Ah 062Ch 062Dh Setting file error No CPU specification error Failed to read out the setting file The setting file is corrupted The access target CPU specified in the component setting does not exist or its setting was deleted e Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Specify an existing CPU as the access target 062Eh Data type incorrect error There is an inconsistency between the device and data type that were specified in the component setting Any other than Bit was specified for a bit device or Bit was specified for any other than bit device 10 2 Error Code List e Correct the component setting To the next page 10 10 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 1 zZ E
469. settings of the DB Connection Chapter 8 Setting Tool Service 1 2 MX MESInterface Software Configuration OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the MES interface module 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 1 Overall system configuration MELSEC IA series This section shows the overall system configuration when using the MES interface module Oracle SQL Server etc manufactured by other companies y DB Connection Service DB Connection Service Setting Tool Ethernet MES interface module MES Interface Function CompactFlash 4 Configuration Tool card Configuration computer 1 Q QnA ACPU Q QnA ACPU HM Functions provided by MX MESInterface Figure 2 1 Overall system configuration when using the MES interface module 14 The SNTP server computer and configuration computer can be shared with server computers 2 This computer is necessary when using the SNTP server computer time for the MES interface module time lt 3 Section 6 3 Time Synchroniza
470. sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual QJ71MES96 MX MESInterface SW1DNC MESIF E Art no 204927 01012010 A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SH NA 080644ENG Version SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with only this product For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system please read the User s Manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as N WARNING and A CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Se Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Precautions WARNING When controlling a running programmable controller e g data modification create an inter
471. shake startup M100 a 1 x 1 i z E 2 Completion notification M200 ail 2 a L Job cancellation notification M201 i 9 N aR X Job execution Figure 7 57 When the job is executed normally PEO oe When an error occurs during job execution Zu DDO OOF Zw ES oe A e Information linkage status X5 Processing request X100 ps Z z 1 O 6k By 2 In process MO iad is I lt 2 I 4 5s Nall i Z5 Handshake startup M100 i w i I f Completion notification M200 i i I 4 n Job cancellation notification M201 f ma v 8 y 5 rA Error during job execution Figure 7 58 When an error occurs during job execution a a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T7 69 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 70 MELSEC IA series d Program example Accessing to the Redundant CPU 1 Devices used in the program Table 7 52 Device used in program when Redundant CPU is used Device name Device Application MES interface module Input X5 Information linkage status External input command X100 Processing request MO In process M1 Retry flag Internal relay M100 Handshake startup M200 Completion notification Specify at Job settings M201 Job cancellation notificat
472. signable fields If the data type of a tag component does not match the one of its substitution target field an error occurs resulting in cancellation of job execution Point The data type of a tag component will change through operation processing of a job lt gt Section 7 15 4 Type mismatch Table 7 66 Data types of tag components and those of assignable fields Data type of assignable field Oracle 8i Oracle 9i SQL Server Data type of tag Access 2000 component 2000 2005 2008 Wonderware Historian Oracle 10g Access 2003 2007 Oracle 11g MSDE 2000 Yes No type bit Byte type int Integer type smallint Numeric type Integer a Long Integer type NUMBER tinyint Sinal Bit type ingle type Discrete Tag CHAR float Single precision type VARCHAR eve Double type Analog Tag Integer Double precision type AutoNumber type char Currency type varchar 449 4 Text type text nae Memo type V2 N F Pici Migal Single type umere type Floating NUMBER real Double type point CHAR char Text type 2 Analog Tag Real 7 ext type Floating point type VARCHAR varchar ue 42 4 Memo type text char 9 ae ee CHAR varchar Text type String T aracter strin ring Tag 9 VARCHAR tort Memo type Not available for Select Update Delete conditions 2 Memo type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used For Microsoft Access 2007 3 Values are assigned with precision of six decimal d
473. sion from character string to number Character strings could not be converted to numerical values Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Change the setting so that type conversion will be available in any case 0B4Fh to 0B52h 0B53h 0B54h System error Overflow or zero divide error Operation error Assignment to the tag component was not possible Overflow Division by zero was attempted Invalid operation was performed Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Check the tag component type or the substitute value Change the setting to avoid division by zero Change the setting so that any invalid operation will not performed 0B55h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 0B56h Trigger buffer full error The trigger buffer became full Reduce the frequency of job startups and their processing loads 0B57h to OB63h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OB64h DB buffering write error Failed to write data to the DB buffer Change the setting of the DB buffering capacity to ensure a sufficient free space on the CompactFlash card Check if the CompactFlash card is damaged or not
474. splayed execute Restart from Remote operation turn the power OFF and ON or reset the programmable controller CPU 3 Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function Restart the personal computer e Set the same value Communication is not available if different port numbers are set L7 Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool Disable the firewall setting Or enable the communication of the port number for the TCP IP port to be used Default 5112 Is the port specified in Service port of DB Connection Service Setting Tool being used for the database or any other application Change the port number to another that is not being used for the database or any other application lt gt Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting Has any Check Point software been installed in the server computer e Uninstall the Check Point software Is the ODBC setting of the database correct 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom Correct the ODBC setting of the database To the next page 10 40 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module MELSEC A series es XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 0 zZ E Q O T ol w l ao 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubl
475. stem Version 8 76E or Version 1 04E or QO0UJ Q00U Q01UCPU Multiple CPU system later later Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH QO6UDHCPU Single CPU system Version 8 48A or Multiple CPU system later Version 1 02C or later Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Single CPU system Version 8 76E or Multiple CPU system later Version 1 04E or later Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU QO3UDE Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q13UDEH Q26UDEHCPU Q10UDEH Q20UDEHCPU 2 2 Applicable Systems Single CPU system Version 8 62Q or Multiple CPU system Single CPU system later Version 8 68W or Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Multiple CPU system later Version 8 76E or later Version 1 04E or later Version 1 04E or later Version 1 04E or later 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 2 3 Connection System Equipment This section explains the equipment can be connected to the MES interface module OVERVIEW 1 CompactFlash card sold separately The MES interface module requires one CompactFlash card 2 Use either of the following CompactFlash cards Zz O Table 2 3 CompactFlash card sold separately lt Model Description a 9 GT05 MEM 128MC CompactFlash card 128 MB 28 GT05 MEM 256MC CompactFlash card 256 MB QD81MEM 512MBC CompactFlash card 512MB QD81MEM 1GBC CompactFlash card 1GB no Point E 1 For CompactFlash card format use the formatting function of MES Interface G F
476. ster find records box allows extraction of the head record from multiple applicable records When this checkbox is not checked the select update delete processing is not performed EJ Point When Update or Delete is selected for Action type if multiple records to be updated or deleted exist all of them are updated or deleted 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action T 101 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er a fe o eA 9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series 2 Send notification of this exception When the Send notification of this exception box is checked if multiple records to be selected updated or deleted exist a value will be assigned to the specified tag component When Send notification of this exception is selected set a tag component to which the value is assigned e Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Note that the following tags are not selectable Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled Tags for which Array setting is set e Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following lists values that can be entered as a substit
477. t after action Displays a program execution result after execution of the last action Action details 1 2 Displays the action details 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series 1 In the case of Communication action Action details N Type MultiSelect Field name T Substitute value i Tag Type Component la 1 colt gt gt 222 0 BB TAGI coll z 1 Database DB 2 col2 gt gt 50 0 gt gt TAGI col2 _ 3 colS gt gt 2007 09 01 00 gt gt TAGI col5 x Table name mestbl gt gt gt gt u 2 p Request record No 10 a gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 7 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Execution result gt gt gt gt 3 gt Success gt gt gt gt z gt gt gt gt 9 4 gt Applicable record no 9 gt gt gt gt z gt gt gt 5 p Acquired record No 2 gt gt 5 D gt gt gt gt v J L QL text nz SELECT coll col2 cols FROM mestbl WHERE col2 50 D 2 gt 8 P no When the action is Insert 5 Execution result F Success 2 6 Insert records No 1 g N SQL text Figure 7 97 Action details in the case of Communication action of Table 7 84 Items displayed for Communication action g Z OOF Display Description D lt 1 Type Database Table Displays da
478. t setting gt Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting 2 la la 3 y y y v a ITEM COMPNAME CPUNO DATATYPE DEVICE FORMAT 3 COMPONENT1 1 S File format 2 Label Label Description COMPONENT1 1 to COMPONENT64 256 COMPONENT1 2 SINGLE D1003 1 a COMPONENT64 2 Opening degree REAL W100 Yn Lu 6 8 5 z DECIMAL PLACES OPERATOR OPERAND STATISTICS STATTYPE STATSIZE a 0 NONE bisae O Bs 42 NONE sd ENABLE AVERAGE 0 NONE ENABLE MAXIMUM 0 NONE DISABLE Item row Change disabled Label column setting area Can be changed by the user INDEX Device tag settings Component setting input J gt Component name Ez CPU name ControlCPU x Clear Head device 4 a Data type Single word gt bytes Add i gt Perform statistical processing ee e Component List jef U nam Datatype Statistical type ilk Component name in CPU name JE Device 3 l EE N Table App 27 Label Set Device tag settings items No 1 to 64 Component setting items No 1 to 256 COMPONENT64 256 t Indicates Component setting No 1 to 256 Indicates Device tag settings No 1 to 64 e Necessary to set the number of labels set with TAG CSV COMPNUM The label setting following it are ignored Example When TAG CSV label TAG5 has COMPNUM of 10 COMPONENT CSV must set labels COMPON
479. tFlash card 2 Le Point Not following the procedure may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash a y card being accessed or a file system error w Z E BSS he ire 226 SPo re Oy ei 528 lt tr Wo FAIS Zz Ose oo fi ba ann 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 16 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series 1 Stopping file access Stop file access e Turn the File access stop request Y2 ON from OFF 2 Check the file access stop by the following e Check the CompactFlash card status X1 is OFF e Check the File access status X2 is ON e Turn the File access stop request Y2 OFF from ON File access stop request Y2 In operation During sto File access status X2 os gae CompactFlash card status X1 Figure 4 13 File access stop processing 2 Installation of the CompactFlash card Q Open the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module then remove the CompactFlash card slot cover Figure 4 14 CompactFlash card slot cover removal e Put the finger at the bottom of the LED cover that is on the front of the MES interface module and lift the LED cover to open e Put the finger at the top of the CompactFlash card slot cover and then remove the cover 4 17 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A
480. ta of Action type Database and Table name which were set in y g a name Communication action Displays the number of requested records when Select or MultiSelect is selected for Action type 2 Request record No A oe a Note that if the number of requested records is not specified No specification A Z is displayed k Displays the execution result of the SQL text 3 z e When succeeded Z 3 Execution result Success is displayed When failed Failed is displayed Displays the number of selected records when Select Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action type The number of records is stored in Applicable record No as follows z When Execution result is Success 5 Sdledt Number of records that met the Select Update Delete 5 elect conditions 4 Applicable record No 7 Update Number of records that were updated Number of records that met the Select Update Delete MultiSelect 7 conditions Delete Number of records that were deleted When Execution result is Failed Noting is displayed a a fe o eA 9 ra coe EZO 260 36 ZrO z O E O Z Le To the next page DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 12 Online T 2 4 19 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 120 MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 7
481. tag components in project Displays the number of all the tag components in the project No of statistical processings in project Displays the number of the components in the project for which Perform statisticcal processing is selected No of device points in tag Displays the number of total device points used in Device Tag setting 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting T 37 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j er fa fe o eA o9 8 re coe EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 1 Device tag name Up to 16 characters Enter a device tag name Configured tags are used in Job settings etc For characters that can be used for device tag names refer to the following Appendix 2 2 Characters available for item names component names variable names etc Note that using the name same as the one set in Server service settings is not allowed 2 Sampling settings a Normal sampling Tag data are collected at the specified intervals When Normal sampling is selected the tag sampling interval can be set in units of seconds within the range from 1 to 32767 b High speed sampling up to 96 points
482. te 00x to 59x 445 Year 00x to 99x The first two digits of the year Day of the week 0n to 6x 7 Z Q lt Q m O rt a 2 Figure 3 6 Error time area EJ Point 1 The information of the Current error area can be confirmed on the following diagnostic screen a Select System monitor Present Error of GX Developer lt gt Section 10 1 3 System monitor 2 The Current error area can be cleared in either of the following methods a Turn ON the Error clear request Y10 b Power ON the programmable controller from OFF or reset the programmable controller CPU SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 25 3 6 4 Current error area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel series 3 6 5 Error log area 1 Error count Buffer memory address 150 a The cumulative number of registrations to the Error log area is stored 2 Error log write pointer Buffer memory address 151 a The number of error log to which the latest error is registered is stored 0 No error No error log stored 1 or more Error log number of the latest error stored The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest error has been registered into the error log area
483. ted Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable 3 Component Select or directly enter a Component value or a variable that is to be substituted Communication action Action type Update Z Database os1 x Table name CompletionReport DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions afield name Tag Type Component A Come Feldname Condition Tag Type Component 1 Completed lt lt Processi Completed Ghee a eee ata N i j Work_No Process Work No Rejected lt lt Process Rejected Date lt lt Date Server time Delete row Field name x g Diteror 2 G Delete row z Insert a whole tag Exception process setting Generated SQL text UPDATE CompletionReport SET Completed Process1 Completed Rejected Processi Rejected Date CURRENT _TIMESTAMP WHERE Work No Y Process1 Work_No e Cancel No of fields in project 4 Tag component data length in job 3 words total Figure 7 70 Setting example of Update Database DB1 Table name CompletionReport Work_No Completed Rejected Date 536 496 32 2005 07 01 15 12 00 Matched Updated Updated Updated Tag component Process1 Work_No Process1 Completed Process1 Rejected Constant Server time 536 496 32 2005 07 01 15 12 00 Figure 7 71 Operation example of Update 7 86 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11
484. tem English version 2 3 i Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System English version 1 3 4 Operating system a Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English version 1 3 4 5 6 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English version 1 3 4 5 6 Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English version 3 4 5 6 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English version 1 3 4 5 6 PROCEDURE TO SETTINGS AND OPERATION Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English version ba Interface Ethernet 1 64 bit versions of Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 and Windows Vista cannot be used 2 When using Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2000 Professional ServicePack2 or later is required 3 Installing MX MESInterface requires the Administrator s authority Also logging on to MX MESInterface as a user in Administrators group is recommended 4 The following functions cannot be used If any of the following functions is used this product may not operate normally INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Application startup in Windows compatibility mode e User simple switching Yn e Remote desktop F 3 i y s j Large Fonts Detailed setting in the Display Properties unctions cannot be used z 5 For Windows Vista at least 15GB of free space is required as 6 For Windows Vista an author
485. terface Function Configuration Tool 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 7 Online lt gt e Section 7 12 Online e Section 7 13 Online Remote operation Symptom Unable to write a project to the MES interface module Table 10 16 Online Checked item Is the total number of fields in the project more than 8192 MELSEC IA series Corrective action e Delete any unnecessary field settings L7 Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action e Up to 8192 fields can be set within one project Failed in online operation Is the IP address set in Transfer setup of Online correct e Select Online Transfer setup and correct the setting e Perform the online operation for the MES interface module selected from Online Transfer setup Send a PING request from the configuration computer to the IP address of the MES interface module Is there a response If no response is returned check if the module is powered up or if the network is properly connected Has the account set in Transfer setup of Online been registered to the MES interface module e Select Online Transfer setup and correct the setting e Specify the account that is registered in the MES interface module Unable to select One shot execution from Online Was the job for one shot execution selected Select the job for one shot execution and then select Online One shot execution f
486. ternated between true and false in the specified cycles g E gt B x unit seconds and when it changes from false to true the job is activated 3 b When Specified time period startup is selected set the cycle Range 1 to 32767 seconds Trigger 1 Specified time period startup x 2 qL 10 seconds 5 aie Figure 7 48 Specified time period startup QE nO Example The following shows that the job is activated at 60 second intervals for an hour from 12 00 to 13 00 every day z 5 Trigger conditions i Combination AnD ee tales hen ite Was conditions g Trigger 1 Time specification startup x Year Month Day Hour Minute Day Mon Tue Wen Thu J Fr T sat T Sun Trigger 2 Specified time period startup 5 2 Z W 60 seconds moe OOF Foe DOE nao Figure 7 49 Example of setting combination of Time specification startup and Specified time period startup 6 Value monitoring startup a The actual tag component value is compared with the condition value tag component value or constant value at every sampling times and the job is activated when the condition changes from false to true Even if the trigger condition becomes true temporarily between samplings the job is not activated unless it is true at time of sampling INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Startup point FUNCTIONS Startup point i Paa value j Not activated here Tag component value er a fe o eA o9 8 ra
487. tery Classification for Product name Product supply status transportation P Non hazardous Q series battery Q6BAT Lithium battery material Appendix 8 2 Handling for shipping The products are packed in accordance with transportation regulations before shipment When transporting products after repacking or unpacking them make them comply with the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and national transportation regulations For details consult with the shipping carrier App 65 Appendix 8 Transportation Precautions Appendix 8 1 Controlled model APPENDICES M Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states Appendix 9 1 Disposal precautions ELS 26 Q series XML MESSAGE FORMAT In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The symbol shown in Figure App 11 is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers Figure App 11 Symbol Note This symbol is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 I
488. than OPERATION is Any character string selected for TYPE DBTABLE Table name When OPERATION is selected for Blank TYPE When other than OPERATION is 0 to 256 DB Tag link selected for TYPE FILEDSNUM setting When OPERATION is selected for Blank TYPE When SELECT UPDATE Number of select MULTISELECT or DELETE is 0to8 CONDNUM update delete selected for TYPE conditions When other than the above is Blank selected for TYPE When SELECT UPDATE MULTISELECT or DELETE is 2 EXCEPTNUM Exception selected for TYPE a processing count DB buffering is disabled When other than the above is Blank selected for TYPE When OPERATION is selected for 11630 o Operation action TYPE OPENUM count When other than the above is Blank selected for TYPE When SELECT or MULTISELECT dios o Sort condition is selected for TYPE ORDERBYNUM count When other than the above is Blank App selected for TYPE 35 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 13 ACTION CSV APPENDICES MELSEC A series Appendix 3 14 ACFIELD CSV 1 File format XML MESSAGE FORMAT Table App 42 File format Item Description File name ACFIELD CSV Communication action DB tag link settings File contents lt 37 Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action BRB HoH A TROUBLESHOOTING FIELD1 1 1
489. the Trigger conditions gt Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions Start the job when the Trigger conditions change from false to true Did the Combination of Trigger conditions change from false to true completely Correct the Trigger conditions lt gt Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions Start the job when the Combination of Trigger conditions change from false to true When Value monitoring startup is set for Trigger conditions is the time for the monitoring target device value change long enough for the sampling interval of the device tag L gt Section 7 10 2 6 Value monitoring startup Are the device tags used for trigger conditions of jobs sampled normally Increase the time for the monitoring target device value change Latch it in the sequence program Shorten the sampling interval of the device tag L gt Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List In Change job status of Remote operation is the job set to be disabled Enable the job L gt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status To enable the job at startup of the module select Job settings Enable at module startup lt 3 Section 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting Is there any other job that is being executed Has an error or
490. the MES interface module Error name DB update error Description Failed to update the DB Action e Check the sent SQL text and database contents e Check if the table and field settings are correct lt When the database is Microsoft Access 2000 2003 2007 gt e Check if 128 or more fields are set for update actions e Check if multiple accesses have been made to one file at the same time accesses from multiple MES interface modules OBACh SQL execution error SQL execution caused an error Check the sent SQL text and database contents Check if the table and field settings are correct Check if the uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated or not OBADh ODBC connection error during SQL execution An error occurred when opening the ODBC connection by SQL execution Check the sent SQL text and database contents Check if the table and field settings are correct OBAEh to OBB5h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem OBB6h OBB7h Execution error Program execution function Failed to generate an event when executing the program Failed to generate a thread when executing the program OBB8h Specified program file not exist Program execution function There is no execution file of the program that is specified f
491. the No of components eeseeeeeoeesceaeoeoevceeeeseceaeeeceeoeeeoeeeeaeceeceeeece ec eeeeeee eee eee 8 FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 31 3 6 8 Current tag data value area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 32 MELSEC IA series 5 Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 a The current values of the tag components whose No is specified with the No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 are stored b Two words are assigned per tag component 1300 1301 1302 1303 1810 1811 Current value of tag component 1 Current value of tag component 2 Current value of tag component 256 Figure 3 12 Current tag data value area c Data are stored as follows depending on the data type for the tag component Single precision Double precision Floating point Character string bit Upper word Lower word 0 Current value Current value Current value 4th character 3rd character 2nd character 1st character 0 Figure 3 13 Data type of tag component Only the first four characters are stored 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 8 Current tag data value area 0 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LE series 3 6 9 Access target CPU setting status area 1 Access target CPU setting information
492. the Q series MELSECNET 10 Abbreviation for MELSECNET 10 network system supporting the AnU and QnA Q4AR MES interface module Abbreviation for the QJU71MES96 MES interface module Product name for the model name SW1DNC MESIF E MX MESInterface Generic term for the QO2CPU A QO2HCPU A and QO6HCPU A QCPU A mode QCPU Q mode Generic term for the QOOJCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Generic term for the AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 QC24 N A1SJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N R2 A1SJ71QC24N1 and A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 Generic term for the AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 eeu A1SJ71QE71N3 T A1SJ71QE71N B5 and A1SJ71QE71N B2 onacputi it itsts SCSCSCS eC term for the Q2ACPU QZACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 QZASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU A Generic term for the QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 and Q series C24 QJ71C24 R2 Q series E71 Generic term for the QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 and QJ71E71 B2 Generic term for the AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF UC24 A1SJ71024 R2 A1SJ71024 R4 A1SJ71024 PRF
493. the external supply power used by the system in all phases before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Do not install remove the module to from the base unit more than 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Failure to do so may cause malfunction Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery Doing so may damage the battery resulting in a battery fluid leakage inside the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it Before handling a module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operation Precautions WARNING Make sure safety before controlling a running programmable controller e g data modification Do not write any data to the System area in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module As for signals output from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module never output ON a Use prohibited signal Doing these operations may cause malfunctions of the programmable controller system Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of the product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refe
494. the number of the settings to be imported for each setting type MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 1 Selecting an item to be imported In the tree select the item to be imported W gt Table 7 16 Item to be imported Checked item Item to be imported Project root All items in the project Setting type All items under the setting type whose checkbox is checked Item Each item whose checkbox is checked O When the setting type shown below is selected items under any other setting type are E m automatically selected if they are used for the selected one ao Note that if an item of the same name exists in the target project the item is not automatically selected The user must select items to be imported no Table 7 17 Automatically selected item Setting type Automatically selected item E Device tag settings Access target CPU settings a 2 Import precautions There is a limit on the number of settings for each setting type in a project 2 gs i 3 Iz Check Existing registration information and Import information and select items of 282 Fi ere ZW each setting type to be imported so that each limit is not exceeded E Ww e Table 7 18 Number of settings available for each setting type Setting type Allowable number of settings Access target CPU settings 64 Device tag settings 64 2 Ifan item of the same name exists it i
495. the tag component type or component error type specified for the tag component the substitute value OB2Ah e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative explaining a detailed 0B2Dh description of the problem 0B2Eh Data stored in the DB buffer are DB buffer content error invalid The CompactFlash card may Replace the CompactFlash card 0B2Fh be corrupted A part of invalid data in the DB buffer f has been corrected Partial correction of DB 0B30h A part of the DB buffered data in the buffer content CompactFlash card may have been corrupted Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0B31h System error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0B32h MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name DB buffer clear error Description Failed to clear the DB buffer The CompactFlash card may be corrupted 0B33h DB buffer file error The DB buffer file is invalid The CompactFlash card may be corrupted 0B34h DB buffer content error Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid The CompactFlash card may be corrupted e Replace the CompactFlash card OB35h to OB3Ah OB3Bh System error DB buffer full error Because the D
496. the unused tag components by zero 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 9 Generated SQL text The SQL text generated by the currently editing Communication action is displayed It indicates the display format of the tag component constant value Note that data of Tag component Unit time Date String and Variable are generated at job execution and displayed in the format shown in Table 7 75 It is different from the actual SQL text Table 7 75 Display format of the tag component constant value Item Description Tag component Device tag name component name Numerical value Number String String Unit time TO_DATE Date YYY YMMDDhhmmss Oracle 8i YYYYMMDDHH24MISS Server time sysdate Oracle 9i Unit time TO_DATE Date YYYYMMDDhhmmss Oracle 10g YYYYMMDDHH24MISS Date Oracle 11g Server time CURRENT_TIMESTAMP SQL Server 2000 2005 2008 Unit time Date YYYY MM DD hh mm ss MSDE 2000 Server time CURRENT_TIMESTAMP Wonderware Historian Access 2000 Unit time Date YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Access 2003 2007 Server time NOW Date String Date String Variable Variable name 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 107 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPE
497. ther to show or hide the toolbar Status bar Select whether to show or hide the status bar D 4 Online z f A N Transfer setup Write ae Z W Read moe Vari OOF Verify Zug l RoE Remote operation nao View working log One shot execution a Figure 7 8 Online menu 23 ZS Sg Table 7 4 Online menu items Z ean Reference af Item Description j section Transfer setup Set the target MES interface module Section 7 12 1 Write Writes the MES interface function settings project to the MES interface module Section 7 12 2 Yn Reads the MES interface function settings project from the MES interface Read Section 7 12 3 module Q Compares the MES interface function settings in the MES interface module with iz Verify i Section 7 12 4 those in the current project 7 Displays or changes the operation status of the MES interface module or formats Remote operation Section 7 13 3 a CompactFlash card View working log Allows users to check the operation logs of the MES interface module Section 7 12 5 Q R S g One shot execution Executes a job as a one shot task Section 7 12 6 g5 LOOO O Ol ee 5 zE 226 ZrO re Oy ei 528 wee Zos gt F nh ann 7 3 Screen Structure T 5 7 3 2 Menu configuration MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 5 Help Item Product information Connection to MELFANSweb MELSEC Le series
498. time between the MES interface module and other devices on the network using the time on the SNTP server computer is recommended Time synchronization setting Synchronize with PLC CPU time C Synchronize with SNTP Figure 7 21 Time synchronization setting 1 When Synchronize with PLC CPU time is selected When the Synchronize with PLC CPU time radio button is selected the time is adjusted to the time of CPU No 1 The timing is as follows e When powering ON the programmable controller from OFF e When resetting the programmable controller CPU e Once a minute 2 When Synchronize with SNTP is selected a When the Synchronize with SNTP radio button is selected the time is adjusted to the time of the SNTP server computer on the network The timing is as follows e When powering ON the programmable controller from OFF e When resetting the programmable controller CPU e Once a minute b When Synchronize with SNTP is selected set the following items Table 7 23 Setting items when Synchronize with SNTP is selected Item Description SNTP server address Enter the IP address of the SNTP server or NTP server in decimal required notation Default No setting Select a time zone used for time synchronization Default GMT 09 00 Japan Standard Time Configure the daylight saving time settings Default No setting Time zone required Daylight saving setting T 20 7 6 System Setting 7 6 2 Setting
499. time of the MES interface module to be changed to the daylight saving time during the period of summer time using the clock time of the SNTP server computer For the daylight saving time setting refer to the following K7 Section 7 6 2 2 When Synchronize with SNTP is selected 1 About the daylight saving time function When Daylight saving setting is enabled one hour is added at the daylight saving start time and one hour is subtructed at the daylight saving ending time The following is an example of the start and end of the daylight saving time Example When the daylight saving time starts at 02 00 on the second Sunday in March and ends at 02 00 on the first Sunday in November 2nd Sunday in March 1st Sunday in November At the specified time of the start date the time is set ahead one hour Daylight saving time Before correction After correction Figure 6 23 Daylight saving time function 2 Precautions At the specified time of the end date the time is set back one hour a If Time specification startup is set for a trigger condition of a job the following may Occur e The job does not start at the daylight saving start time e The job starts two times at the daylight saving ending time b The daylight saving time function is enabled when clock time information is acquired from the SNTP server computer For processing performed when clock time informat
500. ting input Component name _ Head device Component List Perform statistical processing Ei Prohibit data writing 1 seconds Enhance sampling efficiency Devices must be connected in series roci El a bytes Data type Single word r wje 2 9 9 Component name AY 413 No of tag components in project 0 CPU name Device Data type Statistical type No of statistical processings in project 0 No of device points in tag 0 Figure 7 30 Device tag settings Table 7 34 Setting items in Device tag settings Item Description Device tag name Sampling settings Prohibit data writing Enter a device tag name Up to 16 characters Set whether to collect tag data at regular intervals or not When collecting set a sampling interval Also set whether to make the sampling more efficient or not Enable or disable writing data to the tag Array setting Set whether to use arrays for the tag or not Section 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting Component setting input Component List Configure the tag component settings C gt Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting Displays a list of the components that have been already set Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting Array block size Make setting when changing the block size manually L gt Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting No of
501. tings select the Update settings radio button Clicking the Execute button restarts the MES interface module and updates the settings For writing the MES interface function settings refer to the following lt gt Section 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings When Update settings is performed the operation behavior is as follows 1 During the setting update the MES interface function is temporarily stopped No job is executed during the stop 2 After the setting update the MES interface function is operated 3 The data changed in Change job status are cleared L gt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status 4 The written MES interface function settings are updated 5 The trigger buffer area and the DB buffer area are cleared EJ Point Update settings may change the programmable controller CPU control Ensure the safety before executing it 4 Clear error When Error status is Continuation error take corrective actions to remove the error cause Then select the Clear error radio button and click the Execute button Doing so clears the error status The ERR LED on the MES interface module turns off e The Current error area buffer memory address 140 to 145 is cleared e The latest error code displayed in System monitor of GX Developer is cleared C gt Section 10 1 3 System monitor 7 13 Online Remote operation 7 13 2 Manipulating th
502. tion Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co Is this registration information corect Input ProductID Please enter the product ID of the product Please input in single byte English characters E lt Back Cancel Choose Destination Location The setup will install SWnDNC MESIF in the following directory Click Next to install in this directory Click Browse and select the directory for installing in other directory Click Cancel for not installing Destination Folder CAMELSECS Browse Cancel J To the next page 6 Check the user name and company name registered If the registration contents are correct click the Yes button No button to return to the previous screen Register the product ID Enter the product ID then click the button The product ID is shown on the software registration card that came with the product Next gt Specify the folder for installation destination When using the default folder click the button Browse To change the folder click the then specify the drive and folder for installation destination REMARKS Up to 100 characters including MESIF can be used for the installation destination This means that up to 94 characters can be used when specifying a destination folder as a directory 5 1 Installation MELSEC TE eries When changing the registration conten
503. tion behavior of jobs Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log lt 3 Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions 3 Section 10 2 Error Code List Was the job execution time prolonged If the job execution time is prolonged startup of the next job may be delayed L gt Section 6 1 10 1 Operation behavior of jobs Was the value in the Monitoring interval timeout count area buffer memory address 11510 increased 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom Check and correct the number of job settings or trigger condition settings To the next page 10 44 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module se XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 0 zZ E ie O z wo W j a O E APPENDICES INDEX 10 45 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom Job execution is slow Selecting Resend from DB buffering operation of Remote operation will not resend buffered SQL texts of the job for which manual resend is selected lt gt Section 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering Checked item Is the processing load of the server computer is appropriate Corrective action e Check if the processing load of a personal computer for server is excessive
504. tion e Wait for startup of the module Is the Watchdog timer error X1F ON Is the battery connected Or has the battery voltage dropped If a watchdog timer error is identified please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the battery connection e Replace the battery Is any of the error detection signals X11 X12 X16 and X1C ON X11 Sampling error X12 Information linkage error X16 Access target CPU error X1C Another error Check the error code in System monitor of GX Developer e According to the error code obtained by the error detection shown on the left identify the error cause and take corrective actions By the error code identify the error and take corrective actions Module READY X0 does not turn ON or it takes time to turn ON Is the module in preparation Depending on the number of items set in Access target CPU settings it may take several minutes until XO turns ON Are there many files in the installed CompactFlash card If many files are stored in the CompactFlash card it takes time to turn XO ON Delete unnecessary files from the CompactFlash card CompactFlash card status X1 does not turn ON or it takes time to turn ON Is file access stopped X2 is ON Cancel the file access stop Are there many files in the installed CompactFlash card 2 Troubleshooti
505. tion Function 3 The redundant server system and database cannot be used 2 1 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 1 Overall system configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 2 System configuration for installation 26 Q series This section shows system configurations for installing MX MESInterface 1 When installing DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool on a server computer MX MESInterface LS DB Connection Service DB Connection Service Setting Tool Installation gt Server computer Commercialized product Figure 2 2 Installing DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool EJ Point 1 When installing DB Connection Service on a database server computer the ODBC setting for the database used must be done beforehand gt Section 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 2 When installing DB Connection Service on an application server computer an account for user program execution must be created beforehand 2 When installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool on a configuration computer MX MESInterface Installation MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Configuration computer Commercialized product Figure 2 3 Installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 2 System configurat
506. tion module of GX Developer set Mode setting to Self loopback test Switch 1 0002h Match the other intelligent function module switch settings to the setting contents used SPECIFICATIONS 2 Self loopback test execution A If a cable has been connected to the 1OBASE T 100BASE TX interface disconnect it Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status e wW ao e a WW Q x a fa Zz LEF B RE E W eo nao Reset the programmable controller CPU 4 After the programmable controller CPU is reset the following self loopback test is executed automatically 1 Self loopback check This test checks whether data can be sent to received from in the MES interface module During the test the ERR LED flashes INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 3 Confirmation of the self loopback test result Q Check the ERR LED status to see the self loopback test result FUNCTIONS Table 4 7 Self loopback test result ERR LED status Self loopback test result OFF Completed ON Failed When the test is completed normally set the Mode setting to Online with Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer and reset the programmable controller CPU Switch 1 0000h MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION When the test has failed conduct the self loopback test again If an error occurs again a possible cause is the hardware error of the ME
507. tomation Ltd UKRAINE Vestienas iela 2 4 B M Raskovoyi St LV 1035 Riga UA 02660 Kiev Phone 371 0 784 2280 Phone 380 0 44 494 33 55 Fax 371 0 784 2281 Fax 380 0 44 494 33 66 Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Savanoriu Pr 187 LT 02300 Vilnius Phone 370 0 5 232 3101 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V FA European Business Group Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel 49 0 2102 4860 Fax 49 0 2102 4861120 info mitsubishi automation com www mitsubishi automation com
508. ton inserts all of the tag components into contiguous rows starting from the selected one e The existing data set in the rows starting from the selected one are moved down Remark Sooo oo ocr 1 Entry of Component When data are entered in Component by Insert a whole tag or with the Field name space blank the data are copied to the Field name space Characters not allowed for Field name are not entered Because of this setting the same name to each of the field name and tag component name is useful eeseeeeeveeseeooeoevceeac ese eceeeeeoeec ee eee eceeee eee eee eeecee eee eee 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 83 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j mm 3 a mi Z n w al Q ie E z O F 65 O oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC IA series 1 Action type Select an action type Table 7 65 Selection items for Action type Item Description 4 Substitutes a field value of the record whose conditions are met for Select a substitute value tag component value variable 4 Substitutes a substitute value tag component value variable for a Update field value of the record whose conditions are met freee Generates a new value
509. ts click the button OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION ol ja 25 5 EJ Sz eZ 23 FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL D SINSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELSEC Q series From the previous page 9 When the left screen appears installation is complete Click the OK button Information W Completed the installation of this product To restart the computer check the Yes want to restart my computer now checkbox then click Restarting Windows Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer th e OK b utton Choose one of the following options and click OK to finish setup To not restart the computer check the No will restart my computer later checkbox then click the OK button C No will restart my computer later The dialog box for selecting the component to be MX MESInterface 5 y installed is displayed Select the component which wants to be installed lw interface function configuration tool PWNONCMESIF ba tool to configure MES When installing the other software select the a modules This tool is executed by DB connection service and setting tool Seip lye Copa A component to be installed with the radi
510. ts etc 2 Ifthe same user name already exists the existing name is overwritten If the same user name is set multiple times the setting of the label with the higher number is overwritten App 15 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 4 ACCOUNT CSV APPENDICES 26 Q series Appendix 3 5 DST CSV Lu oO i rs 1 File format B te 23 aoa Table App 15 File format ze Item Description File name DST CSV System setting Time synchronization setting A File contents make sores eis 5 lt gt Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting re g 2 EE pst ENABLE 3 E E gt S_MONTH MAR El s_TYPE WEEK Ef s WEEKNUM l2 Eb S_DAYOFWEEK SUN N I s_DAY la m EA S_HOUR 02 Gi E gt MONTH NOV z EJ E_TYPE WEEK Ha E_WEEKNUM l1 EE E_DAYOFWEEK SUN A E DAY EEJ E_HOUR 02 Q Label column Cannot be changed by the user Z File format Setting area Can be changed by the user Daylight saving setting Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 5 DST CSV Daylight saving setting Enable daylight saving Cancel App 16 APPENDICES 2 Label Table App 16 Setting items MELSEC IA series Item Description Setting
511. ttery errors are not detected by turning ON the battery error detection setting Switch 2 Bit 2 with intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer Refer to the following for the intelligent function module switch settings of GX Developer K7 Section 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery 4 24 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC IA series 4 10 Removing Battery for Storage When storing the MES interface module without mounting a battery make sure to perform the shutdown operation then power OFF the programmable controller and remove the battery Point Not doing so may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash card being accessed or a file system error a Operation procedure 1 Mount the programmable controller CPU and MES interface module on the base unit and power ON the programmable controller CPU Stop file access Turn the File access stop request Y2 ON from OFF Confirm that file access has stopped Check the File access status X2 is turned ON 4 Power OFF the programmable controller CPU 5 Remove the battery from the MES interface module File access stop request Y2 In operation During stop V Power OFF the programmable controller and remove the battery File access status X2 Figure 4 22 Removing battery for storage
512. tting IP address port number user name password data source name z Communication action Table name field name Z2 When the database is Wonderware Historian the following SQL text is sent during execution y 5 of Communication action that is set in the job gee SQL text INSERT INTO History DataTime TagName Value SELECT TOP 0 NULL NULL NULL When any one of the following items is incorrect an error will occur gt Server Service setting IP address port number user name password data source name An error will not occur even when Communication action is incorrectly set z Ta Clicking the Execute button changes the job status g N 7 13 5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering f ae ae The current and past maximum values of No of DB buffering data and buffer utilization Zu can be viewed Ga Fom DO DB buffering status Now Maximum No of bufferings 33 33 Buffer utilization 0 0 Figure 7 104 DB buffering status INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Table 7 90 Items displayed in DB buffering status Description iig A Ai Displays the current number of Displays a past maximum value in the No of bufferings 3 buffered data jobs that have been number of buffered data jobs that buffered have been buffered ae Saale Displays a past maximum value in the Buffer utilization 1 3 Displays the current buffer utilization FUNCTIONS buffer utilization The buffer
513. tting items in the Communication action dialog box Item Description Action type Select an action type Database Select a database to be accessed Table name Set a table name of the database to be accessed Set assignments between field values and tag component values or constant values Select Update Delete When Select Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action conditions 1 type set conditions for the records to be selected updated or deleted DB tag link settings a When Select or MultiSelect is selected for Action type set a condition A 4 Select sort settings for sorting selected records To the next page 1 Up to 8192 fields can be set in DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions and Select sort settings for each project The setting can be checked on the status bar of Job settings or in the Communication action dialog box 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 7 64 Setting items in the Communication action dialog box Item Description Exception process setting button Set the processing to be performed in the following cases No corresponding record exists when Select Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action type e Multiple corresponding records exist when S
514. ttings Server type Database server IP address 0 0 Port No 1024 to 65535 User name Password Confirm password Data source name Database type Oracle 9i Access error notification setting J Notify the access error status Connection timeout 1 to 180 Figure 7 40 Server service settings Point 1 How to add delete copy or move an item For information on how to add delete copy or move an item refer to the following C gt Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 2 When an item is added or copied a New server item is added T7 50 7 9 Server Service Setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting Up to 32 items can be set in Server service settings within one project a Ss m gt O Server service name NewServer zZ Server type Database server x O z IP address E 0 0 S ao Port No 1024 to 65535 5112 B Se nO User name Password Confirm password no Zz Data source name O z Database type Oracle 9i x 2 O Access error notification setting Notify the access error status a Connection timeout 1 to 180 10 seconds oe Figure 7 41 Server service settings Zu n50 OOF Zw a Table 7 39 Setting items in Server service settings nao Item Description Sever service name Enter a server servic
515. tware DB buffering is executed after detection of a timeout Recovery from network disconnection Job startup Job startup Job startup gt Sending SQL texts After sending SQL texts timeout detected After sending SQL texts timeout detected DB buffering DB buffering Auto resending executed executed DB buffer data Figure App 1 When auto resend is set for a job b For an MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later For the processing refer to the following L7 Section 6 1 9 7 When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database App 3 Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESinterface Appendix 1 2 Operations of former versions APPENDICES MELSEC A series 2 Trigger monitoring function The operation conditions for starting a job are as described below XML MESSAGE FORMAT a For an MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 11011 or earlier The job can be started only when the device tags used for trigger conditions of all jobs have been sampled normally b For an MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 11012 or later The job can be started when the device tags used for trigger conditions of the job have been sampled normally The job can be started even if device tags used for another job s trigger conditions have not been sampled normally TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES IND
516. uffering full a Select a tag component into whose device the status of whether the DB buffer Auto resend or Manual resend area is full or not is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set b Data are stored as follows depending on the data type Table 7 31 Values stored in DB buffer full Data type of ta YE 2 Description component Bit OFF DB buffer is not full i ON DB buffer is full 0 DB buffer is not full 1 DB buffer is full Other than the above c When the DB buffer becomes full even if a DB buffering enabled job is activated its SQL texts are discarded without being buffered Note that execution of a DB buffering enabled job is not canceled Point Check DB buffer utilization shown in 6 to prevent the DB buffer full status 6 DB buffer utilization a Select a tag component into whose device the utilization of the DB buffer area Unit is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set b Data are stored as follows depending on the data type Utilizations are compared between the auto resend and manual resend areas and data of a greater one is stored Table 7 32 Values stored in DB buffer utilization Data type of tag ORS Description component OFF Not accumulat
517. uffering function This section explains the operations of the job for which Trigger buffering is enabled a In anormal case Trigger interval gt Processing time for action e When trigger conditions are met tag data and trigger time are stored in the trigger buffer Based on the information in the trigger buffer an action is executed immediately MES interface module Normal case Job 1 i Sk Trigger i Action conditions met i q execution Figure 6 5 In a normal case 6 7 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series b In the case of load concentration Trigger interval lt Processing time for action e Every time a trigger condition is met tag data and trigger time are stored in 3 the trigger buffer gt e When action processing is not completed in time up to 128 pieces of trigger 3 information are stored in the buffer Zz MES interface module 2 When loads are concentrated 5 F uT Job 1 1 Trigger buffer Job 1 1 y Z Trigger Job 1 2 Trigger information tag data time Action Oe conditionsmet Job 3 3 Trigger information tag data time execution conditions met Executes action of Job 1 1 and stores 2 trigger information of Job 1 2 and 3 3 o 3 E is ae in the trigger buffer S fal Lu Time The numbers 1 to 3 show the order in whi
518. ule Q06CCPU V B x x No of modules High Performance model QCPU 64 o Applicable x N A 2 5 2 2 Applicable Systems 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 ELS a6 Q series Limited within the range of I O points for the CPU module Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 09012 or later Can access host station only Cannot access other stations For the Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH QO6UDHCPU Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 09042 or later For the QO2PH QO6PHCPU and QO0UJ Q00U Q01U Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH QO03UDE Q04UDEH QO06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEHCPU Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 10012 or later Extension base unit cannot be installed to a safety CPU 2 2 Applicable Systems 2 6 OVERVIEW N FA Q 4 a a Le Zz fe SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA series E Point Use a MES interface module appropriate to each CPU module If an unsupported one is used for a
519. ully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series programmable controller you have purchased so as to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS anti case coeeevs sadact ees a TEA EAA AAE R T A TER R A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT aoier aia EAE EEE A AE N A 6 REVISIONS usanii a a eae eee ee A RAN R eevee A 7 INTROUUC TON ornamita E E A E E tt toneleaenl ada cgaadeiens A 9 CONTENTS aruanne aati eration ttohe Gidie adh ae ea eee steed A 9 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 ececccceeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaees A 15 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL tives cecceveeticccecvudece devel aieiai ii eiaa E bed E r a dau aceeuvbetaded aE A 16 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS pirrer Aeren E TEAG ANNATE EAER KEAREN EEEE TRA A 18 DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeenaeeeeeseaaas A 20 PACKING LIST gezipscheses ted cocctaces oteeuatecete ces uat a ink dngbsets du tenes EE a Acces A 22 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 8 ET Features tesccccececsci dee ieee beeeedeelndenetie neds nade a igndde dhs ndgd eed edeeded AAA a a AEEA NEA ANa 1 2 1 2 MX MESInterface Software Configuratio seisein ier ienien iee aeni EENE EREE RER iE ERR EEn Eaa 1 8 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 19 21 gt system Configuration sissies nec ce an ee i 2 1 2 1 1 Overall system configuration eee cee eeete eee eeeee eee teeee eter eteeeeeeeteeee
520. ult gateway Time synchronization setting Synchronize with PLC CPU time Synchronize with SNTP DB buffering settings Component DB buffering status No of DB bufferings Resend DB buffer request Clear DB buffer request DB buffer Full DB buffer utilization 64 MB DB buffering capacity Default Figure 7 19 System setting Table 7 21 Setting items in System setting Item Description Network setting Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module to the network lt 3 Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Time synchronization setting Account setting Make the time setting for the MES interface module Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface module Section 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting DB buffering setting Configure the settings for the DB buffering function Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting Default button Clicking the Default button returns System setting to the initial status 7 18 7 6 System Setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LA series 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module to the network it 5 m gt 6 Network settings IP ad
521. unction Configuration Tool 5 K gt Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card 2 A CompactFlash card has a service life restriction on the number of writes For details refer to the specifications of each product ag Z z B22 Zw ES wo oO nao INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 3 Connection System Equipment 2 8 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA series 2 Twisted pair cable sold separately Use twisted pair cable that meets IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards a For 100 Mbps Either 1 or 2 of the following can be used 1 Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP cable Category 5 or higher 2 Shielded twisted pair cable STP cable Category 5 or higher b For 10 Mbps Either 1 or 2 of the following can be used 1 Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP cable Category 3 or higher 2 Shielded twisted pair cable STP cable Category 3 or higher Point During high speed communication 100 Mbps via 100BASE TX connection communication errors may occur due to the effect of high frequency noise generated from the equipment other than programmable controller depending on the installation environment Take the following countermeasures on the MES interface module side to eliminate the effect of high frequency noise when constructing the network system 1 Wiring Do not install the twisted p
522. unication action etc FUNCTIONS a fa fe o eA o9 ra E z E EZO 260 6 ZrO z O E O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 39 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Q series eeeeeeseeeeoeaoeeeoeeeeoceoeeevseeseseeeeeeeaeeeoeoeeeeaoeseeeaeeaeeeeee 1 Creating a user specified system area The following explains how to create a user specified system area in the program memory of the control CPU Q Select Online Format PLC memory from the menu of GX Developer As the Format PLC memory dialog box appears select Create a user setting area in Format Type Ensure 1K step for High speed monitor area from other station per MES interface module 1 4 Clicking the button executes formatting of the PLC memory Format PLC memory Connection target information Connection interface juse PEES PLC module Target PLC Station no Host PLC type QO6H Target memory Program memory Device memory v Format Type C Do not create a user setting system area the necessary system area only Create a user setting system area 4 Separately from th areasised by 4 p n K steps High speed monitor area from other station 1l 0 15K steps GX Developer and or GOT 1K step Online change area of multiple blocks is required per MES interface Online ch
523. ur during a job execution i Job execution is canceled when access to the database fails or when type mismatch is 2 found IL Section 6 1 10 2 When an error occurs in job execution Section 7 15 4 Type mismatch z 9 MV Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution Component Substitute value E a isl Job_cancellation lt lt ON Jg Figure 7 64 Setting example of Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution 1 Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution 9 a Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors job cancellation that occur 5 during job execution G A When Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution box is 2 checked if job execution is canceled a value is assigned to the specified tag component b Set a tag component to which the value is assigned when this is selected 2 Iz 1 Tag Component SRS Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Fou nao Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set 2 Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Table 7 56 Values that can be entered as a substitute value Data type of tag i Values that can be entered as a substitute value component Bit ON OFF is selecta
524. us in which the job is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met Job disabled status e This is the same operation as that of disabling the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool job Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC A series 9 1 XML Message Format Definition The XML message format is comprised of request messages and response messages This section explains the XML message format definition E Point XML MESSAGE FORMAT 1 The maximum size of request message after applying URL encoding that the MES interface module can process is 128K bytes 9 If the size exceeds 128K bytes an error code is returned as the response i message 3 Cc Section 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response messages 5 1 Request message REQUEST tag yn Table 9 2 Request message REQUEST tag Omission Not possible g lt REQUEST type Instruction of job execution jobname Job Format name gt Specifies the instruction of job execution required ype oneshot One shot execution Attribute validate Validate invalidate Invalidate x jobname Specifies the job name to be executed 2 Contents None Sub component None a One shot execution An example for one shot execution of the job named Pro01 1 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt REQUEST type oneshot jobname Pro01 gt b Validate An example enabling the job named Pr
525. used for the login e Log in again with a user ID having the administrator authority Is there no permitted IP address Uncheck the Limit IP addresses permit to connect checkbox or add an IP address for which connection is permitted Unable to export a file An access log output error is recorded in Event Viewer of Administrative Tools in Windows An SQL failure log output error is recorded in Event Viewer of Administrative Tools in Windows Is there no permitted IP address Is the file set in Output destination read only Is the access to the folder containing the file set in Output destination authorized e Uncheck the Limit IP addresses permit to connect checkbox or add an IP address for which connection is permitted Correct the file specification Check the right of access to the folder Is the drive space of the server computer full Is the file set in Output destination read only Is the access to the folder containing the file set in Output destination authorized e Check the free space on the drive Correct the file specification e Check the right of access to the folder Is the drive space of the server computer full e Check the free space on the drive The DBConnector service failed to start due to the following error The system cannot find the file specified is recorded in Event Viewer of Administrative Tools in Window
526. ute value Table 7 72 Values that can be entered as a substitute value Data type of tag Values that can be entered as a substitute value component Bit type ON OFF is selectable Up to 16 characters Single precision integer Signed decimal notation Double precision integer Example 521 98 Floating point type Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the Character string following lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 3 Continue this job Finish this job e When Continue this job is selected After executions of exception processing described in the above 1 and 2 the system continues executions of other actions e When Finish this job is selected After execution of exception processing described in 1 and 2 the job is forcibly terminated without executing remaining actions At this time update insert delete values before execution of the exception processing are committed and they are written to relevant tag components 4 Point 1 When a job is forcibly terminated due to exception processing an error occurred during job execution job cancellation is not notified lt gt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation 2 If Enable DB buffering is selected for a job its exception process setting is disabled lt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffe
527. uter in the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Example Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 3 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Figure 2 6 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box 2 3 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 3 System configuration for initial setup 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 2 1 4 System configuration for operation This section shows the system configuration when operating the MES interface module E Point The MES interface module can only be connected with a LAN The module cannot be connected via the Internet OVERVIEW N MES interface module Zz Q 4 a a Le Zz fe SYSTEM Twisted pair cable Ethernet Server computer SNTP server computer SPECIFICATIONS Configuration computer Figure 2 7 System configuration for operating the MES interface module SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIG
528. utilization is stored as an integer Digits after decimal point is truncated Utilizations are compared between the auto resend and manual resend areas and data of a greater one is displayed 2 The maximum values are cleared when the MES interface module power is turned OFF When power is reapplied No of bufferings and Buffer utilization at the time are displayed as maximum values 3 The space is displayed as blank during data acquisition or in the case of failure of data acquisition j m 5 a im Z 0 w al Q O d z O 65 O oL 56 rO EJ Point When the buffer utilization is high ensure the capacity of the CompactFlash card C gt Section 7 6 4 7 DB buffering capacity Range 16MB to 512MB Default Z 64MB 628 ZuO ann 7 13 Online Remote operation T 129 7 13 5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering MELSEC IA series Operate the DB buffering For the DB buffering function refer to the following lt 3 Section 6 1 9 DB buffering function DB buffering operation Resend C Clear Execute Figure 7 105 DB buffering operation 1 Resending data stored in the DB buffer Selecting the Resend radio button and clicking the Execute button executes the resend processing of the SQL texts stored in the DB buffer when manual resend is selected for
529. v y uw OUTCONSTTYPE OUTPUT a OPERATION1 3 1_ TAG g File format OPERATIONS 1 1_ VARIABLE m Correction voltage OPERATION5 1 2_ VARIABLE e Correction voltage CERA TONS 1 3 TAG 6 Ez 9 i y IN1CONSTTYPE IN1TAG IN1ELEMENT INPUT1 OPERATION IN2CONSTTYPE Zz TAG DEVIDE _ TAG a lt x 1 TAG MULTIPLY _ NUMBER 2 VARIABLE Correction voltage ADD NUMBER VARIABLE Correction voltage MULTIPLY TAG IN2TAG 1 in 2 z 15 Item row Label column setting area Operation action Operation action Substitution tag Component Operationtag Component Operator Operationtag Component iz lt lt lt lt EE EA E Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV App 42 APPENDICES 2 Label Label Table App 52 Label Description MELSEC IA series OPERATION1 1 1 to OPERATION64 10 20 3 Setting item Job settings No 1 to 10 Action No 1 to 10 Operation action No 1 to 20 OPERATION64 10 20 Indicates Operation action No 1 to 20 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 Table App 53 Setting item Item Description Setting value OUTCONSTTYPE Substitution Tag TAG const
530. variable settings Are there 64 variables that were already Unable to set a new variable k of the job defined in the job A Up to 64 variables can be set for one job Select any other than Handshake Unable to select Trigger 2 in Trigger Is Handshake operation selected for operation for Trigger 1 conditions Trigger 1 e When Handshake operation is selected 2 selection is not allowed for Trigger 2 3 A desired device tag name is not displayed in Completion notification of Handshake z operation A desired device tag name is not displayed in the field of Substitution tag for Select in Communication action A desired device tag name is not displayed Set the tag to data write enabled in the field of Substitution tag in Exception Is the tag set to data write disabled C gt Section 7 8 1 Setting items in x processing of Communication action Device Tag setting S A desired device tag name is not displayed in the field of Substitution tag in Operation action A desired device tag name is not displayed under Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution 7 Is the DB buffering enabled Disable the DB buffering Unable to set Exception processing in ae Set any other than Insert for Action Communication action Is Insert set for Action type type ype 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 1 0 36 10 3 1 When using MES In
531. vice se XML MESSAGE an FORMAT 0 zZ E Q O T ol m l D 2 O v4 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0x20300010 MELSEC IA series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error description and cause SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP address Connection disconnected during request reception 0x20300011 SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP address Timed out during request reception 0x20300012 SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP address Detected failure of the MES interface module while waiting for or receiving a request 0x20300013 SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP address Receive I O error Corrective action e Check if it is connected to the network e Check if the gateway and or hub is operating e Check if the power of the module is not turned off 0x20300014 SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP address Buffer overrun Request length exceeded 0x20300015 SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP address Received an invalid request e Check if the source IP address belongs to the MES interface module 0x20310010 0x20310011 SID Session ID Response Transmit Error IP address Failed to transmit a response due to disconnection SID Session ID Response Transmit Error IP address
532. wisted pair cable is connected Appendix 5 External Dimensions App 55 APPENDICES MELSEC LA series Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly XML MESSAGE FORMAT This section explains the method for collecting data from CPUs that cannot be accessed directly hereafter explained with the Motion CPU 1 Auto refresh using CPU shared memory in a multiple CPU system By performing auto refresh between the QCPU and Motion CPU in the multiple CPU system device data in the Motion CPU can be read to the QCPU Registering device data read to the QCPU with tags enables to handle the device data in the Motion CPU TROUBLESHOOTING N xor Settings required for auto refresh Set the devices to which data are stored and the number of points sent by each CPU with PLC parameter Multiple CPU settings Refresh settings of GX Developer For auto refresh settings refer to the following manual lt gt QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System APPENDICES 3 Acquisition example of the Motion CPU device data a System configuration INDEX MES interface module CPU No 1 Motion CPU CPU No 2 Figure App 6 System configuration Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly App 56 APPENDICES App 57 MELSEC IA series b Refresh settings for the Motion CPU CPU No 2 Set the number of points to be sent
533. wn below This setting can reduce the load of the MES interface module e Tags for which Array setting is set e Tags that perform writing only Tags that use handshaking for sampling device values 5 For handshaking refer to the following re L gt Section 7 10 2 8 Handshake operation 08 e When reserving the tag 2 Tags with Do not sample setting cannot be selected in the items provided for tag read setting Except for the case where the trigger condition is set to 2 Handshake operation Tag component value for Select Update Delete conditions of Select in Communication action etc a 3 When a system switching occurs to the Redundant CPU collection of device tag may stop for about 15 seconds of lt vz 3 Enhance sampling efficiency Bae If the Enhance sampling efficiency box is checked sampling and reading of tag data ae under handshake operation can be executed at high speed This can be selected when device numbers of all the devices registered to the tag are sequential This is not selectable when Array setting is set 4 Prohibit data writing Set whether to enable or disable writing data to the tag This is not selectable when Array setting is set INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Point Tags for which data writing is prohibited cannot be selected in the setting items provided for writing to tags e Completion notification of Handshake operation substitution tags of Select in Comm
534. xecution settings after action execution Item Description ae Execute program before Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution Zu RAO after action of actions OOF Eor Program execution a E O ui iat Select an application server to be accessed WES destination Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application Command line server computer Up to 127 characters Check return value Set whether to check the return value or not Wait for execution Set whether or not to wait for execution completion of the program before completion executing the next processing INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 1 Execute program before action or Execute program after action a Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution of actions b When Execute program before action or Execute program after action is enabled make the setting described in 2 and subsequent sections FUNCTIONS j 2 Program execution destination Select an application server to be accessed 3 Command line Up to 127 characters Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application server 2 mn 5 a im Z n w al Q ie E z O 65 O oL 56 rO computer For characters that can be used for command lines refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Pr
535. xts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or failure of the database server computer or database software the system starts DB buffering after detection of a timeout After started DB buffering is performed without checking whether SQL texts can be sent to the database or not for each job activation The data stored in the DB buffer are resend when manual resend is executed Recovery from network disconnection a Job startup Job startup e operation After sending SQL texts timeout detected DB buffering DB buffering Resending DB executed executed buffer data Figure 6 17 When manual resend is selected for the job Manual resend 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 20 6 1 9 DB buffering function OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION ez o Zz O O Z 5 Le MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series 6 1 10 Precautions 1 Operation behavior of jobs a When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job 1 When Trigger buffering is disabled for the job Because the job is being executed it is not executed again interval Job startup Job startup x Job startup Job execution __Jobexecution Another job is not executed du
536. y targets in Selected Actions to 4 From Source Jobs select a job that includes a desired action INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Actions of the job selected in be copied Multiple selection is available Clicking the gt button displays the action s selected in 6 in Selected Actions to replicate Table 7 57 Button operations in the Replicate Actions of other Jobs dialog box Item Description n 2 O E O Zz 5 U Puts the action s selected in Source Actions into Selected Actions gt button 7 to replicate Puts all of the actions in Source Actions into Selected Actions to 3 gt gt button f el replicate u zZ fe Deletes the action s selected in Selected Actions to replicate from z E lt button toe the box wos zk gt Deletes all of the actions in Selected Actions to replicate from the ages lt lt button box 28 Clicking the Run button executes copying Copied actions are placed after existing actions DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 79 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series Actions Type Summary 1 Select DB1 RECIPEDATA RECIPE1 gt gt Process1 RECIPE1 RECIPE2 gt gt Process1 RECIPE2 RECIPE3 gt gt 2 Update DB1 CompletionReport Completed lt lt Process1 Completed Rejected lt lt Process1 Rejected Da
537. ystem error Receive data length error A request that is not permitted during RUN was issued The receive data length or the byte length exceeded the limit 00D8h Protocol error The communication protocol is not correct Check the CPU s on the access route e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the cables on the access route 00D9h OODBh Address error Write error The address is not correct Writing is not executable Check the CPU s on the access route OOEOh Station No error The specified station number does not exist Check the station number setting in Access target CPU settings 00E1h Processing mode error The access target CPU is not capable of processing the request e Check the PLC series in Access target CPU settings 00E2h Intelligent function module specification error The specified intelligent or special function module is faulty e Correct the UO GO buffer memory data in Device tag settings OOE3h Other data error The request data has an error Check the CPU s on the access route 00E4h Link specification error A link module on the access route received a request that cannot be handled The access route is not supported Check the access route referring to the accessible range OOE8h System error e P
538. z Section 7 6 System Setting amp Select Online Transfer setup from the menu The Transfer setup dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the _OK_ button Transfer setup IP address 192 168 3 3 User name Password Connection test Cancel Figure 7 90 Transfer setup dialog box Table 7 79 Setting items in the Transfer setup dialog box Item Description Specify the IP address of the MES interface module in decimal notation IP address Example 192 168 3 3 Specify a user name 1 to 20 characters User name Case sensitive Example QJ71MES96 Specify a password 8 to 14 characters Password Case sensitive Example MITSUBISHI Checks if the device of the specified IP address is connectable to the MES interface module Connection test T 112 7 12 Online 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSE TA eries 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings Write the MES interface function settings project to the MES interface module a i Perform either of the following Click Write Select Online Write from the menu g 0 UT MX MESInterface 2 A dialog box asking for confirmation is 26 The data will be written into the MES interface module of the IP address 192 168 3 3 peta displayed Clicking the

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Logitech M545  AtonCL411ISDN  PF3W Series    Sharkoon QuickPort DUO USB3.0  e-motion X185/69E-GB-TCDUP-UK User guide  Home Decorators Collection CTAASETS4922D Installation Guide  User Manual for P-Card Faxing System click here.  Sony VGN-NW310B User's Manual  Bedienungsanleitung  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file